Panasonic HC WXF991/HC VX981 WX991 Owner’s Manual Adv En Om

HC-VX981 - Owner’s Manual hc-vx981_hc-wxf991_adv_en_om Free User Guide for Panasonic Camcorder, Manual - page1

User Manual: panasonic HC-WX991 - Owner’s Manual Free User Guide for Panasonic Camcorder, Manual - page1

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 262 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Read this first
Contents
Preparation
Basic
Advanced (Recording)
Advanced (Playback)
Copy/Dubbing
Wi-Fi
Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera
With a PC
Others

Owner’s Manual

4K Video Camera

Model No. HC-WXF991

HC-VX981

Please read these instructions carefully before using this product,

and save this manual for future use.

SQW0527

until

2016/2/29

- 2 -

∫About the recording format for

recording motion pictures

You can select from AVCHD*1, 4K MP4*2,

MP4*2, iFrame*2 or 24p*2 recording formats to

record motion pictures using this unit. (l91)

*1 It is compatible with the AVCHD

Progressive (1080/60p).

*2 It is not compatible with motion pictures

recorded in AVCHD format.

AVCHD:

It is suitable for viewing on a high-definition TV

or for saving to disc*3.

*3 The following methods are available for

saving an image recorded in 1080/60p:

jCopy the image to a disc using the

HD Writer AE 5.3.

jCopy the image to a Panasonic Blu-ray

disc recorder that supports AVCHD

Progressive.

≥Blu-ray recorders are not sold in US.

4K MP4:

This is a recording format suitable for editing

images.

This format can record 4K motion pictures

(3840k2160/30p), which deliver a resolution

four times higher than that of full high-definition

motion pictures.

MP4:

This is a recording format suitable for playing

back or editing on a PC.

iFrame:

This is a recording format suitable for playing

back or editing on a Mac (iMovie etc.).

24p:

This allows you to record images similar to

those shot on a roll of cinema film.

Images can be recorded as 4K motion pictures

(3840k2160/24p) or in high-definition picture

quality (1920k1080/24p).

∫Indemnity about recorded

content

Panasonic does not accept any responsibility

for damages directly or indirectly due to any

type of problems that result in loss of recording

or edited content, and does not guarantee any

content if recording or editing does not work

properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a

case where any type of repair is made to the

unit.

∫About Condensation

(When the lens, the viewfinder

or LCD Monitor is fogged up)

Condensation occurs when there is a change in

temperature or humidity, such as when the unit

is taken from outside or a cold room to a warm

room. Please be careful, as it may cause the

lens, the viewfinder or LCD monitor to become

soiled, moldy, or damaged.

When taking the unit to a place which has a

different temperature, if the unit is accustomed

to the room temperature of the destination for

about one hour, condensation can be

prevented. (When the difference in temperature

is severe, place the unit in a plastic bag or the

like, remove air from the bag, and seal the bag.)

When condensation has occurred, remove the

battery and/or the AC adapter and leave the

unit like that for about one hour. When the unit

becomes accustomed to the surrounding

temperature, fogginess will disappear naturally.

∫Cards that you can use with

this unit

SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and

SDXC Memory Card

≥4 GB or more Memory Cards that do not have

the SDHC logo or 48 GB or more Memory

Cards that do not have the SDXC logo are

not based on SD Memory Card

Specifications.

≥Refer to page 16 for more details on SD

cards.

∫For the purposes of this

owner’s manual

≥SD Memory Card, SDHC Memory Card and

SDXC Memory Card are referred to as the

“SD card”.

Read this first

- 3 -

≥The smartphone and tablet are indicated as

“smartphone”.

≥Function that can be used for Motion Picture

Recording Mode:

Function that can be used for Still Picture

Recording Mode:

≥Function that can be used for the Playback

Mode:

Function that can be used for the Playback

Mode (motion pictures only):

Function that can be used for the Playback

Mode (still pictures only):

≥Scene(s) recorded in the recording format

[AVCHD]: “AVCHD scene(s)”

≥Scene(s) recorded in the recording format

[4K MP4] and scene(s) recorded in 4K Photo

mode: “4K MP4 scene(s)”

≥Scene(s) recorded in the recording format

[MP4/iFrame], scene(s) saved in

MP4 (1920k1080/30p), MP4 (1280k720/

30p) or MP4 (640k360/30p): “MP4/iFrame

scene(s)”

≥Scene(s) recorded in the recording mode

[iFrame]: “iFrame scene(s)”

≥Scene(s) recorded in the recording format

[24p]: “24p scene(s)”

≥Scene(s) containing only the Main Camera’s

image that was recorded separately from a

simultaneously recorded normal scene when

[Backup for Twin Camera] was set to [ON]:

“Scene(s) recorded as Backup for Twin

Camera”

≥Pages for reference are indicated by an

arrow, for example: l00

≥Model numbers are abbreviated as follows in

this owner’s manual:

Model number Abbreviation used in

this owner’s manual

HC-WXF991 [WXF991]

HC-VX981 [VX981]

WXF991

VX981

This owner’s manual is designed for use with

models and . Pictures may be

slightly different from the original.

≥The illustrations used in this owner’s manual

show model , however, parts of the

explanation refer to different models.

≥Depending on the model, some functions

are not available.

≥ and correspond to Wi-Fi®

functions.

≥Features may vary, so please read carefully.

≥Not all models may be available depending

on the region of purchase.

WXF991 VX981

WXF991

VX981

- 4 -

Read this first .................................................2

Preparation

Names and Functions of Main Parts ............ 7

Power supply................................................ 11

Inserting/removing the battery ............... 11

Charging the battery .............................. 12

Charging and recording time ................. 13

Recording to a card ..................................... 16

Cards that you can use with this unit ..... 16

Inserting/removing an SD card .............. 17

Turning the unit on/off ................................. 19

Selecting a mode ......................................... 20

Switching this unit between Recording

Mode and Playback Mode ..................... 20

Switching this unit between Motion

Picture Recording Mode and Still Picture

Recording Mode .................................... 21

LCD monitor/viewfinder .............................. 22

How to use the touch screen ................. 22

Viewfinder adjustment [WXF991] .......... 23

About the Touch Menu........................... 24

Setting date and time................................... 25

Basic

Before recording .......................................... 26

Recording motion pictures .........................28

Recording still pictures ............................... 30

Recording still pictures in Motion Picture

Recording Mode .................................... 31

Registering your favorite scenes while

recording 4K motion picture................... 32

Motion picture/Still picture playback ......... 33

Using the menu screen ...............................37

Using the Setup Menu ................................. 38

Advanced (Recording)

Using the zoom ............................................49

Zoom ratio during the Still Picture

Recording Mode..................................... 49

HDR Movie Mode..........................................50

Recording with the Sub Camera

(Twin Camera) [WXF991] .............................51

Changing and adjusting the settings of

the Sub Camera and the Sub Window... 54

Recording with the Backup for Twin

Camera Function..........................................57

Changing the Recording Mode ...................59

Intelligent Auto ....................................... 60

Intelligent Auto Plus ............................... 62

Creative Control ..................................... 62

HDR Movie Mode................................... 65

Scene Mode........................................... 66

Cinema Like Effect [WXF991]................ 67

FULL HD Slow Motion Video

[VX981] .................................................. 71

4K Photo Mode ...................................... 71

Stop Motion Animation Assist ................ 72

Manual recording .........................................73

White Balance........................................ 74

Manual shutter speed/iris adjustment .... 75

Manual Focus adjustment...................... 76

Recording with the Touch Function ...........79

Touch function icons .............................. 79

Recording functions of operation icons ....83

Operation icons...................................... 83

Recording functions of menus ...................89

Contents

- 5 -

Advanced (Playback)

Playback Operations ................................. 103

Motion picture playback using

operation icon ...................................... 103

Creating still picture from motion

picture .................................................. 104

Highlight & Time Frame Index ............. 104

Repeat Playback ................................. 105

Resuming the previous playback......... 105

Setting the playback speed of

FULL HD Slow Motion Video ............... 106

Zooming in on a still picture during

playback (Playback zoom)................... 106

Various playback functions ...................... 107

Playing back motion pictures/still

pictures by date ................................... 107

4K Cropping......................................... 108

Highlight Playback ............................... 112

Manual Edit.......................................... 118

Baby Calendar..................................... 122

Tagging Favorite Scene ....................... 124

Changing the playback settings and

playing back the slide show................. 125

Playing back still pictures recorded in

Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode as

a slide show ......................................... 127

Deleting scenes/still pictures ................... 128

Deleting part of a scene (AVCHD/

Backup for Twin Camera) .................... 130

Dividing a scene (AVCHD/Backup for

Twin Camera) ...................................... 131

Dividing a scene to partially delete

(4K MP4, MP4/iFrame)........................ 132

Protecting scenes/still pictures ............ 133

Convert to MP4........................................... 134

Slow speed conversion ............................. 136

Watching Video/Pictures on your TV ....... 137

Connecting with an HDMI micro cable

... 139

Listening in 5.1 channel sound

(AVCHD).............................................. 140

Playback using VIERA Link ...................... 140

Copy/Dubbing

Copying/playing back with a USB HDD ...142

Preparing for copying/playing back...... 142

Simple copy ......................................... 145

Copy selected files............................... 145

Playing back the USB HDD ................. 146

Dubbing with a Blu-ray disc recorder,

video device, etc. .......................................148

Using the Eye-Fi™ card.............................152

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi® function ...........................................155

[Link to Cell] ...............................................157

Preparations before using

[Link to Cell] ......................................... 158

Using [Link to Cell] with a direct

connection............................................ 159

Using [Link to Cell] with a wireless

access point connection....................... 160

About [Link to Cell]............................... 161

[Baby Monitor]............................................163

Preparations before using

[Baby Monitor]...................................... 163

Using [Baby Monitor]............................ 164

[Home Cam] ................................................166

Preparations before using

[Home Cam]......................................... 166

Using [Home Cam]............................... 167

[DLNA Play] ................................................171

Preparations before using

[DLNA Play] ......................................... 171

Playing back on a TV ........................... 172

[Copy] ..........................................................173

Preparations before using [Copy] ........ 173

Copying to a PC................................... 175

[Live Cast]...................................................177

Preparations before using

[Live Cast]............................................ 178

Broadcasting live.................................. 179

Install the “Image App”..............................183

Setting Up a Wi-Fi Connection..................184

Using the [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard] to set

up a connection.................................... 185

Connecting to a wireless access

point ..................................................... 186

Setting up a direct connection to a

smartphone .......................................... 189

- 6 -

Connecting from the history................. 191

If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be

established .......................................... 192

How to Use the [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu ......... 194

Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera

Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function ...... 200

Notes on the Wireless Twin/

Multi-Camera function ......................... 202

Using a Smartphone as a Wireless Sub

Camera........................................................ 203

When connecting a smartphone to this

unit as a Wireless Sub Camera for the

first time (To use the Wireless Twin

Camera function) ................................. 203

When connecting a smartphone to this

unit as a Wireless Sub Camera for the

first time (To use the Wireless

Multi-Camera function) ........................ 207

When connecting for the second

time or later.......................................... 210

Terminating the connection.................. 211

Recording with a Wireless Sub Camera

(Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera) ................... 212

Screen display when using a Wireless

Sub Camera ........................................ 212

Changing the Wireless Twin Camera

settings ................................................ 215

Changing the Wireless Multi-Camera

settings ................................................ 216

If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be

established (Wireless Twin/

Multi-Camera) ............................................. 220

With a PC

What you can do with a PC .......................221

Before Installing HD Writer AE 5.3....... 223

Operating environment..............................225

Installation ..................................................228

Connecting to a PC ....................................229

About the PC display ........................... 231

Starting HD Writer AE 5.3 ..........................232

Reading the operating instructions of

the software applications ..................... 232

If using Mac (mass storage)......................233

Others

Indications ..................................................234

Messages ....................................................238

About recovery..................................... 239

Troubleshooting .........................................240

Cautions for use.........................................246

About copyright .........................................250

Recording modes/approximate

recordable time ..........................................251

Approximate number of recordable

pictures .......................................................252

Optional accessories .................................254

About the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle ....... 255

- 7 -

1Video light (l86,102)

2Lens (LEICA DICOMAR)

≥For information on how to attach the

supplied lens hood, refer to page 27.

3Infrared light (l86)

4Internal microphones

5Lens cover

≥The lens cover opens in Motion Picture

Recording Mode or Still Picture Recording

Mode. (l20)

6Multi Manual Dial [CAMERA FUNCTION]

(l73, 100)

7Grip belt

Adjust the length of the grip belt so that it fits

your hand.

1Flip the belt.

2Adjust the length.

3Replace the belt.

8Wi-Fi Transmitter (l156)

9Headphone terminal [ ] (l88)

≥Excessive sound pressure from earphones

and headphones can cause hearing loss.

≥Listening at full volume for long periods may

damage the user’s ears.

10 DC input terminal [DC IN] (l12)

≥Do not use any other AC adaptors except the

supplied one.

Preparation

Names and Functions of Main Parts

WXF991

VX981

7 8







- 8 -

11 only

Recording mode selector button

[ /4K PHOTO/ ] (l21)

12 Recording/playback button [ / ]

(l20)

13 HDR button [ ] (l50)

14 Wi-Fi button [Wi-Fi]

(l157, 163, 166, 171, 173, 177, 191, 194,

203, 207)

15 Battery release lever [BATT] (l11)

16 Power button [ ] (l19)

17 USB terminal [] (l142, 149, 229)

18 Micro HDMI connector [HDMI]

(l137)

19 A/V connector [A/V] (l137, 151)

20 Microphone terminal [MIC]

≥A compatible plug-in powered microphone

can be used as an external microphone.

≥If you connect an external microphone when

a setting other than [AUTO] is selected for

[MIC LEVEL] (l99), (Microphone

input level meter) will be displayed.

≥When the unit is connected with the AC

adaptor, sometimes noise may be heard

depending on the microphone type. In this

case, please switch to the battery for the

power supply and the noise will stop.

21 Speaker

22 only

Shoe adaptor release lever

[SHOE ADAPTOR RELEASE] (l254)

WXF991

VX981

1817

ヮリヤモバヷ

20191817

モバヷ

21 ヮリヤ

WXF991

VX981

- 9 -

23 LCD monitor (Touch screen) (l22)

≥It can open up to 90o.

≥It can rotate up to 180o A towards the lens or

90o B towards the opposite direction.

24 Battery holder (l11)

25 Shoulder strap fixture

26 Recording start/stop button (l28)

27 Status indicator (l19, 184)

28 only

Viewfinder (l22)

29 only

Eyecup

≥Keep the Eyecup out of reach of children to

prevent swallowing.

30 only

Eyecup mount (l27)

31 only

Diopter adjustment dial (l23)

32 only

Shoe adaptor mounting part

[SHOE ADAPTOR] (l254)

33 Sub Camera (l51)34 Sub Camera dial (l52)

WXF991

VX981

252423252423

32 26 2726 27



WXF991

VX981

WXF991

- 10 -

35 Tripod receptacle

≥Attaching a tripod with a screw length of

5.5 mm (0.22 q) or more may damage the

unit.

36 Access lamp [ACCESS] (l18)

37 SD card cover (l17)

38 Card slot (l17)

39 Photoshot button [ ] (l30)

40 Zoom lever [W/T] (In Motion Picture

Recording Mode or Still Picture

Recording Mode) (l49)/

Thumbnail display switch [ / ]/

Volume lever [sVOLr] (In Playback

Mode) (l35)

41 only

Accessory shoe cover

≥Close this cover when not using the

accessory shoe.

42 only

Accessory shoe

≥You can attach a variety of optional

accessories to the shoe adaptor. For

information on how to attach and use those

accessories, refer to their manuals.

WXF991

VX981

37 36

40 4139 39

WXF991

- 11 -

∫About batteries that you can use with this unit

The battery that can be used with this unit is VW-VBT190/VW-VBT380.

≥The unit has a function for distinguishing batteries which can be used safely. The

dedicated battery (VW-VBT190/VW-VBT380) supports this function. The only batteries

suitable for use with this unit are genuine Panasonic products and batteries manufactured

by other companies and certified by Panasonic. Panasonic cannot in any way guarantee

the quality, performance or safety of batteries which have been manufactured by other

companies and are not genuine Panasonic products.

Inserting/removing the battery

≥Press the power button to turn off the unit. (l19)

Install the battery by inserting it in the direction shown in the figure.

Preparation

Power supply

It has been found that counterfeit battery packs which look very similar to the genuine

product are made available to purchase in some markets. Some of these battery packs

are not adequately protected with internal protection to meet the requirements of

appropriate safety standards. There is a possibility that these battery packs may lead to

fire or explosion. Please be advised that we are not liable for any accident or failure

occurring as a result of use of a counterfeit battery pack. To ensure that safe products are

used we would recommend that a genuine Panasonic battery pack is used.

Removing the battery

Be sure to hold down the power button until

the status indicator goes off. Then remove the

battery while supporting the unit to prevent it

from dropping.

Move the battery release lever in the

direction indicated by the arrow and

remove the battery when unlocked.

ャモヵヵ

Insert the battery until it clicks and locks.

- 12 -

Charging the battery

The unit is in the standby condition when the AC adaptor is connected. The primary circuit is always

“live” as long as the AC adaptor is connected to an electrical outlet.

Important:

≥Do not use the AC adaptor/DC cable with any other equipment as it is designed only for

this unit. Also, do not use the AC adaptor/DC cable from other equipment with this unit.

≥The battery will not be charged if the unit is turned on.

≥It is recommended to charge the battery in a temperature between 10 oC and 30 oC (50 oF

and 86 oF). (The battery temperature should also be the same.)

ADC input terminal

Connect the DC cable to the AC adaptor and to the DC input terminal of this unit.

≥Insert the plugs as far as they will go.

2Insert the AC adaptor into an AC outlet.

≥The status indicator (l9) will flash red at an interval of approximately 2 seconds (approximately

1 second on, approximately 1 second off), indicating that charging has begun.

It will turn off when the charging is completed.

∫Connecting to the AC outlet

It is possible to use this unit with power supplied from the AC outlet by turning on the unit with the

AC adaptor connected.

Even when you use the AC adaptor for recording images, keep the battery connected.

This allows you to continue the recording even if a power failure occurs or the AC adaptor is

unplugged from the AC outlet by accident.

∫To charge by connecting to other device

It is possible to charge by connecting to other device with the USB cable (supplied).

Please refer to page 230.

≥If the status indicator flashes at a particularly fast or slow rate, refer to page 247.

≥We recommend using Panasonic batteries (l13).

≥If you use other batteries, we cannot guarantee the quality of this product.

≥Do not heat or expose to flame.

≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in a car exposed to direct sunlight for a long period of time with

doors and windows closed.

When this unit is purchased, the battery is not charged. Charge the battery fully before

using this unit for the first time.



- 13 -

Charging and recording time

∫Charging/Recording time

≥Temperature: 25 oC (77 oF)/humidity: 60%RH

≥When using the LCD monitor

≥The indicated charging time is for when the battery has been discharged completely.

Charging time and recordable time vary depending on the usage conditions such as high/

low temperature.

≥Charging times in parentheses are when charging from the USB terminal.

≥Maximum continuous recordable times and actual recordable times in round parentheses are the

values when the viewfinder is used.

≥

Maximum continuous recordable times and actual recordable times in square parentheses are the

values when recording is performed with the Sub Camera in combination with the LCD monitor

*1.

*1 These include times when is displayed on the screen.

For the

Battery model

number

[Voltage/Capacity

(minimum)]

Charging

time

Recording

format

Recording

mode

Maximum

continuous

recordable

time

Actual

recordable

time

Supplied battery/

VW-VBT190

(optional)

[3.6 V/1940 mAh]

2h20min

(5h20min)

[4K MP4] [2160]

1h25min

(1h30min)

[1h5min]

45 min

(45 min)

[35 min]

[MP4/

iFrame]

[1080/50M],

[1080/28M]

1h40min

(1h45min)

[1h15min]

50 min

(55 min)

[40 min]

[720]

(2h5min)

[1h25min] 1h

(1 h 5 min)

[45 min]

[iFrame]

(2h10min)

[1h30min]

[AVCHD]

[1080/60p],

[PH]

1h40min

(1h45min)

[1h15min]

50 min

(55 min)

[40 min]

[HA], [HG]

1h40min

(1h50min)

[1h15min]

[HE]

1h40min

(1h50min)

[1h20min]

[24p]

[2160/24p] 1h35min

(1h40min)

50 min

(50 min)

[1080/24p] 2h

(2h10min)

(1 h 5 min)

WXF991

- 14 -

Battery model

number

[Voltage/Capacity

(minimum)]

Charging

time

Recording

format

Recording

mode

Maximum

continuous

recordable

time

Actual

recordable

time

VW-VBT380

(optional)

[3.6 V/3880 mAh]

3h45min

(9h45min)

[4K MP4] [2160]

3h5min

(3h15min)

[2h25min]

1h35min

(1h40min)

[1h15min]

[MP4/

iFrame]

[1080/50M]

3h30min

(3h45min)

[2h40min]

1h50min

(1h55min)

[1h25min]

[1080/28M]

3h35min

(3h50min)

[2h45min]

1h50min

(2 h)

[1h25min]

[720]

4h10min

(4h30min)

[3h5min] 2h10min

(2h20min)

[1h35min]

[iFrame]

4h15min

(4h35min)

[3h10min]

[AVCHD]

[1080/60p]

3h30min

(3h45min)

[2h40min]

1h50min

(1h55min)

[1h25min]

[PH], [HA],

[HG]

3h35min

(3h50min)

[2h45min] 1h50min

(2 h)

[1h25min]

[HE]

3h40min

(3h55min)

[2h45min]

[24p]

[2160/24p] 3h25min

(3h35min)

1h45min

(1h50min)

[1080/24p] 4h20min

(4h40min)

2h15min

(2h25min)

- 15 -

≥“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “min” for minute and “s” for second.

≥These times are approximations.

≥The actual recordable time refers to the recordable time when repeatedly starting/stopping

recording, turning the unit on/off, moving the zoom lever etc.

≥The batteries heat up after use or charging. This is not a malfunction.

For the

Battery model

number

[Voltage/Capacity

(minimum)]

Charging

time

Recording

format

Recording

mode

Maximum

continuous

recordable

time

Actual

recordable

time

Supplied battery/

VW-VBT190

(optional)

[3.6 V/1940 mAh]

2h20min

(5h20min)

[4K MP4] [2160] 1 h 25 min 45 min

[MP4/

iFrame]

[1080/50M],

[1080/28M] 1h35min 50min

[720],

[iFrame] 1h50min 55min

[AVCHD]

[1080/60p] 1 h 35 min

50 min

[PH], [HA],

[HG], [HE] 1h40min

[24p] [2160/24p] 1 h 35 min 50 min

[1080/24p] 2 h 1 h

Battery model

number

[Voltage/Capacity

(minimum)]

Charging

time

Recording

format

Recording

mode

Maximum

continuous

recordable

time

Actual

recordable

time

VW-VBT380

(optional)

[3.6 V/3880 mAh]

3h45min

(9h45min)

[4K MP4] [2160] 3h 1h30min

[MP4/

iFrame]

[1080/50M],

[1080/28M] 3h25min 1h45min

[720],

[iFrame] 4h 2h5min

[AVCHD]

[1080/60p] 3 h 25 min 1h45min

[PH] 3 h 30 min

[HA],

[HG], [HE] 3h30min 1h50min

[24p] [2160/24p] 3 h 20 min 1 h 45 min

[1080/24p] 4 h 10 min 2 h 10 min

VX981

- 16 -

The unit can record still pictures or motion pictures to an SD card. To record to an SD card, read the

following.

Cards that you can use with this unit

Battery capacity indication

≥The display changes as the battery capacity reduces. ####

If there is less than 3 minutes remaining, then will become red. If the battery

discharges, then will flash.

≥Screen display will disappear when no touch operation is performed for a specific period of

time. However, it will be constantly displayed when the remaining battery time becomes less

than 30 minutes.

≥The remaining battery capacity is displayed when using the Panasonic battery that you can

use for this unit. The actual time can vary depending on your actual use.

≥When using the AC adaptor or batteries made by other companies, the remaining battery

capacity will not be shown.

Preparation

Recording to a card

Card type Capacity

SD Memory Card 512 MB to 2 GB

SDHC Memory Card 4GB to 32GB

SDXC Memory Card 48 GB to 128 GB

≥Please check the latest information on the support website below.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam

(This website is in English only.)

≥When using an SDHC Memory Card/SDXC Memory Card with other equipment, check the

equipment is compatible with these Memory Cards.

≥An Eye-Fi X2 series SD card is required to use functions related to Eye-Fi. (l152)

≥We do not guarantee the operation of SD cards other than the ones above. Further, SD cards

with a capacity of less than 32 MB cannot be used for motion picture recording.

≥Operation is not guaranteed for all SD cards.

≥4 GB or more Memory Cards that do not have the SDHC logo or 48 GB or more Memory Cards

that do not have the SDXC logo are not based on SD Memory Card Specifications.

≥When the write-protect switch A on SD card is locked, no recording,

deletion or editing will be possible on the card.

≥Keep the Memory Card out of reach of children to prevent swallowing.

- 17 -

∫About the Speed Class ratings for recording motion pictures

Depending on [REC MODE] and [REC FORMAT], the required card differs. (l91)

Use a card that meets the following ratings of the SD Speed Class. Use of a non-compatible

card may cause recording to stop suddenly.

≥SD Speed Class is the speed standards regarding continuous writing. To check the class, see the

labelled side, etc. of the card.

≥In the following situations, you need an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD Speed

Class Rating to record motion pictures.

Use of a non-compatible card may cause recording to stop suddenly.

jFULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode (l68, 71)

j4K Photo Mode (l71)

jWhen [Backup for Twin Camera] is set to [ON] (l57)

j(For the )

Slow & Quick Video Mode

Inserting/removing an SD card

Caution:

Check that the access lamp has gone off.

Recording formats Recording modes Speed Class ratings Label examples

4K MP4 [2160]

Class10

24p All

MP4/iFrame

[1080/50M]

[1080/28M], [720],

[iFrame] Class4 or more

AVCHD All

When using an SD card not from Panasonic, or one previously used on other equipment, for the

first time on this unit, format the SD card. (l45) When the SD card is formatted, all of the

recorded data is deleted. Once the data is deleted, it cannot be restored.

WXF991







- 18 -

Access lamp [ACCESS] A

≥When this unit is accessing the SD card, the access lamp lights up.

1Open the SD card cover and insert (remove) the SD card into (from) the card

slot B.

≥Face the label side C in the direction shown in the illustration and press it straight in as far as it

will go.

≥Press the center of the SD card and then pull it straight out.

2Securely close the SD card cover.

≥Securely close it until it clicks.

≥Do not touch the terminals on the back of the SD card.

≥Do not apply strong shocks, bend, or drop the SD card.

≥Electrical noise, static electricity or the failure of this unit or the SD card may damage or erase the

data stored on the SD card.

≥When the card access lamp is lit, do not:

jRemove the SD card

jTurn the unit off

jInsert and remove the USB cable

jExpose the unit to vibrations or shock

Performing the above while the lamp is on may result in damage to data/SD card or this unit.

≥Do not expose the terminals of the SD card to water, dirt or dust.

≥Do not place SD cards in the following areas:

jIn direct sunlight

jIn very dusty or humid areas

jNear a heater

jLocations susceptible to significant difference in temperature (condensation can occur.)

jWhere static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur

≥To protect SD cards, return them to their cases when you are not using them.

≥About disposing of or giving away the SD card. (l248)

VX981





- 19 -

You can turn the unit on and off using the power button or by opening and closing the LCD monitor.

≥(For the )

You can also turn the unit on and off using the viewfinder.

Open the LCD monitor and press the power button to turn on the unit.

AThe status indicator lights on.

Opening the LCD monitor or extending the viewfinder turns on the unit. Closing the LCD monitor/

viewfinder turns off the unit.

During general use, you may find it convenient to turn the unit on/off using the LCD monitor

or viewfinder.

≥The unit will not turn off unless the LCD monitor is closed and the viewfinder is retracted.

≥The unit will not turn off while recording motion pictures or connecting to Wi-Fi even if the LCD

monitor is closed and the viewfinder is retracted.

≥In the following cases, opening the LCD monitor or extending the viewfinder does not turn on the

unit. Press the power button to turn on the unit.

jWhen the unit is originally purchased

jWhen you have turned off the unit using the power button

≥When the viewfinder is extended, opening the LCD monitor turns off the viewfinder and turns on

the LCD monitor.

The unit is turned on when the LCD monitor is opened, and unit is turned off when it is closed.

During normal use, opening and closing of the LCD monitor can be conveniently used to

turn the unit on/off.

≥The unit will not turn off while recording motion pictures or connecting to Wi-Fi even if the LCD

monitor is closed.

Preparation

Turning the unit on/off

Turning the unit on and off with the power button

Turning the unit on and off with the LCD monitor/viewfinder

[WXF991]

Turning the unit on and off with the LCD monitor

[VX981]

WXF991



To turn off the unit

Hold down the power button until the status

indicator goes off.

- 20 -

≥In the following cases, opening the LCD monitor does not turn on the unit. Press the power button

to turn on the unit.

jWhen the unit is originally purchased

jWhen you have turned off the unit using the power button

∫Overheat detection

When the internal temperature of the unit rises during use, a message will be displayed. When this

happens, the unit will turn off automatically a few minutes later.

≥Wait until the temperature has dropped before resuming use.

If you try to use the Wi-Fi function while the internal temperature of this unit is high, a message will

be displayed. When this happens, the Wi-Fi function is disabled.

≥Wait until the temperature has dropped before resuming use.

You can switch this unit between Recording Mode (Motion Picture Recording Mode/Still Picture

Recording Mode) and Playback Mode by pressing the recording/playback button.

If you touch the recording mode switching icon in Recording Mode, this unit can be switched

between Motion Picture Recording Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode.

≥(For the )

In Recording Mode, pressing the recording mode selector button allows you to switch between

Motion Picture Recording Mode, 4K Photo Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode.

Switching this unit between Recording Mode and

Playback Mode

Preparation

Selecting a mode

Motion Picture Recording Mode (l28) Recording motion pictures.

Still Picture Recording Mode (l30) Recording still pictures.

Playback Mode (l33, 103) Motion picture/Still picture playback.

WXF991

Recording/playback button

Press the button to switch this unit between

Recording Mode and Playback Mode.

≥When you turn on this unit, it starts up in

Recording Mode.

- 21 -

Switching this unit between Motion Picture Recording

Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode

* Still Picture Recording Mode is selected in the following situations:

jWhen the Wireless Twin Camera function is in use (l200)

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] (l91)

jNight Mode (l86)

≥For information on 4K Photo Mode, refer to page 71.

Touch the recording mode switching icon displayed on the LCD monitor (touch screen) to switch this

unit between Motion Picture Recording Mode and Still Picture Recording Mode.

1Press the recording/playback button to

switch this unit to Recording Mode.

≥The recording mode switching icon A is displayed on

the screen.

2Touch the recording mode switching icon.

≥Refer to page 22 for touch screen operation.

Pressing a button to switch between Motion Picture Recording Mode

and Still Picture Recording Mode

[WXF991]

Touching an icon to switch between Motion Picture Recording Mode

and Still Picture Recording Mode

Motion Picture Recording Mode

Still Picture Recording Mode

バフレチヱラヰヵヰバ

Recording mode selector button

Each time you press this button, the Recording Mode

switches in the following order:

Motion Picture Recording Mode # 4K Photo Mode* #

Still Picture Recording Mode

(Motion Picture Recording Mode)

- 22 -

To display the recording mode switching icon

Display of the recording mode switching icon will disappear when no touch operation is performed

for a specific period of time. To display it again, touch the screen.

≥The recording mode selector button and the recording mode switching icon are disabled when

the Wireless Multi-Camera function is enabled.

≥If the recording start/stop button is pressed in Still Picture Recording Mode or Playback Mode,

this unit will be switched to Motion Picture Recording Mode. During motion picture/still picture

playback or in other conditions, even if the recording start/stop button is pressed, the recording

mode may not be switched.

≥When you switch between Motion Picture Recording Mode, 4K Photo Mode and Still Picture

Recording Mode, settings used in the original recording mode may not be maintained. (l59)

How to use the touch screen

You can operate by directly touching the LCD monitor (touch screen) with your finger.

∫Touch

Touch and release the touch screen to select icon or

picture.

≥Touch the center of the icon.

≥Touching the touch screen will not operate while you

are touching another part of the touch screen.

∫Slide while touching

Move your finger while pressing on the touch screen.

Preparation

LCD monitor/viewfinder

- 23 -

∫About the operation icons

///:

Touch when changing a page or performing settings.

Touch to return to the previous screen.

≥(For the )

When the viewfinder is in use, on-screen icons will be displayed but disabled.

Open the LCD monitor to touch them.

∫Diopter adjustment

Adjust to make the image clear by

rotating the diopter adjustment dial.

≥Extend the viewfinder and close the LCD

monitor to turn on the viewfinder.

≥The viewfinder can be raised up to

approximately 60 o A.

≥When moving the viewfinder, be careful not to

catch your fingers.

Viewfinder adjustment

[WXF991]

WXF991



- 24 -

About the Touch Menu

Touch (left side)/ (right side) of on the Touch Menu to switch the

operation icons.

≥

It is also possible to switch the operation icons by sliding the Touch Menu right or left while touching it.

BYou can change the operation icons to display. (l42)

CDisplayed only in Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (l62) and [Miniature Effect]/[8mm movie]/

[Silent movie] of the Creative Control Mode (l62).

DDisplayed in the following situations:

Displayed only in [Time Lapse Rec] of the Creative Control Mode (

62), HDR Movie Mode

(

50), Scene Mode (

66), Manual Mode (

73), FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode (

68, 71),

4K Photo Mode (

71), Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode (

72)

j(For the )

When Slow & Quick Video Mode or Slow Zoom Mode in Cinema Like Effect Mode is in use

(l67, 69)

EDisplayed only when you adjust the picture quality with the Multi Manual Dial (l100)

FDisplayed in the thumbnail view of 4K MP4 scenes. (l33)

∫To display the Touch Menu

≥Do not touch on the LCD monitor with hard pointed tips, such as ball point pens.

ATouch Menu

Recording Mode Playback Mode

Display of the Touch Menu will disappear when no

touch operation is performed for a specific period of

time during recording of motion picture/still picture. To

display it again, touch .



FOCUS

SHTR

IRIS

  

ALL



WXF991

- 25 -

The clock is not set at the time of purchase. Make sure to set the clock.

≥When you turn on this unit, the message “Set home region and date/time.” may be

displayed. Select [YES], and follow the steps below to make these settings:

jStep 3 in [SET WORLD TIME] (l38)

jSteps 2–3 of “Setting date and time”

1Select the menu. (l37)

2Touch the date or time to be set, then set the desired value using /.

ADisplaying the World Time setting (l38):

[HOME]/ [DESTINATION]

≥The year can be set between 2000 and 2039.

3Touch [ENTER].

≥Touch [EXIT] to complete the setting.

≥The date and time function is driven by a built-in lithium battery.

≥If the time display becomes [- -], the built-in lithium battery needs to be charged. To recharge the

built-in lithium battery, connect the AC adaptor or attach the battery to this unit. The battery is still

being recharged even if the unit is off. Leave the unit as it is for approx. 24 hours and the battery

will maintain the date and time for approx. 4 months.

Preparation

Setting date and time

: [SETUP] # [CLOCK SET]

- 26 -

∫Basic camera positioning

1Hold the unit with both hands.

2Put your hand through the grip belt.

3It is convenient to use the Recording button icon A when holding the unit at waist level.

≥When recording, make sure your footing is stable and there is no danger of colliding with another

person or object.

≥When you are outdoors, record pictures with the sunlight behind you. If the subject is backlit, it will

become dark in the recording.

≥Keep your arms near your body and separate your legs for better balance.

≥Do not cover the microphones with your hand etc.

∫Basic motion picture recording

≥The unit should normally be held steady when recording.

≥If you move the unit when recording, do so slowly, maintaining a constant speed.

≥The zoom operation is useful for recording subjects you cannot get close to, but overuse of zoom

in and zoom out can make the resulting motion picture less enjoyable to watch.

∫Recording Yourself

Rotate the LCD monitor towards the lens side.

≥The image is horizontally flipped as if you see a mirror

image. (However the image recorded is the same as a

normal recording.)

≥Only some indications will appear on the screen. When

appears, return the direction of the LCD monitor to

normal position and check the warning/alarm indication.

(l238)

Basic

Before recording





- 27 -

∫Attaching/Removing the lens hood

This will reduce the extra light entering the lens in bright sunlight or backlight etc., making it possible

to take clearer pictures.

How to attach the lens hood

1Align the lens hood with this unit.

≥Attach the lens hood so that you can see its LOCK

and UNLOCK arrows from above.

2Rotate the lens hood’s mounting ring A

to the LOCK side to tighten it.

How to remove the lens hood

Rotate the lens hood’s mounting ring to the UNLOCK side

to loosen and remove it.

≥When using a Filter Kit (optional) or Conversion Lens (optional), remove the lens hood.

≥Remove the lens hood when you use Night Mode ([Infrared]). (l86)

∫Attaching/Removing the eyecup

If you remove the eyecup, rotate it anti-clockwise by 180o and re-attach it, you can also use it with

your left eye. The eyecup is attached in the orientation for right eye use at the time of purchase.

1While holding the viewfinder, pull the eyecup in the direction of arrow to

remove it.

2Attach the eyecup by aligning the groove A on the eyecup mount with the

inner ridge B of the eyecup.





- 28 -

1Open the LCD monitor or extend the

viewfinder to switch to Motion

Picture Recording Mode. (l21)

2Press the recording start/stop button

to start recording.

ARecording button icon

BWhen you begin recording, ; changes to ¥.

3Press the recording start/stop button again to pause recording.

≥Recording can also be started/stopped by touching the recording button icon.

∫Screen indications in the Motion Picture Recording Mode

≥Screen display will disappear when no touch operation is performed for a specific period of time.

To display it again, touch the screen. (l38)

≥It will be constantly displayed when the remaining recordable time becomes less than 30 minutes.

≥If the recording/playback button is pressed during motion picture recording, the recording

will stop and this unit will be switched to Playback Mode.

≥To change the recording format, change the [REC FORMAT] or [REC MODE]. (l91)

≥Still pictures can be recorded while recording the motion picture. (l31)

≥The images recorded between pressing the recording start/stop button to start recording and

pressing it again to pause recording become one scene.

≥If the file size or recording time of a scene recorded with [REC FORMAT] set to [4K MP4], [MP4/

iFrame] or [24p] exceeds any of the values below, the scene will be divided automatically.

(Recording will continue.)

jWhen using an SD Memory Card/SDHC Memory Card: Approximately 4 GB or 30 minutes

jWhen using an SDXC Memory Card:

Varies depending on the setting of [REC FORMAT] and [REC MODE].

Basic

Recording motion pictures

Recording mode

R 1h20m

Approximate remaining recordable time

≥When the remaining time is less than

1 minute, R 0h00m flashes red.

0h00m00s

Recording time elapsed

≥“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for

minute and “s” for second.

≥Each time the unit is put into recording

pause, the counter display will be

reset to 0h00m00s.





0h00m00s

R 1h20m

ヮヱフ

ビヒプパ

- 29 -

≥While recording is in progress, the recording will not stop even if the LCD monitor or viewfinder is

closed.

≥Put the unit in Pause mode when connecting or disconnecting an external microphone with the

MIC terminal.

≥Please refer to page 251 for detail about approximate recordable time.

≥The maximum remaining recordable time that can be displayed for motion picture recording is

99 hours and 59 minutes. Any remaining recordable time exceeding 99 hours and 59 minutes will

be displayed as “R99h59m+”. This display remains unchanged until the remaining recordable

time drops to 99 hours and 59 minutes or less.

Recording format Recording mode File size and recording time

[4K MP4] [2160] Approx. 3 h

[MP4/iFrame]

[1080/50M] Approx. 3 h

Other than

[1080/50M] Approx. 4 GB or 30 min

[24p] All Approx. 3 h

≥(Maximum recordable scenes of a single SD card)

Recording format [AVCHD] [4K MP4]/[MP4/iFrame]/[24p]

Recordable scenes Approx. 3900 Approx. 89100

Different dates (l107) Approx. 900 Approx. 900

≥When the SD card contains 4K MP4 scenes, MP4/iFrame scenes, 24p scenes and still pictures,

the maximum number of recordable scenes and the maximum number of different dates will be

smaller than indicated in the table above.

- 30 -

1Open the LCD monitor or extend

the viewfinder to switch to Still

Picture Recording Mode. (l21)

2Press the button halfway.

(For Auto Focus only)

Focus indication:

3Press the button fully.

≥If you set the Optical Image Stabilizer function (l80) to ([MODE1]), then the Image

Stabilizer function will be more effective. ( (MEGA Optical Image Stabilizer) will be

displayed when the button is pressed halfway.)

≥Using a tripod is recommended when recording still pictures in dark places because the shutter

speed becomes slow.

≥You can also take a picture just by touching the subject to focus. (Touch Shutter: l82)

≥The still picture recording time may be long depending on the picture size.

≥The focus indication and the focus area may not be displayed depending on the recording

conditions or the menu settings.

Basic

Recording still pictures

AFocus indication:

± (The white lamp flashes.): Focusing

¥ (The green lamp lights up.): When in focus

No mark: When focusing is unsuccessful.

BFocus area (area inside brackets)





MEGA

- 31 -

∫About the screen indications in Still Picture Recording Mode

∫About the focusing area

When there is a contrasting object ahead or behind the subject in the focus area, the subject may

not be focused. If so, move the contrasting object out of the focus area.

Recording still pictures in Motion Picture Recording

Mode

¬Set this unit to Motion Picture Recording Mode (l21)

Press the button fully (press to the bottom) to take the picture.

≥In the following situations, you can record still pictures even while recording a

motion picture (Simultaneous recording):

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD] or [MP4/iFrame]

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [1080/24p]

≥While still pictures are being recorded, turns red and the remaining number

of recordable pictures is displayed.

≥No shutter sound is emitted when recording still pictures.

≥Self-timer (l85) does not work.

≥While recording motion pictures or during the PRE-REC operation, image quality is different from

ordinary still pictures so that motion picture recording takes preference over still picture recording.

≥In the following situations, you cannot perform simultaneous recording during motion picture

recording or still picture recording during PRE-REC:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4]

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [2160/24p]

jWhen the Recording Mode is set to 4K Photo Mode

≥If simultaneous recording is performed during motion picture recording, the remaining recordable

time will be shortened. If this unit is turned off or the recording/playback button is pressed, the

remaining recordable time may be lengthened.

≥The still picture recording time may be long depending on the picture size.

Still picture operation indicator (l234)

R3000 Remaining number of still pictures

≥Flashes in red when [0] appears.

Size of still pictures (l101)

MEGA Optical Image Stabilizer (l30)

Optical Image Stabilizer (l80)

AF assist lamp (l102)

MEGA

R3000

25.9M

≥Screen display will disappear when

no touch operation is performed for a

specific period of time. To display it

again, touch the screen.

≥It will be constantly displayed when

the remaining number of still pictures

that can be recorded becomes 200 or

less.

25.9M

MEGA

- 32 -

≥Maximum number of recordable pictures that can be displayed is 9999. If the number of

recordable pictures exceeds 9999, R 9999+ is displayed. The number will not change when the

picture is taken until the number of recordable pictures is 9999 or less.

≥The recording time may be long depending on the recording condition.

Registering your favorite scenes while recording 4K

motion picture

Setting [REC FORMAT] to [4K MP4] or switching the Recording Mode to 4K Photo allows you to

After registering your favorite scenes, you can create still pictures of them by following the steps

described in “Tagging Favorite Scene” in Playback Mode. (l124)

≥Set [REC FORMAT] to [4K MP4], or set the Recording Mode to 4K Photo. (l59, 91)

Press the photoshot button fully (all the way down) while recording motion

picture.

≥The part will be registered as a favorite scene, and the favorite scene icon A and the remaining

number of favorite scenes B will be displayed.

≥The remaining number of favorite scenes is displayed in red when it reaches 0.

≥Between the time you start recording a motion picture and the time you stop recording it, up to 10

scenes can be registered.

≥It takes approximately 4 seconds to register a favorite scene.

≥You cannot register favorite scenes in the following situations:

jDuring PRE-REC

jDuring Fade operation

jWhile the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is in automatic operation ([Party Scene]/[Moving Object]/

[Preset Positions])

≥Registered scenes are not recognized as favorite scenes for [FAVORITE SCENE SETUP] of

Highlight Playback. (l115)

- 33 -

1Set this unit to Playback Mode. (l20)

2Touch the play mode select icon A. (l24)

≥You can also set by touching , selecting [VIDEO SETUP]

or [PICT. SETUP] # [MEDIA, VIDEO/PICTURE]. (l37)

3Select the still picture C or the recording

format of the motion picture D you wish to

play back.

≥Touch [Enter].

≥

If you touch [4K MP4], its recording mode icon

will be

displayed on the thumbnail screen. ( )

≥If you touch , scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera will be displayed. The recording

mode icon ( ) will be displayed on the thumbnail screen, and each thumbnail will be

displayed with one of the following icons:

jAVCHD [PH] scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera:

jAVCHD [HA] scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera:

jAVCHD [HG] scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera:

jAVCHD [HE] scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera:

4(When [MP4/iFrame], [AVCHD] or [24p] is touched)

Touch the desired recording format for playback.

≥When [MP4/iFrame] is selected

≥When [AVCHD] is selected

Basic

Motion picture/Still picture playback

[ALL MP4/iFrame]/[1080/60p]/[1080/30p]/[720/30p]/[360/30p]/[iFrame]

[ALL AVCHD]/[1080/60p]/[1080/60i]

ALL









- 34 -

≥When [24p] is selected

≥The recording mode icon B is displayed in the thumbnail display when the item is touched.

jWhen an item in [MP4/iFrame] is selected:

, (Red), (Red), (Red), (Red),

jWhen an item in [AVCHD] is selected:

, ,

jWhen an item in [24p] is selected:

(Red), (Red)

≥The following icons are displayed on thumbnails when [ALL MP4/iFrame] is touched:

≥ is displayed on the thumbnails of MP4 [1080/50M] scenes when [1080/60p] in [MP4/iFrame]

is touched.

≥The following icons are displayed on thumbnails when [ALL AVCHD] or [1080/60i] is touched:

5Touch the scene or the still picture to be played back.

≥To display the next (previous) page:

jSlide the thumbnail display upward (downward) while touching it.

jSwitch the Touch Menu, and then touch (up) / (down) on the thumbnail scroll

lever.

6Select the playback operation by touching

the operation icon.

≥Operation icons and screen display will disappear when

no touch operation is performed for a specific period of

time. To display them again, touch the screen.

[2160/24p]/[1080/24p]

jMP4 [1080/60p] scene: (Blue) (Recording mode [1080/50M])

(Recording mode [1080/28M])

jMP4 [1080/30p] scene:

jMP4 [720/30p] scene:

jMP4 [360/30p] scene:

jiFrame scene:

jAVCHD [1080/60p] scene:

jAVCHD [PH] scene:

jAVCHD [HA] scene:

jAVCHD [HG] scene:

jAVCHD [HE] scene:

0h01m30s

Operation icon

- 35 -

* When touched two times, the fast rewind/fast forward speed increases. (The screen display

changes to / .)

∫Change the thumbnail display

While the thumbnail is displayed, the thumbnail display changes in the

following order if the zoom lever is operated to side or side.

20 scenes () 9 scenes () 1 scene () Highlight & Time Frame Index*

(l104)

* Highlight & Time Frame Index can only set in Motion Picture Playback

Mode.

≥If you set this unit to Recording Mode or Playback Mode by pressing the recording/playback

button, you will return to the 9 scenes display.

≥By displaying in 1 scene or touching and holding the thumbnail in the 20 scenes or 9 scenes

display, recording date and time are displayed when playing back motion pictures, and recording

date and file number when playing back still pictures.

∫Speaker/Headphone volume

adjustment

Operate the volume lever to adjust the speaker/

headphone volume during Motion Picture

Playback Mode.

≥Sound will be heard only during normal playback.

≥If pause play is continued for approx. 5 minutes, the screen returns to the thumbnails.

≥The elapsed time for playback indication will be reset to 0h00m00s each scene.

≥The elapsed playback time is not displayed for scenes recorded in the following recording modes:

jFULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode

j(For the )

Slow & Quick Video Mode and Dolly Zoom Mode

≥When played back with [ALL AVCHD] or [ALL MP4/iFrame] selected, the screen may become

black momentarily at the time the scene switches.

Motion picture playback Still picture playback

1/;: Playback/Pause

6: Fast rewind playback*

5: Fast forward playback*

∫: Stops the playback and shows the

thumbnails.

1/;: Slide show (playback of the still

pictures in numerical order) start/

pause.

2;: Plays back the previous picture.

;1: Plays back the next picture.

∫: Stops the playback and shows the

thumbnails.

Towards “r”: Increases the volume

Towards “s”: Decreases the volume

WXF991

- 36 -

Motion picture compatibility

≥This unit is based on AVCHD Progressive/AVCHD format/MPEG-4 AVC file format.

≥Even if the devices used have compatible standards, when playback of motion pictures

recorded using another device is performed using this unit, or when motion pictures recorded

using this unit is played back in another device, playback may not proceed normally, or may

not be possible. (Please check compatibility in the operating instruction of your device.)

≥Motion pictures recorded with other devices are not supported by this unit.

Still picture compatibility

≥This unit is compliant with the unified standard DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)

established by JEITA (Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association).

≥This unit may degrade or not play back still pictures recorded or created on other products

and other products may degrade or not play back still pictures recorded on this unit.

≥Depending on the playback device, still pictures may be played back with picture sizes

different from the ones with which they were recorded.

- 37 -

≥Touch (left side)/ (right side) of on the Touch Menu to display . (l24)

1Touch .

2Touch the top menu A.

3Touch the submenu B.

≥Next (previous) page is displayed by touching

4Touch the desired item to enter the

setting.

5Touch [EXIT] to exit the menu

setting.

∫About guide display

After touching , touching the submenus

and items will cause function descriptions and

settings confirmation messages to appear.

≥After the messages have been displayed, the

guide display is canceled.

Basic

Using the menu screen

- 38 -

Set the display method for the screen information display.

Please refer to page 25.

It is possible to display and record the time at the travel destination by selecting your home region

and the travel destination.

1Select the menu.

≥When the [HOME] (your home region) is not set, the message appears. Touch [ENTER] and

proceed to Step 3.

2(Only when setting your home region)

Touch [HOME].

≥Touch [ENTER].

3(Only when setting your home region)

Touch / to select your home

region and touch [ENTER].

≥Touch [DAYLIGHT SAVING] to set daylight

saving time. is displayed and the

summer time setting is turned on, the time

difference between the current time and GMT

will be set forward by 1 hour. Touch [DAYLIGHT

SAVING] again to return to the normal time

setting.

If you set [Link Clock to Daylight Saving] to

[ON], the current time will also be set forward by 1 hour. (l39)

Basic

Using the Setup Menu

[DISPLAY]

: [SETUP] # [DISPLAY] # desired setting

[5 SEC.]: Information is displayed on the screen for 5 seconds after starting the

Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still Picture Recording Mode, starting

to playback, or touching the screen.

[ON]: Constantly displayed.

[CLOCK SET]

[SET WORLD TIME]

: [SETUP] # [SET WORLD TIME]





AThe current time

BThe time difference from GMT

(Greenwich Mean Time)

- 39 -

4(Only when setting the region of your travel destination)

Touch [DESTINATION].

≥Touch [ENTER].

≥When the home region is set for the first time, the screen for selecting home/travel destination

appears after setting the home region successively. If the home region has already been set

once, execute the menu operation for Step 1.

5(Only when setting the region of your travel

destination)

Touch / to select your travel

destination and touch [ENTER].

≥Touch [DAYLIGHT SAVING] to set daylight

saving time. is displayed and the

summer time setting is turned on, the time

difference between the travel destination and

the home region will be set forward by 1 hour.

Touch [DAYLIGHT SAVING] again to return to

the normal time setting.

If you set [Link Clock to Daylight Saving] to

[ON], the time at the travel destination will also

be set forward by 1 hour.

≥Close the setting by touching [EXIT]. appears and the time of the travel destination is

indicated.

To return the display to the home setting

Set the home region using Steps 1 to 3, and close the setting by touching [EXIT].

≥If you cannot find your travel destination in the area shown on the screen, set it by using the time

difference from your home region.

If you set this function to [ON] and turn on the summer time setting in [SET WORLD TIME], the

following times will be set forward by 1 hour:

jWhen setting your home region: The current time

jWhen setting the region of your travel destination: The time at the travel destination

[Link Clock to Daylight Saving]

: [SETUP] # [Link Clock to Daylight Saving] # desired display

[ON]: The times are adjusted when the summer time setting is turned on.

[OFF]: The times are not adjusted when the summer time setting is turned on.





CThe local time at the selected

travel destination

DThe time difference between the

travel destination and the home

region

- 40 -

It is possible to change the date and time display mode.

≥The date and time are not displayed while the recording mode switching icon is displayed. (l21)

≥When the Touch Shutter is enabled, the recording mode switching icon is constantly displayed.

This causes the date and time to disappear from the screen.

It is possible to change the date format.

You can set the display method of the zoom button icons ( / ) and recording button icon ( ).

Please refer to page 82.

Please refer to page 139.

[DATE/TIME]

: [SETUP] # [DATE/TIME] # desired display

[DATE]/[D/T]/[OFF]

[DATE FORMAT]

: [SETUP] # [DATE FORMAT] # desired setting

[Y/M/D]/[M/D/Y]/[D/M/Y]

[ZOOM/REC DISPLAY]

: [SETUP] # [ZOOM/REC DISPLAY] # desired setting

[ON]: Constantly displayed.

[OFF]: Icons will disappear after approx. 5 seconds without any touch operation.

[O.I.S. LOCK DISPLAY]

[EXT. DISPLAY]

- 41 -

When about 5 minutes have passed without any operation, this unit automatically turns off to save

battery life.

≥This unit will not automatically turn off even if [ECONOMY (BATT)] is set to [ON] in following

cases:

jUsing the AC adaptor*

jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.

jPRE-REC is used

jDuring slide show playback

jUsing the Wi-Fi function

* When [ECONOMY (AC)] is activated, this unit automatically turns off.

When about 15 minutes have passed without any operation while connecting AC adaptor with this

unit, this unit automatically turns off.

≥This unit will not automatically turn off even if [ECONOMY (AC)] is set to [ON] in following cases:

jUsing the USB cable for PC etc.

jPRE-REC is used

jDuring slide show playback

jUsing the Wi-Fi function

The unit is put into recording pause approx. 1 second when the unit is turned on.

≥Depending on the recording conditions, start time may be longer than 1 second.

≥In the Quick Power On Mode, the zoom magnification becomes approx. 1k.

[ECONOMY (BATT)]

: [SETUP] # [ECONOMY (BATT)] # [ON]

[ECONOMY (AC)]

: [SETUP] # [ECONOMY (AC)] # [ON]

[QUICK POWER ON]

: [SETUP] # [QUICK POWER ON] # [ON]

- 42 -

Touch screen operation, starting and stopping of recording and unit on/off can be confirmed with this

sound.

When [OFF] is selected, the sound is not output at the start/end of recording, etc.

2 Beeps for 4 times

When an error occurs, follow the instructions displayed on the screen. (l238)

≥Refer to page 102 when changing the shutter sound setting.

You can change the operation icons (l83) to display in the Touch Menu.

≥The default settings are as follows:

1Select the menu.

2Touch the operation icon you would like to change to cancel the setting.

3Touch the operation icon to be set.

≥Name of the function is displayed by touching and holding on the operation icon.

≥To cancel, touch the operation icon again.

4Touch [ENTER].

[ALERT SOUND]

: [SETUP] # [ALERT SOUND] # desired setting

(Volume low)/ (Volume high)/[OFF]

[SELECT OPERATION ICONS]

Motion Picture Recording Mode Still Picture Recording Mode

(PRE-REC) (Self-timer)

(Night Mode) (Video light)

(Level Shot Function) (Backlight Compensation)

: [SETUP] # [SELECT OPERATION ICONS]

- 43 -

This makes it easier to view the LCD monitor in bright places including outdoors.

≥These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.

≥When the AC adaptor is in use, the LCD monitor is set to automatically.

≥Recordable time with the battery is shortened when the LCD monitor is made brighter.

≥When the [VIDEO LIGHT] is set to [ON] or [AUTO] and it is lit, it cannot be set.

It adjusts brightness and color density on the LCD monitor.

≥These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.

1Select the menu.

2Touch / to adjust settings.

3Touch [ENTER].

≥Touch [EXIT] to exit the menu screen.

It adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder.

≥These settings will not affect the images actually recorded.

Select the menu.

≥These can be set with the LCD monitor. Close the LCD monitor and extend the viewfinder after

setting, and confirm the brightness by turning on the viewfinder.

Please refer to page 139.

Please refer to page 140.

[POWER LCD]

: [SETUP] # [POWER LCD] # desired setting

(Makes brighter)/ (Normal)/ (Makes less bright)

[LCD SET]

: [SETUP] # [LCD SET] # desired setting

[BRIGHTNESS]: Brightness of the LCD monitor

[COLOR]: Color level of the LCD monitor

[EVF SET]

: [SETUP] # [EVF SET] # desired setting

[BRIGHT]/[NORMAL]/[DARK]

[HDMI RESOLUTION]

[VIERA Link]

WXF991

- 44 -

Please refer to page 138.

Set to [YES] for changing the menu settings back to the default condition.

≥Settings for [CLOCK SET] and [LANGUAGE] will not be changed.

≥If you restore the default settings, this unit will switch to the Motion Picture Recording Mode.

Set to [YES] for changing the Wi-Fi settings back to the default condition.

≥The “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Wi-Fi Password are also deleted.

≥Information on wireless access points, smartphones, and Wireless Sub Cameras registered to

this unit is also deleted.

You can delete the music (l113, 120, 126) stored on this unit as [USER BGM].

The entered character is confirmed in approx. 1 second after character input, and the cursor is

moved to the right.

It makes the input easy without moving the cursor when characters on the same key are to be

entered again.

≥Character input screen is displayed in following conditions:

jWhen setting [TITLE SETUP] for the Highlight Playback (l116)

jWhen entering a name in the Baby Calendar (l122)

jWhen you configure the Wi-Fi function (l175, 187, 196, 197, 198)

[TV ASPECT]

[INITIAL SET]

: [SETUP] # [INITIAL SET]

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]

: [SETUP] # [Reset Wi-Fi Settings]

[DELETE USER BGM]

: [SETUP] # [DELETE USER BGM]

[Auto Cursor Position]

: [SETUP] # [Auto Cursor Position] # [ON]

- 45 -

Set the file number of the next 4K MP4 scene, MP4/iFrame scene, 24p scene and still picture to be

recorded to 0001.

≥Folder number is updated and file number will start from 0001. (l231)

≥To reset the folder number, format the SD card, and then perform [NUMBER RESET].

≥The file numbers of still pictures you record in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode are not reset.

Please be aware that if a medium is formatted, then all the data recorded on the medium will be

erased and cannot be restored. Back up important data on a PC, DVD disc etc. (l221)

* Displayed when connecting a USB HDD. (l144)

≥Media selection screen is not displayed when the USB HDD is not connected. Touch [YES].

≥When formatting is complete, touch [EXIT] to exit the message screen.

≥Perform a physical formatting of the SD card when the SD card is to be disposed/ transferred.

(l248)

≥Do not turn this unit off or remove the SD card, while formatting. Do not expose the unit to

vibrations or shock.

[NUMBER RESET]

: [SETUP] # [NUMBER RESET]

[FORMAT MEDIA]

: [SETUP] # [FORMAT MEDIA] # desired media

[SD CARD]/[HDD]*

Use this unit to format media.

Do not format an SD card using any other equipment such as a PC. The card may not be

used on this unit.

- 46 -

The used space and remaining recordable time of the SD card can be checked.

≥The remaining recordable time in the currently set Recording Mode is displayed only in the

Motion Picture Recording Mode.

≥Any remaining recordable time exceeding 99 hours and 59 minutes will be displayed as

“99h59m+”.

≥Touch [EXIT] to close the indication.

≥The SD card requires some space to store information and manage system files, so the actual

usable space is slightly less than the indicated value. The usable SD card space is generally

calculated as 1 GB=1,000,000,000 bytes. The capacities of this unit, PCs and software are

expressed as 1 GB=1,024k1,024k1,024=1,073,741,824 bytes. Therefore, the indicated value of

the capacity appears to be smaller.

The firmware version of this unit is displayed.

You can update the firmware version of this unit.

This item is used to start the unit demonstration.

≥If [DEMO MODE] is switched to [ON] and you touch [EXIT] when there is no SD card inserted and

while this unit is connected to the AC adaptor, the demonstration automatically starts.

If any operation takes place, the demonstration is canceled. However if no operations take place

for approx. 10 minutes, the demonstration automatically starts again. To stop the demonstration,

set [DEMO MODE] to [OFF] or insert an SD card.

≥When Demo Mode is in operation, the lens cover remains open.

[MEDIA STATUS]

: [SETUP] # [MEDIA STATUS]

[Firmware Version Info]

: [SETUP] # [Firmware Version Info]

[Firmware Upgrade]

: [SETUP] # [Firmware Upgrade]

For the latest update information, check the support website below. (As of November

2015)

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam

(This Site is English only)

[DEMO MODE]

: [SETUP] # [DEMO MODE] # [ON]

- 47 -

This item is used to start the Optical Image Stabilizer demo.

≥Touch [O.I.S. DEMO], the demonstration automatically starts.

When you touch [EXIT], the demonstration will be canceled.

This item is displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted.

Please refer to page 152.

This item is displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted.

Please refer to page 153.

You can connect this unit and a PC with the USB cable and check software information (License) on the PC.

1Select the menu.

2Connect this unit to a PC.

≥

A message will be displayed when the connection is complete. On the PC, confirm [LICENSE.TXT].

≥When using the battery, the LCD monitor turns off after about 5 seconds. Touch the screen to turn

the LCD monitor on.

≥Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any

other USB cables.)

Display the authentication information for this unit.

≥The contents in [Approved Regulations] cannot be displayed on external devices. Check them on

the LCD monitor of this unit.

[O.I.S. DEMO]

: [SETUP] # [O.I.S. DEMO]

[Eye-Fi TRANSFER]

[Eye-Fi DIRECT]

[SOFTWARE INFO]

: [SETUP] # [SOFTWARE INFO]

[Approved Regulations]

: [SETUP] # [Approved Regulations]

- 48 -

You can check how to access the website where you can download the Owner’s Manual (PDF format).

You can select the language on the screen display and the menu screen.

[ONLINE MANUAL]

: [SETUP] # [ONLINE MANUAL] # desired access method

[URL display]: Displays the URL of the website on the LCD monitor of this unit.

[USB connect]:

Displays the website on a PC connected to this unit with the USB cable.

[QR code]: Displays the QR code of the website on the LCD monitor of this unit.

[LANGUAGE]

: [SETUP] # [LANGUAGE] # desired language

- 49 -

AZoom bar

≥Maximum zoom ratio for recording motion pictures can be set with [ZOOM MODE]. (l90)

∫About the zoom bar

The zoom bar is displayed during the zoom operation.

∫About the zoom speed

≥The zoom speed varies depending on the range over which the zoom lever is moved.

≥The zoom operation using the zoom button icons will be performed at a constant speed

respectively.

Zoom ratio during the Still Picture Recording Mode

The zoom ratio can be expanded up to 50k without degrading the picture quality for the Still Picture

Recording Mode. (Extra Optical Zoom)

≥Maximum zoom ratio in Still Picture Recording Mode varies depending on the setting of

[PICTURE SIZE] and [ASPECT RATIO]. (l101, 102)

≥If you take your finger off the zoom lever during zoom operation, the operation sound may be

recorded. When returning the zoom lever to the original position, move it quietly.

≥When the zoom magnification is at its maximum, the subjects are focused at about 1.5 m

(4.9 feet) or more.

≥When the zoom magnification is 1k, this unit can focus on a subject approx. 3 cm (1.2 q) away

from the lens.

Advanced (Recording)

Using the zoom





Zoom lever/Zoom button icons

T side:

Close-up recording (zoom in)

W side:

Wide-angle recording (zoom out)



BOptical Zoom

CMotion Picture Recording Mode: i.Zoom/Digital zoom (Blue)

Still Picture Recording Mode: Extra Optical Zoom (Blue)

- 50 -

You can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas and dark areas when, for example,

the contrast between the background and the subject is large.

≥This unit will be set to Intelligent Auto Mode if you turn it off and on.

≥This function is not available in the following cases:

jDuring motion picture recording

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4] or [24p].

jWhen the Recording Mode is set to 4K Photo Mode

jWhen the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function is in use

≥[REC MODE] is set to [1080/28M] in the following cases:

j When [REC FORMAT] is set to [MP4/iFrame] and [REC MODE] is set to [720] or [iFrame]

≥The following settings are canceled:

≥The video light is disabled.

≥You cannot record still pictures.

≥The shutter speed and brightness (iris/gain) are adjusted automatically. If you set them manually

in advance, the settings will not be maintained.

≥

Depending on recording conditions, the screen may flicker or you may see horizontal bars in the image.

≥

If you record a moving subject or move this unit quickly while recording, the image may be distorted.

∫To change the level of image contrast correction

[HDR EFFECT] allows you to change the contrast correction level in HDR Movie Mode.

≥Change the Recording Mode to . (l59)

1Select the menu.

2Touch [ENTER].

≥Touch [EXIT] to complete the settings.

≥You can also change this setting by touching its operation icon. (l83)

≥You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.

Advanced (Recording)

HDR Movie Mode

j[FACE FRAMING]

jAuto Slow Shutter

jBacklight Compensation

jIntelligent Contrast Control

jNight Mode

jDigital Cinema Color

j[PICTURE ADJUST]

j[HYBRID O.I.S.]

j(For the )

Twin Camera

: [RECORD SETUP] # [HDR EFFECT] # desired setting

:Sets the correction level to high.

:Sets the correction level to low.

HDR button

You can switch from Recording mode to HDR Movie Mode

by pressing this button.

≥Press it once more to switch from HDR Movie Mode to

Intelligent Auto Mode.

≥It is also possible to switch to HDR Movie Mode by touching

the Recording Mode button icon. (l59)

ラュン

WXF991

- 51 -

Using the Sub Camera and the Main Camera, you can record two

images simultaneously. (Twin Camera)

Use the Sub Camera to enjoy recording yourself, a family member

next to you or scenery different from that seen from the Main

Camera.

BSub Window

≥The image of the Sub Camera is displayed on the Sub Window.

1Rotate the Sub Camera.

≥When you rotate the Sub camera from a position in the

range C (0e to approximately 30e) to a position in the range

D (approximately 30e to 270e), the Sub Window is

displayed on the LCD monitor.

≥If the Sub Window does not appear, touch to display

it.

≥When the Sub Camera is in use, you cannot start up the

Wireless Twin Camera function with (startup icon for

Wireless Twin Camera/disconnect icon for Wireless Twin/

Multi-Camera).

Advanced (Recording)

Recording with the Sub Camera

(Twin Camera) [WXF991]



ASub Camera

Recording a family

member next to you

Recording scenery Recording yourself

≥Recording only with the Sub Camera is not possible.

≥An image recorded with the Main Camera and the Sub Camera’s image displayed on the

Sub Window are recorded as a single scene or still picture. When you play back such a

scene or still picture, it is not possible to delete only the Sub Window image or hide it.

≥The minimum focus distance of the Sub Camera is approximately 30cm (12q).







- 52 -

2Rotate the Sub Camera dial to adjust its up/

down angle.

≥You can adjust the angle up or down to approximately 20e

from the position F.

3Start recording.

≥Rotate the Sub Camera to the desired position.

≥The Sub Camera works in Auto Focus, which adjusts

focus automatically.

≥Normally, hold this unit as shown in the illustration when

recording.

Rotating the Sub Camera dial to the left :

The Sub Camera points down.

Rotating the Sub Camera dial to the right :

The Sub Camera points up.





ESub Camera dial

- 53 -

∫Displaying or hiding the Sub Window

Touch .

≥Each time you touch the icon, you can display or hide the

Sub Window.

≥When the Sub Window is hidden, the image of the Sub

Camera will not be recorded.

To exit the Twin Camera function

Rotate the Sub Camera to a position in the range

(

e to approximately

e).

≥It takes some time until the Sub Window appears.

≥If the Sub Window does not appear, touch or return the Sub Camera to a position in the

range C (0e to approximately 30e) and then rotate it to a position in the range D (approximately

30e to 270e).

≥The Sub Camera is turned on as long as is displayed.

≥Depending on recording conditions, the color balance, brightness and other settings may differ

between the Main Camera and the Sub Camera.

≥The following button icons may not be displayed when the Sub Window is displayed. To display

them, touch the Main Camera’s image on the screen.

j (Touch Menu)

j/ (Zoom button icons)

j (Recording button icon)

jRecording Mode button icon (l59)

≥The following functions do not work when the Sub Window is displayed:

jRecording format [24p]

jTouch Shutter

jCreative Control Mode

j[FACE FRAMING]

jAF/AE tracking

jOptical Image Stabilizer Lock

j[AF ASSIST LAMP]

jNight Mode ([Infrared])

j(For the )

Cinema Like Effect Mode

≥Recording menu items, operation icons, and functions such as Image Stabilizer, Level Shot

Function and [QUICK POWER ON] work only for the Main Camera. For information on the

settings for the Sub Camera, refer to page 54.

≥When you record still pictures by using the Twin Camera function, it may take longer than usual to

achieve focus. (l30)

≥The Sub Camera does not work when you are using the following functions:

jHDR Movie Mode

jFULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode

jStop Motion Animation Assist Mode

≥When the LCD monitor is either closed or closed with the screen facing outward, the Sub Camera

does not work. The Sub Window will be displayed if you open the LCD monitor again.

≥The Fade function’s image effects do not affect the Sub Window.

WXF991

- 54 -

Changing and adjusting the settings of the Sub

Camera and the Sub Window

1Touch Sub Window.

2Touch to select the size you want to use.

≥If you do not touch the Sub Window or perform any touch operation for a while, the Sub Window

size will change.

≥The available sub window sizes differ as shown below.

jIn Motion Picture Recording Mode or when [ASPECT RATIO] in Still Picture Recording Mode is

set to [16:9]

jWhen [ASPECT RATIO] in Still Picture Recording Mode is set to [4:3] or [3:2]

* The aspect ratio set in [ASPECT RATIO] will be displayed.

1Touch the Sub Window.

≥The zoom icon will be displayed for approximately

2 seconds*.

* It will be displayed for approximately 3 seconds when the

Wireless Multi-Camera function is enabled. (l217)

2Touch the Zoom icon.

≥Each touch of the Sub Window switches the magnification

level between the normal display (1k) and 2k display

setting.

≥With the normal (1k) display setting, the zoom icon is displayed; with the 2k display setting,

the zoom icon is displayed.

≥The Sub Window cannot be zoomed in/out when [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4] or this unit is

in 4K Photo Mode.

Changing the size of the Sub Window

Aspect ratio 16:9 1:1 16:9

Size

Aspect ratio 4:3 or 3:2*1:1

Size

Zooming in/out the Sub Window

Zoom icon

- 55 -

1Touch Sub Window.

2Touch the display position you want to change.

≥Depending on the display position of the Sub Window, the

positions of the icons displayed on the screen may change.

1Touch Sub Window.

2Touch .

3Touch the icon you want to set or adjust.

*1 This icon is displayed only in Motion Picture Recording Mode.

*2 It cannot be set when an external microphone is connected.

4(When [WB] is touched)

Touch / to select White Balance Mode.

(When is touched)

Touch / to adjust settings.

(When [FOCUS] is touched)

Touch [AF] or [AFS].

≥The center of the Sub Window will be focused.

≥If you select [AFS], will be constantly displayed on the recording screen.

Changing the display position of the Sub Window

Setting and adjusting the Sub Camera and the Sub Window

[WB] : Adjusts the color balance.

: Adjusts the brightness.

[FOCUS]*1:Adjusts the focus.

*1, 2 : Allows you to enable Narration Mode.

Rejects ambient sound, allowing your voice to be recorded clearly.

: Changes the color of the Sub Window frame.

(Automatic White Balance adjustment)/ (Sunny mode)/ (Cloudy mode)/

(Indoor mode 1)/ (Indoor mode 2)

[AF] (Auto Focus): Auto Focus works continuously.

[AFS] (Auto Focus Single): Auto Focus works each time you touch [AFS].

FOCUS

AWB

- 56 -

(When is touched)

Touch or .

≥Touching the screen returns you to the recording screen.

≥When Narration Mode is enabled, its icon will be constantly

displayed on the screen.

≥You can enable or disable Narration Mode by touching

on the recording screen.

≥In Narration Mode, the settings for [5.1ch/2ch] and [MIC

SETUP] are set as follows and cannot be changed:

j [SURROUND] in [MIC SETUP], if [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [5.1ch]

j [STEREO MIC] in [MIC SETUP], if [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [2ch]

≥[Sound Scene Select] is not available in Narration Mode.

≥If you hide the Sub Window, Narration Mode will not work.

(When is touched)

Touch the desired frame.

≥When [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4] or this unit is in 4K Photo Mode, no frame is displayed

and the frame setting cannot be changed.

≥If you set the Recording Mode to Intelligent Auto Mode/Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, the following

settings will be used:

j[WB] : (Auto)

j: The value will be set to [0].

j[FOCUS] : AF (Auto Focus)

: Enables Narration Mode.

: Disables Narration Mode.

1 : Pink

2 : Green

3 : Orange

4 : Gray

5 : Drop shadow*

6 : No frame

* This adds a drop shadow on the right and bottom sides.







A[Narration Mode]

B[ON]

C[OFF]

 

 





D[FRAMING]

AWB

- 57 -

When simultaneously recording two images with the Main Camera and Sub Camera, you can also

record the Main Camera’s image as a separate scene. (Backup for Twin Camera)

≥Even when using the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function, you can save the image being

recorded with the Main Camera as a separate scene. (l200)

≥Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD] and [REC MODE] to [PH]/[HA]/[HG]/[HE]. (l91)

≥ will be displayed on the screen.

≥When Twin Camera recording starts, this unit also starts recording the Main Camera’s image

without the Sub Window image as a separate scene.

To play back scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera, touch the play mode select icon on

the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and select . (l33)

Advanced (Recording)

Recording with the Backup for Twin

Camera Function

: [RECORD SETUP] # [Backup for Twin Camera] # [ON]

ATwin Camera

BBackup for Twin Camera

CSD card







- 58 -

≥When recording with [Backup for Twin Camera], use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of

the SD Speed Class Rating.

≥Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera and scenes that show the Sub Window’s image will

be saved on the same media. This causes the remaining recordable time to be halved.

≥When [ON] is selected, two separate dates are used to record scenes simultaneously. As a result,

compared to when [OFF] is selected, recording can be performed on fewer days.

≥Backup for Twin Camera operates when it is set to [ON], even if you hide the Sub Window.

≥You cannot record still pictures while recording with the Backup for Twin Camera function.

≥Backup for Twin Camera is not available when any of the following functions is being used:

jCreative Control Mode

jFULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode

jHDR Movie Mode

j4K Photo Mode

jHome monitoring

jLive Cast Mode

j(For the )

Cinema Like Effect Mode

WXF991

- 59 -

1Touch the Recording Mode button icon.

2Touch the desired Recording Mode button icon.

*1 In Motion Picture Recording Mode only

*2 In Still Picture Recording Mode only

*3 only

*4 only

Advanced (Recording)

Changing the Recording Mode

Mode Effect

Intelligent Auto

You can switch the mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode,

which optimizes settings to the recording environment

you are in. (l60)

*2 Intelligent Auto Plus

You can add manually-adjusted brightness and color

balance settings to the Intelligent Auto Mode, and

record. (l62)

*1 Creative Control

You can record motion pictures with added effects. (

62)

*1 HDR Movie

You can minimize the loss of gradations in bright areas

and dark areas when, for example, the contrast between

the background and the subject is large.

(

)

Scene Mode

This option allows this unit to automatically adjust the

shutter speed and aperture, etc. according to the scene

you want to record. (l66)

Manual You can set the shutter speed, focus, White Balance,

and brightness (iris/gain). (l73)

*1, 3 Cinema Like Effect You can record images with cinematic effects. (l67)

*1, 4 FULL HD Slow

Motion Video

You can record slow motion pictures. (l71)

*1 4K Photo You can record motion pictures optimized for capturing

still pictures from 4K motion pictures. (l71)

*2 Stop Motion

Animation Assist

You can set a recorded still picture as the background,

and record the next picture while looking at that

recorded picture as the background. (l72)

MNL

WXF991

VX981

- 60 -

The following modes (appropriate for the condition) are set just by pointing the unit to what you want

to record.

*1 In Motion Picture Recording Mode only

*2 In Still Picture Recording Mode only

≥Depending on the recording conditions, the unit may not enter the desired mode.

≥In the Portrait, Spotlight, or Low Light Mode, the face will be surrounded by a white frame when

detected. In the Portrait Mode, a subject that is bigger and close to center of the screen will be

surrounded by an orange frame. (l92)

≥Using a tripod is recommended in Night Scenery Mode.

≥Faces cannot be detected depending on the recording conditions, such as when faces are of

certain sizes or at certain tilts or when digital zoom is used.

Intelligent Auto

Mode Effect

Portrait Faces are detected and focused automatically, and the brightness is

adjusted so it is recorded clearly.

Scenery The whole landscape will be recorded vividly without whiting out the

background sky, which may be very bright.

*1 Spotlight Very bright object is recorded clearly.

*1 Low Light It can record very clearly even in a dark room or twilight.

*2 Night Scenery You can record night scenery vividly by slowing the shutter speed.

*2 Macro This allows recording at very close proximity to the object of recording.

Normal

In modes other than those described above, the contrast is adjusted to

give a clear picture.

- 61 -

∫Intelligent Auto Mode

When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode, the Automatic White Balance and Auto Focus operate and

automatically adjust the color balance and focusing.

Depending on the brightness of the subject etc., the aperture and shutter speed are automatically

adjusted for an optimum brightness.

≥The information on this page applies only to the Main Camera.

≥Color balance and focus may not be adjusted automatically depending on light sources or

scenes. If so, manually adjust these settings. (l74, 76)

Automatic White Balance

The illustration shows the range over which Automatic White Balance functions.

1) The effective range of Automatic White Balance adjustment

on this unit

2) Blue sky

3) Cloudy sky (rain)

4) Sunlight

5) White fluorescent lamp

6) Halogen light bulb

7) Incandescent light bulb

8) Sunrise or sunset

9) Candlelight

If the Automatic White Balance is not functioning normally, adjust

the White Balance manually. (l74)

Auto Focus

The unit focuses automatically.

≥Auto Focus does not work correctly in the following situations.

Record pictures in the Manual Focus Mode. (l76)

jRecording distant and close-up objects at the same time

jRecording a subject behind dirty or dusty window

jRecording a subject that is surrounded by objects with glossy surfaces or by highly reflective

objects

10 000K

9 000K

8 000K

7 000K

6 000K

5 000K

4 000K

3 000K

2 000K

- 62 -

Please refer to page 60 for details about the effect of each mode.

(Portrait)/ (Scenery)/ (Spotlight)*1/ (Low Light)*1/

(Night Scenery)*2/ (Macro)*2/(Normal)

*1/(Normal)

*1 In Motion Picture Recording Mode only

*2 In Still Picture Recording Mode only

≥Change the Recording Mode to / . (l59)

1(When adjusting the brightness)

Touch .

(When adjusting the color balance)

Touch .

≥R side: Sets the balance to a reddish tone.

B side: Sets the balance to a bluish tone.

≥Except for when adjusting the brightness or color balance, if you do not touch the screen for a

while, the Touch Menu will disappear. To display it again, touch .

2Touch / to adjust settings.

≥Touch while adjusting the brightness, or touch while adjusting the color balance to make

the display of the adjustment bar disappear.

3Start recording.

≥Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD]. (l91)

≥Change the Recording Mode to . (l59)

Select the desired Creative Control Mode, then touch [Enter].

≥Still pictures cannot be taken.

Intelligent Auto Plus

Creative Control

Mode Effect

[Miniature Effect] You can record motion pictures with a diorama effect like recording a

miniature by intentionally creating focused area and out of focused

area in the peripheral of the image and recording motion picture with

an interval. (l63)

≥Motion pictures recorded with this function will look as if the frame

rate is low.

[8mm movie] You can record motion pictures with a faded retro effect. (l64)

[Silent movie] You can record motion pictures that are similar to black-and-white

silent films by lowering the amount of incoming light. (l64)

[Time Lapse Rec] You can record a scene that moves slowly over a long period of time

as a short time motion picture by recording one frame at each set

time lapse. (l64)

- 63 -

1Touch to adjust the horizontal position of

the in-focus portion.

≥If you touch the screen, you can adjust the horizontal

position of the in-focus portion.

≥When no touch operations are performed for approximately

1 second, [Reset], [SIZE], and [ENTER] are displayed. If

you touch the screen, you can readjust the horizontal

position of the in-focus portion.

≥Position of the in-focus portion will return to original position when you touch [Reset].

2Touch [SIZE].

≥The size of the in-focus portion is switched every time you touch [SIZE].

Medium size # Large size # Small size

≥If you touch the screen, you can adjust the horizontal position of the in-focus portion.

≥If you touch [Reset], the in-focus portion is reset to the original position and [SIZE] is reset to the

medium size.

3Touch [ENTER].

4(When adjusting the brightness)

Touch .

≥The level of brightness is switched every time you touch the icon.

(Standard) # (Bright) # (Dark)

5(When adjusting the vividness)

Touch .

≥The level of vividness is switched every time you touch the icon.

(Standard) # (Vivid) # (Most vivid)

6Start recording.

≥It will record with an interval. 1 second will be recorded for approximately every 6 seconds of

recording.

≥To make the Miniature Effect easier to gain, record objects incorporating a distant view or those

that can provide depth or a skewed perspective. Also, use a tripod and avoid zooming.

≥You may see a lot of noise in the in-focus portion when recording dark subjects such as night

scenes.

≥Audio cannot be recorded.

≥[REC MODE] is set to [HA].

≥The maximum recordable time is 12 hours.

≥Motion pictures recorded with this function will look as if the frame rate is low.

[Miniature Effect]

MINI

- 64 -

1(When adjusting the brightness)

Touch .

≥The level of brightness is switched every time you touch the icon.

(Standard) # (Bright) # (Dark)

2(When adjusting the color balance)

Touch .

≥The level of color balance is switched every time you touch the icon.

(Blue) # (Red) # (Yellow)

3Start recording.

≥The sound is monaural.

1(When adjusting the brightness)

Touch .

≥The level of brightness is switched every time you touch the icon.

(Standard) # (Bright) # (Dark)

2Start recording.

≥Audio cannot be recorded.

Touch the desired setup time.

≥Touch [ENTER].

≥A frame is recorded with a set recording interval. 30 frames will make up a motion picture of

1 second.

≥“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “min” for minute and “s” for second.

≥These times are approximations.

≥Maximum recordable time is 12 hours.

[8mm movie]

[Silent movie]

[Time Lapse Rec]

[1 SEC.]/[10 SEC.]/[30 SEC.]/[1 MINUTE]/[2 MINUTES]

Setup example

Setup time

(recording

interval)

Recording time Recorded time

Sunset 1s 1h 2min

Blooming 30 s 3 h 12 s

8mm

SILN

INTV

- 65 -

≥Audio cannot be recorded.

≥[REC MODE] is set to [HA].

≥The shortest motion picture recording time is 1 second.

≥The color balance and focus may not be adjusted automatically depending on the light source or

scene. If so, manually adjust those settings. (l74, 76)

≥When recording for a long time, we recommend recording with the AC adaptor connected.

≥Change the Recording Mode to . (l59)

≥You can also press the HDR button to switch to this mode. Refer to page 50 for details.

HDR Movie Mode

- 66 -

≥Change the Recording Mode to . (l59)

Select the desired Scene Mode, then touch [ENTER].

≥(Sports/Portrait/Soft Skin/Spotlight/Snow/Beach/Sunset/Scenery)

jThe shutter speed is 1/8 or more in Still Picture Recording Mode.

≥(Sunset/Low Light)

jThe shutter speed is 1/30 or more in Motion Picture Recording Mode. (1/24 or more when

[REC FORMAT] is set to [24p])

≥(Sunset/Scenery/Fireworks/Night Scenery)

jImage may get blurry when close object is recorded.

≥(Sports)

jDuring normal playback, the image movement may not look smooth.

jColor and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.

jIf the brightness is insufficient, the Sports Mode does not function. The display flashes.

≥(Portrait)

jColor and screen brightness may change under indoor lighting.

≥(Soft Skin)

jIf the background or anything else in the scene has colors similar to the skin color, they will also

be smoothed.

jIf the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be clear.

jIf you record a person in the distance, the face may not be recorded clearly. In this case, cancel

Soft Skin Mode or zoom in on the face (close-up) to record.

≥(Fireworks)

jThe shutter speed is 1/30.

jImage may get washed out when recorded in bright surrounding.

≥(Night Scenery)

jThe shutter speed is 1/2 or more in Still Picture Recording Mode.

jUsing a tripod is recommended.

Scene Mode

Mode Effect

5Sports: To make fast moving scenes less shaky with slow playback and

pause of playback

Portrait: To make people stand out against the background

Soft Skin: To makes skin colors appear softer for a more attractive

appearance

Spotlight: Improved quality when subject is brightly illuminated.

Snow: Improved image quality when shooting in snowy locations.

Beach: To make blue in the sea or sky vibrant

Sunset: To make red in the sunrise or sunset vibrant

Scenery: For spatial scenery

Fireworks: To capture the fireworks in the night sky beautifully

Night Scenery: To capture the evening or night scenery beautifully

Low Light: For dark scenes, such as at dusk

(In Motion Picture Recording Mode only)

- 67 -

≥Change the Recording Mode to . (l59)

Select the desired Cinema Like Effect Mode, and touch [ENTER].

1Touch [OK].

2Start recording.

≥The image will be recorded in slow motion.

3Touch and hold at the scene where you

want to switch to quick motion.

≥The image will be recorded in quick motion while you are

touching and holding the icon.

≥The image will be recorded in slow motion when you

release the finger.

≥You can switch to quick motion repeatedly.

≥When recording with Slow & Quick Video Mode, use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of

the SD Speed Class Rating.

≥Recordable time with the battery will be shortened with the use of Slow & Quick Video recording.

≥This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].

≥The following settings will be selected:

j[LEVEL SHOT]: [OFF]

j[ZOOM MODE]: [Opt.Zoom 20k]

j[REC FORMAT]: [MP4/iFrame]*

j[REC MODE]: [1080/28M]*

j[HYBRID O.I.S.]: [OFF]

j[AUTO SLOW SHTR]: [OFF]

* (After switching to Slow & Quick Video Mode with [REC FORMAT] set to [4K MP4])

If you switch to a different Recording Mode, [REC FORMAT] will not be reset to [4K MP4]. A [REC

FORMAT] setting of [MP4/iFrame] and a [REC MODE] setting of [1080/28M] will be maintained.

≥The shutter speed is 1/120 or more.

Cinema Like Effect

[WXF991]

Mode Effect

Slow & Quick Video Mode Allows you to switch images between slow and quick motion

during recording.

FULL HD Slow Motion Video

Mode

Allows you to record slow motion images. (l68)

Slow Zoom Mode Allows you to record images that slowly zoom in/out. (l69)

Dolly Zoom Mode Allows you to record images that only change the angle of view

in the background while keeping the size of the subject (person)

constant. The images are played back with a quick motion effect

of k2. (l70)

Slow & Quick Video Mode

QUICK

- 68 -

≥The following limitations apply:

jAudio is not recorded. ( is displayed.)

jStill pictures cannot be recorded.

jThe size of the image displayed on the screen will change.

jImages and sound are not output from this unit to another device.

≥When you switch to Slow & Quick Video Mode, the screen may become black momentarily.

≥The following settings are canceled:

jAF/AE tracking

jPRE-REC

jFade

≥Scenes recorded in Slow & Quick Video Mode are displayed with the indication on the

thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and played back in 1920k1080/60p.

1Touch [OK].

2Select the menu.

3Start recording.

4(When [Interval] is selected)

Touch and hold when you want to use

FULL HD Slow Motion Video recording.

≥As long as you touch and hold the icon, FULL HD Slow

Motion Video recording will continue.

≥Once you release your finger, normal recording will start.

≥For each recording you make, FULL HD Slow Motion Video

recording is possible up to 3 times.

≥To check how many more times you can use FULL HD Slow Motion Video recording, see the

number of the yellow lights A.

≥To record the scene into an SD card, use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD

Speed Class Rating.

≥Recordable time with the battery will be shortened with the use of FULL HD Slow Motion Video

recording.

≥This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].

≥FULL HD Slow Motion Video recording uses the following settings:

j[LEVEL SHOT]: [OFF]

j[ZOOM MODE]: [Opt.Zoom 20k]

j[REC FORMAT]: [MP4/iFrame]*

j[REC MODE]: [1080/28M]*

j[HYBRID O.I.S.]: [OFF]

j[AUTO SLOW SHTR]: [OFF]

* (After switching to FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode with [REC FORMAT] set to [4K MP4])

If you switch to a different Recording Mode, [REC FORMAT] will not be reset to [4K MP4].

The [REC FORMAT] setting of [MP4/iFrame] and the [REC MODE] setting of [1080/28M] will be maintained.

FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode

: [RECORD SETUP] # [SLOW MOTION SETUP] # desired setting

[Interval]: Allows you to switch between normal recording and FULL HD Slow Motion

Video recording while recording.

[Always]: Records the entire scene as FULL HD Slow Motion Video.



- 69 -

≥The shutter speed is 1/120 or more.

≥The following limitations apply:

jThe sound of the parts will not be recorded. ( will be displayed during the recording)

jStill pictures cannot be recorded.

jThe size of the image displayed on the screen will change.

jImages and sound are not output from this unit to another device.

≥When you switch to FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode, the screen may become black

momentarily.

≥The following settings are canceled:

jAF/AE tracking

jPRE-REC

jFade

≥Scenes recorded in FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode are displayed with the indication on

the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and played back in 1920k1080/60p.

≥You can set the playback speed on this unit in [SLOW PLAY SPEED] (l106). In addition, you

can set the playback speed on another device to 1/4 normal speed in [Slow Speed Conversion]

(l136).

1Touch [OK].

2Start recording.

3Touch the Slow Zoom button icon ( / ) to

start Slow Zoom.

≥The lens will be zoomed at a constant speed to the tele

or wide end.

≥If you touch the same Slow Zoom button icon again

during Slow Zoom, the operation will stop.

≥If you touch the other Slow Zoom button icon during

Slow Zoom, Slow Zoom will start in the opposite

direction.

To set the zoom speed

1Before starting Slow Zoom, touch .

2Touch (Normal) or (Slow).

≥AF/AE tracking or digital zoom is not available.

≥PRE-REC will be canceled.

≥You cannot operate Slow Zoom or adjust the zoom speed when using manual settings or

adjusting the picture quality with the Multi Manual Dial. (l73, 100)

≥You cannot perform zoom operations with the zoom lever or zoom button icons during Slow

Zoom.

≥On the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, scenes recorded with Slow Zoom Mode are

displayed with the indication.

Slow Zoom Mode

Slow Zoom button icon

SLOW

NORM

SLOW

- 70 -

1Touch [OK].

2Align the subject's position with the center

frame B.

≥The face detection frame A will be displayed around the

subject’s face.

≥Adjust so that the face detection frame and center frame

appear in the same size. When they appear in the same

size, the color of the center frame changes from red to

green.

3Start recording.

≥The image will be recorded in quick motion.

4Touch the Auto Zoom button icon C ( / )

to start Auto Zoom.

≥The lens will be zoomed at a constant speed to the tele

or wide end.

≥If you touch the same Auto Zoom button icon again

during Auto Zoom, the operation will stop.

≥

If you touch the other

Auto

Zoom button icon during Auto

Zoom,

Auto

Zoom will start in the opposite direction.

5Adjust the position of this unit while keeping

the subject's size constant.

≥Adjust while moving the recording position backward or forward.

≥

Performing Auto Zoom while adjusting the position of this unit allows you to create a Dolly Zoom effect.

≥If you have touched , record the subject while moving away from it; if you have touched

, record the subject while moving closer to it.

≥Adjust the position of this unit so that the subject fits into the center frame.

≥This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].

≥The following settings will be selected:

j[ZOOM MODE]: [Opt.Zoom 20k]

j[REC FORMAT]: [MP4/iFrame]

j[REC MODE]: [1080/28M]

j[FACE FRAMING]: [PRIMARY]

≥The following limitations apply:

jAudio is not recorded. ( is displayed.)

jStill pictures cannot be recorded.

≥The following settings are canceled:

jAF/AE tracking

jPRE-REC

jFade

j[LEVEL GAUGE]

j[PICTURE ADJUST]

≥Operations with the Multi Manual Dial are not possible. (l73)

≥

You cannot perform zoom operations with the zoom lever or zoom button icons during Auto Zoom.

≥Scenes recorded in Dolly Zoom Mode are displayed with the indication on the thumbnail

screen in Playback Mode, and played back in 1920k1080/60p.

Dolly Zoom Mode

AUTO

AThe face detection frame

BThe subject's position with the

center frame

AUTO

CThe Auto Zoom button icon

AUTO

- 71 -

≥Change the Recording Mode to . (l59)

≥For information on how to use this mode, refer to “FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode” on page

68.

≥Change the Recording Mode to . (l59)

1Record a motion picture.

2Switch this unit to Playback Mode, and create still pictures from the motion

picture. (l104)

≥Scenes recorded with the 4K Photo Mode function are displayed with the indication on the

thumbnail screen.

≥Use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD Speed Class when you want to record 4K

Photo Mode scenes to the SD card.

≥This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].

≥[REC FORMAT] is fixed to [4K MP4].

≥[AUTO SLOW SHTR] is set to [OFF].

≥If the Level Shot Function is set to (Strong), it will be reset to (Normal). (l87)

FULL HD Slow Motion Video

[VX981]

4K Photo Mode

- 72 -

≥Change the Recording Mode to . (l59)

1Press the button to record the still pictures. (l30)

2Touch [Enter].

≥A still picture will be recorded, and it will be displayed in a semi-transparent state on the recording

screen. Look at the picture to estimate how far you should move the subject for the next

recording.

≥If you have already recorded still pictures in the recording group, the last still picture will be

displayed in a semi-transparent state on the recording screen.

≥To record again, touch and record again.

3Move the subject and determine the composition of the picture.

≥Repeat Steps 1-3 to continue recording.

≥You can save still pictures in the same recording group until you use [Create Stop Motion].

Creating a new recording group

≥If you touch [YES], a new recording group will be created and the recording screen will be

displayed.

≥Once you create a recording group, you cannot save still pictures in any of the older recording

groups.

≥[PICTURE SIZE] is set to (1920k1080).

≥When you want to record still pictures in a separate recording group, use a different SD card.

≥For details on playback of the Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode, refer to page 127.

Stop Motion Animation Assist

Before recording in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode

You can create a slideshow that appears to be moving by recording the subject while moved a

little at a time.

≥Each recording group can store up to 999 still pictures recorded in Stop Motion Animation

Assist Mode.

: [PICTURE] # [Create Stop Motion]

2.1M

- 73 -

≥The Manual Focus, White Balance, Shutter Speed, Brightness (Iris and Gain) settings are

retained when you change between Motion Picture Recording Mode and Still Picture

Recording Mode.

Push the Multi Manual Dial to switch to Manual Mode, or display the Manual icon. (

24)

≥Some functions are disabled depending on settings such as the recording mode.

≥When an item on the manual icon or the picture quality adjustment icon (l100) is not selected,

each time you push the Multi Manual Dial, the manual icon and the picture quality adjustment

icon are displayed alternately. Display the manual icon.

≥It is also possible to switch to Manual Mode by touching the Recording Mode button icon. (l59)

≥(For the )

When using the viewfinder, use the Multi Manual Dial.

≥To cancel the manual settings, change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode. (l59)

∫When using the LCD monitor

1Touch the desired item to be set.

2Touch / to enter the

selection.

∫Using the Multi Manual Dial

1Rotate the Multi

Manual Dial to select

an item.

2Push the Multi

Manual Dial to set.

3Rotate the Multi Manual Dial to

select a setting.

4Push the Multi Manual Dial to set.

Advanced (Recording)

Manual recording

FOCUS

SHTR

IRIS

FOCUS

SHTR

IRIS

MNL



AManual icon

Focus (l76)

White Balance (l74)

Manual Shutter Speed (l75)

Iris Adjustment (l75)

FOCUS

SHTR

IRIS

WXF991

FOCUS

SHTR

IRIS

FOCUS

SHTR

IRIS

MNL

FOCUS

SHTR

IRIS

MNL

- 74 -

White Balance

Automatic White Balance function may not reproduce natural colors depending on the scenes or

lighting conditions. If so, you can adjust the White Balance manually.

≥Switch to Manual Mode. (l73)

≥For information on how to set items with the Multi Manual Dial, refer to page 73.

1Touch [WB].

2Touch / to select White Balance Mode.

≥Touch [WB] to select the mode.

≥To return to auto setting, set to or change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto

Mode. (l59)

∫To set the White Balance manually

1Select , fill the screen with a white subject.

2Touch and set the blinking .

≥When using the Multi Manual Dial, push and hold it.

≥When the screen turns black instantly and the display stops

flashing and then lights constantly, the setting is complete.

≥If the display continues flashing, the White Balance cannot be

set. In this case, use other White Balance Modes.

≥When the display flashes, the Manual White Balance previously adjusted is stored.

Whenever recording conditions change, re-set the White Balance.

≥When setting both the White Balance and the iris/gain, set the White Balance first.

≥ is not displayed on the screen when is being set.

FOCUS

SHTR

IRIS

MNL

Icon Mode/Recording conditions

Automatic White Balance adjustment

Sunny mode:

Outdoors, under a clear sky

Cloudy mode:

Outdoors, under cloudy sky

Indoor mode 1:

Incandescent light, video lights like in the studio, etc.

Indoor mode 2:

Color fluorescent lamps, sodium lamps in gymnasiums etc.

Manual adjustment mode:

≥Mercury-vapor lamps, sodium lamps, some fluorescent lights

≥Lights used for wedding receptions at hotels, stage spotlights in theaters

≥Sunrise, sunset, etc.

AWB

FOCUS

SHTR

IRIS

MNL

AWB

- 75 -

Manual shutter speed/iris adjustment

Shutter Speed:

Adjust it when recording fast-moving subjects.

Iris:

Adjust it when the screen is too bright or too dark.

≥Switch to Manual Mode. (l73)

≥For information on how to set items with the Multi Manual Dial, refer to page 73.

1Touch [SHTR] or [IRIS].

2Touch / to adjust settings.

≥Touch [SHTR]/[IRIS] to end the adjustment.

: Shutter speed:

1/60 to 1/8000

≥If [AUTO SLOW SHTR] is set to [ON], the shutter speed will be set between 1/30 and 1/8000.

≥If [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p], the shutter speed will be set between 1/48 and 1/8000 (between

1/24 and 1/8000 when [AUTO SLOW SHTR] is set to [ON]).

≥The shutter speed closer to 1/8000 is faster.

≥The shutter speed will be set between 1/2 and 1/2000 in Still Picture Recording Mode.

: Iris/Gain value:

(F16 to F2.0)

OPEN

(0dB to 18dB)

≥Value closer to CLOSE darken the image.

≥Value closer to 18dB brighten the image.

≥When the iris value is adjusted to brighter than OPEN, it changes to the gain value.

≥To return to auto setting, change the Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode. (l59)

≥When setting both the shutter speed and the iris/gain value, set the shutter speed and then set

the iris/gain value.

Manual shutter speed adjustment

≥When the shutter speed is set lower than 1/15 in the Still Picture Recording Mode, using a tripod

is recommended. The shutter speed will be set to 1/30 when the unit is turned on again.

≥You may see a band of light around an object that is shining very bright, or highly reflective.

≥During normal playback, image movement may not look smooth.

≥If you record an extremely bright object or record under indoor lighting, color and screen

brightness may change or a horizontal line may appear on the screen. In this case, record in the

Intelligent Auto Mode or Manually adjust the shutter speed as follows:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]: 1/50 or 1/60.

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to a setting other than [24p]: 1/60 or 1/100.

≥Brightness of the image displayed on the LCD monitor may be different from brightness of the

image actually recorded during the Still Picture Recording Mode. Confirm the image on the

playback screen after recording.

Manual iris/gain adjustment

≥If the gain value is increased, the noise on the screen increases.

≥Depending on the zoom magnification, there are iris values that are not displayed.

SHTR

IRIS

- 76 -

Manual Focus adjustment

If auto focusing is difficult due to the conditions, then use Manual Focus.

≥Switch to Manual Mode. (l73)

≥For information on how to set items with the Multi Manual Dial, refer to page 73.

1(When MF assist function is used)

Select the menu.

≥Touch to display the Manual icon.

2Touch [FOCUS].

3Touch [MF] to change to Manual Focus.

≥MF appears on the screen.

4Adjust the focus by rotating the Multi Manual

Dial.

The in-focus area is displayed in blue. The normal screen

returns approximately 2 seconds after you finish bringing the

subject into focus.

≥When [MF ASSIST] is [OFF], the blue area is not

displayed.

≥To restore Auto Focus, touch [AF] in Step 3 or change the

Recording Mode to the Intelligent Auto Mode. (l59)

≥The blue display does not appear on the images actually recorded.

: [RECORD SETUP] # [MF ASSIST] # [ON]

Rotate the Multi Manual Dial to

set focus.

MNL

APart displayed in blue

- 77 -

When recording with a [REC FORMAT] setting of [4K MP4] or [24p] (and with a [REC MODE]

setting of [2160/24p]), you can magnify the screen to adjust the focus.

You can magnify the screen to adjust the focus. It is also possible to change the magnification

window’s magnification level and position.

≥When [MF ASSIST] is set to [ON], in-focus portions are highlighted in blue.

≥Set [REC FORMAT] and [REC MODE] as follows, or set the Recording Mode to 4K Photo

Mode.

jSet [REC FORMAT] to [4K MP4].

jSet [REC FORMAT] to [24p], and [REC MODE] to [2160/24p].

≥Change to Manual Focus. (l76)

1Touch and hold the LCD monitor when the recording screen

is displayed or press and hold the Multi Manual Dial.

≥A portion of the screen will be magnified.

2(To change the magnification level)

Touch / .

≥You can adjust the magnification from 3k to 10k.

≥When the magnification is set between 5.5k and 10k, the magnification window is maximized

and the zoom position window is displayed.

(Moving the magnified area)

Touch / / / or slide the screen while touching it to move the magnified

area.

3Rotate the Multi Manual Dial to adjust the focus.

4Touch [EXIT] or push and hold the Multi Manual Dial to exit

the magnified display.

Using the Expanded Focus Assist function

:Increases the magnification level by 0.5k.

:Decreases the magnification level by 0.5k.

5.5X

5.5X5.5X





3.0X3.0X3.0X

 

(Between 3k and 5k) (Between 5.5k and 10k)

AMagnification window

B[EXIT]

CZoom position window

D[EXIT]

- 78 -

∫To adjust the magnification window's

magnification level or position with the

Multi Manual Dial

1Push and hold the Multi Manual Dial.

≥A portion of the screen will be magnified.

2Push the Multi Manual Dial.

≥/ will be selected and highlighted in yellow.

≥Each push of the Multi Manual Dial switches the selected

icon(s).

/ # / # / # [EXIT] # No selection

≥If you touch the screen, the icon selection will be canceled.

3Rotate the Multi Manual Dial to make

adjustments.

≥Focus is not adjusted.

≥The magnification window disappears when [EXIT] is selected.

≥Some information on the screen disappears when the screen is magnified.

≥The magnification window is not displayed on the actual recorded images.

≥The magnification window is not displayed on TVs.

≥(For the )

The Sub Window is not displayed when the magnification window is displayed.

≥The magnification window disappears in the following cases:

jWhen you start recording a motion picture

jWhen you continue to zoom in until you enter the digital zoom range

≥The magnification window is not displayed in the following cases:

jWhen recording a motion picture or during PRE-REC

jDuring digital zoom

jWhen recording yourself

≥If you rotate the LCD monitor to face forward to record yourself while the magnification window is

displayed, the operations below cannot be performed. Return the direction of the LCD monitor to

normal position and before performing these operations:

j Changing the magnification window’s magnification level or position

j Exiting the magnification window

3.0X

3.0X3.0X



A[EXIT]

ASSIST

ASSISTASSIST

x5.5

x5.5x5.5

3.0X

3.0X3.0X



B[EXIT]

WXF991

- 79 -

You can record using convenient functions just by the easy operation of touching the screen.

1Touch (left side)/ (right side) of on the Touch Menu to display

Touch Function icons. (l24)

2Touch the Touch Function icon.

(e.g. AF/AE tracking)

≥To cancel, touch the Touch Function icon again. (Optical

Image Stabilizer Lock is canceled by releasing the finger

touching .)

Touch function icons

*1 In Motion Picture Recording Mode only

*2 In Still Picture Recording Mode only

Advanced (Recording)

Recording with the Touch Function

Image Stabilizer Function

AF/AE tracking

Optical Image Stabilizer Lock*1

Touch Shutter*2

- 80 -

Use the Image Stabilizer to reduce the effects of shake during recording.

This unit is equipped with Hybrid Optical Image Stabilizer.

Hybrid Optical Image Stabilizer is a hybrid of Optical and Electrical Image Stabilizer.

Touch to switch the Image Stabilizer on/off.

≥The icon at position A is switched.

∫Changing Image Stabilizer Mode

(Motion Picture Recording Mode)

When set to [ON], you can further improve image stabilization for recording while walking, or

holding the unit and recording a distant subject with zoom.

≥This function’s default setting is [ON].

(Still Picture Recording Mode)

Image Stabilizer Function



(Motion Picture Recording Mode)

/ # (setting canceled)

≥When [HYBRID O.I.S.] is [ON], is displayed. When [OFF], is displayed.

≥When recording with a tripod in Motion Picture Recording Mode, we recommend that you set the

Image Stabilizer (off).

(Still Picture Recording Mode)

/ # (setting canceled)

≥When [O.I.S.] is [MODE1], is displayed. When [O.I.S.] is [MODE2], is displayed.

: [RECORD SETUP] # [HYBRID O.I.S.] # [ON] or [OFF]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [O.I.S.] # [MODE1] or [MODE2]

[MODE1]: The function works all the time.

[MODE2]: The function works when the button is pressed. We recommend using

this mode when you are recording yourself or recording with a tripod in Still

Picture Recording Mode.

- 81 -

It is possible to set the focus and exposure to the subject specified on the touch screen.

The focus and exposure will keep following the subject automatically even if it moves.

1Touch .

≥An icon is displayed B.

2Touch the object and lock the target.

≥When you touch the head of the object, the target frame on

the head gets locked and tracking starts.

≥Touch the object to be changed again when you want to

change the target.

≥When the Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus

Mode is selected, the setting becomes / (Normal)

and touched object is tracked. Selection becomes /

(Portrait) when target frame is locked on a face. (It

may turn to / (Normal) even if the target is locked

on the face when a spotlight is shining or with a dark

scene.)

3Start recording.

∫About target frame

≥When target lock fails, the target frame blinks in red and then disappears. Touch a characteristic

part (color etc.) on the object to lock onto it again.

≥When the button is pressed halfway in Still Picture Recording Mode, the focus is set to the

object that is locked. The target frame turns green when it focuses, and the target cannot be

changed.

≥This function can be used in Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode. In Still Picture

Recording Mode, this function can only be used with some settings in Scene Mode.

≥It may track different objects or may not lock the target depending on the recording conditions

such as the following:

jWhen the object is too large or too small

jWhen color of the object is similar to the background

jWhen the scene is dark

≥When the target is locked in Still Picture Recording Mode, the screen may become dark or the AF

assist lamp may be performed. (l102)

≥If you use the Fade function while the target is locked, the target lock will be canceled. (l84)

≥AF/AE tracking will be canceled in the following cases.

jWhen the unit is turned off

jPress the recording/playback button

jTouch the recording mode switching icon

jTouch the Recording Mode button icon

jSwitch to recording of yourself

AF/AE tracking





ATarget frame

- 82 -

In Motion Picture Recording Mode, you can further improve optical image stabilization by

touching and holding . With this function, you can further reduce the effects of the

shake that tends to occur when using zoom.

1Touch to turn the Image Stabilizer on. (l80)

2Touch and hold .

≥Icon is displayed in A while you are touching and holding .

≥Optical Image Stabilizer Lock is released when you remove your finger from the icon.

∫To make the display of disappear

Display of will not disappear even when no operation is performed for specific time with the default

setting. To make the display of disappear, change the setting of the [O.I.S. LOCK DISPLAY].

≥The Optical Image Stabilizer Lock function is not available in the following situations:

jFULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode

j(For the )

Slow & Quick Video Mode

≥Stabilization may not be possible under strong shaking conditions.

≥To record while moving the unit quickly, release Optical Image Stabilizer Lock.

It is possible to focus and record a still picture of a subject that is touched.

1Touch .

≥An icon is displayed A.

2Touch the subject.

≥Focus area is displayed at the touched position, and a still

picture is recorded.

≥Depending on the recording conditions or recognition of the touched position, it may not be

possible to record the intended picture.

≥This will not operate for recording yourself.

Optical Image Stabilizer Lock



: [SETUP] # [O.I.S. LOCK DISPLAY] # desired setting

[ON]: Constantly display.

[OFF]: The icon will disappear after approx. 5 seconds without any touch operation.

Touch Shutter

WXF991



- 83 -

Select the operation icons to add different effects to the images to be recorded.

1Touch (left side)/ (right side) of on the Touch Menu to display the

operation icons. (l24)

2Touch an operation icon.

(e.g. PRE-REC)

≥The operation icons that are displayed in the Touch Menu

can be changed. ([SELECT OPERATION ICONS]: l42)

≥Select the operation icon again to cancel the function.

Refer to the respective pages for canceling the following

functions.

jSelf-timer (l85)

jGuidelines (l85)

jVideo light (l86)

jNight Mode (l86)

jLevel Shot Function (l87)

≥The icon is displayed when the operation icon is set.

Operation icons

*1 Not displayed in Still Picture Recording Mode.

*2 Not displayed in Motion Picture Recording Mode.

*3 Available in the following recording modes:

jManual Mode

j(For the )

Slow Zoom Mode

*4 It is displayed only when you set the Recording Mode to HDR Movie Mode. (l50, 65)

*5 It is displayed only when a headphone is connected to the headphone output terminal. [MIC

LEVEL] (l99) is set to anything other than [AUTO], is displayed as the operation icon,

and adjustment of input level of the microphone is possible.

≥If you turn off the unit or press the Recording/Playback button, PRE-REC, Self-timer, Backlight

Compensation and Night Mode functions are canceled.

≥If you turn off the unit, the Fade function is canceled.

≥It is possible to set from the menu.

(Except for the Headphone volume adjustment)

Advanced (Recording)

Recording functions of operation

icons

PRE-REC

Fade*1

Intelligent Contrast Control*1

PRE-REC*1

Self-timer*2

Intelligent Exposure*2

Backlight Compensation

Guidelines

Video light

Night Mode*1, 3

HDR Effect*1, 4

Level Shot Function*1

Headphone volume adjustment/

Microphone level adjustment*5

WXF991

- 84 -

When you start recording, the image/audio gradually

appears. (Fade in)

When you pause recording, the image/audio gradually

disappears. (Fade out)

≥The Fade setting is canceled when the recording stops.

∫To select the color for fade in/out

≥The thumbnails of scenes recorded using fade in become black (or white).

This brightens parts that are in shadow and difficult to see and suppresses white saturation

in bright parts at the same time. Both bright and dark parts can be recorded clearly.

≥If there are extremely dark or bright parts or the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be

clear.

This allows recording of the pictures and sound to start approximately 3 seconds before the

recording start/stop button is pressed.

≥ appears on the screen.

≥Aim the unit at the subject beforehand.

≥There is no beep sound.

≥PRE-REC is canceled in the following cases.

jPress the recording/playback button

jTouch the recording mode switching icon

jIf you remove the SD card

jIf you touch

j(For the )

If you press the recording mode selector button

jIf you press the HDR button

jIf you press the Wi-Fi button

jIf you turn the unit off

jIf you start recording

jAfter 3 hours have passed

Fade

: [RECORD SETUP] # [FADE COLOR] #

[WHITE] or [BLACK]

(Fade in)

(Fade out)

Intelligent Contrast Control

PRE-REC

This prevents you from missing a shot.

PRE-REC

WXF991

- 85 -

≥After setting PRE-REC, if recording starts in less than 3 seconds, motion pictures taken

3 seconds before pressing the recording start/stop button cannot be recorded.

≥Images displayed on the thumbnail in Playback Mode will differ from the motion pictures

displayed at the start of playback.

This is for recording still pictures using the timer.

Each time the icon is selected, the indication changes by one setting in the following order:

Ø10 (Records after 10 seconds) # Ø2 (Records after 2 seconds) # setting canceled

≥When you press the button, Ø10 or Ø2 flashes for the set period before a still picture is

recorded. After recording, the Self-timer is canceled.

≥In Auto Focus Mode, if the button is pressed halfway once and then fully, the lens focuses

on the subject when the button is pressed halfway. If the button is pressed fully all at once,

the lens focuses on the subject just before recording.

To stop the timer midway through

Touch [CANCEL].

≥Setting the Self-timer to Ø2 is a good way to prevent image shake when the button is

pressed while using a tripod etc.

This brightens dark areas so the image can be recorded clearly.

≥If there are extremely dark parts or the brightness is insufficient, the effect may not be clear.

This makes the image brighter to prevent darkening of a backlit subject.

You can check if the image is level while recording motion pictures and still pictures. The

function can also be used to estimate the balance of the composition.

It will switch every time the icon is touched.

# # # Setting canceled

≥The guidelines do not appear on the images actually recorded.

Self-timer

Intelligent Exposure

Backlight Compensation

Guidelines

- 86 -

It is possible to record with illumination even in dark places.

Each time the icon is selected, the indication changes by one setting in the following order.

In motion picture recording mode:

([ON]) # ([AUTO]) # ([OFF])

In still picture recording mode:

([ON]) # ([OFF])

≥When the battery is low and the light cannot be lit, the will be displayed on the screen.

≥When set to , the video light turns on in Low Light Mode in Intelligent Auto Mode.

≥When the video light is in use, the recordable time when using the battery is shortened.

≥When the battery level is low, the video light may turn off or may not turn on.

≥Do not use with Filter Kit (optional) or Conversion Lens (optional) attached.

≥The (approximate) available range of the video light is approximately up to

1.2

m (3.9 feet).

≥Using the Night Mode ([COLOR]) function at the same time will make conditions even brighter.

You can record images even in very low light situations (minimum required illumination:

approx. 1 lx) or in the dark.

Each time the icon is selected, the indication changes by one setting in the following order:

([COLOR]) # ([Infrared])* # [OFF]

* This icon is not displayed in the following cases:

jWhen [WIDE CONV. LENS SET] is set to [ON]

jWhen the Sub Window is displayed in Twin Camera

∫To set ON/OFF of the infrared light for ([Infrared])

≥When is displayed after you set the item to [ON], you can record images in the dark.

≥When you are in a dim place or in other situations where it is difficult to focus with Auto Focus, set

the item to [OFF].

≥If you turn off and on this unit and select ([Infrared]), [INFRARED LIGHT] will be set to [ON].

Video light

:Always on.

:Turns on/off automatically according to brightness of the surroundings.

:Cancel the setting.

Night Mode

([COLOR]): Allows you to record color images in very low light situations.

([Infrared])*: Allows you to record images in the dark.

OFF: Cancel the setting.

: [RECORD SETUP] # [INFRARED LIGHT] # [ON] or [OFF]

- 87 -

≥Using a tripod is recommended.

≥In darker areas, Auto Focus may focus a bit slower. This is normal.

≥Night Mode is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [WIDE CONV. LENS SET] is

set to [ON].

Night Mode ([COLOR])

≥Recorded scene is seen as if frames were missed.

≥If set in a bright place, the screen may become washed out for a while.

≥Bright dots that are usually invisible may be seen, but this is not a malfunction.

Night Mode ([Infrared])

≥Do not use ([Infrared]) in a bright location. Doing so may cause a malfunction.

≥When ([Infrared]) is set, observe the following points:

jDo not cover the infrared light with your hand or other object.

jWhen a Conversion Lens (optional) is attached to this unit, do not use the setting.

≥The maximum distance that the infrared light can reach is approximately 3 m (9.8 feet).

≥You can record a clear image by positioning the center area of the screen over the subject.

You can change the level of image contrast correction in HDR Movie Mode. (l50, 65)

The icon changes each time you touch it.

(Low) # (High)

≥You cannot change the level of this effect when recording a motion picture or during PRE-REC.

≥You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.

This function detects the horizontal tilt of the unit, and automatically corrects it to the level

position.

Each touch of this icon switches Level Shot Function.

(Normal) # (Strong) # Off

≥The icon changes when the tilt exceeds the correction range.

≥When the tilt exceeds the correction range, move the unit to the position where / is

displayed.

HDR Effect

(Low): Sets the correction level to low.

(High): Sets the correction level to high.

Level Shot Function

(Normal): Corrects the tilt.

(Strong): Strengthen tilt correction.

Off: Cancel the setting.

/ When the tilt is corrected

/ / / When the tilt is above the correction range

- 88 -

≥This function's default setting is (Normal).

≥The range that this icon can be displayed correctly the slope is about 45 o to the horizontal

direction.

≥Level Shot Function is canceled when [LEVEL GAUGE] is set to [ON]. (l93)

≥When recording horizontal images using a tripod, attach the unit on the tripod using [LEVEL

GAUGE], and then set Level Shot Function to (Normal) or (Strong) before use.

≥When you switch the setting of the Level Shot Function, the screen may become black

momentarily.

≥If you set the option to (Strong), the angle of view will change.

≥This function cannot be set when recording a motion picture or during PRE-REC.

≥In the following cases, you cannot set the Level Shot Function to (Strong)

Even if you set it to (Strong), it will be reset to (Normal).

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4]

jSet [REC FORMAT] to [24p], and [REC MODE] to [2160/24p].

jWhen the Recording Mode is set to 4K Photo Mode

Adjust the volume of the headphone while recording.

: Increase the volume

: Decrease the volume

≥Actual volume to be recorded does not change.

Headphone volume adjustment



A[HEADPHONE LEVEL]

- 89 -

This function is identical to Scene Mode in Recording Mode. (l66)

The shutter speed and aperture, etc. are automatically adjusted to match the scene you want to

record.

≥This item is displayed in the menu only when [Time Lapse Rec] in Creative Control Mode is

set. (l64)

≥Please refer to page 66 for details about the effect of each mode.

Advanced (Recording)

Recording functions of menus

[SCENE MODE]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [SCENE MODE] # desired setting

[OFF]: Cancel the setting

5Sports: To make fast moving scenes less shaky with slow playback and

pause of playback

Portrait: To make people stand out against the background

Soft Skin: To makes skin colors appear softer for a more attractive

appearance

Spotlight: Improved quality when subject is brightly illuminated.

Snow: Improved image quality when shooting in snowy locations.

Beach: To make blue in the sea or sky vibrant

Sunset: To make red in the sunrise or sunset vibrant

Scenery: For spatial scenery

Fireworks: To capture the fireworks in the night sky beautifully

Night Scenery: To capture the evening or night scenery beautifully

Low Light: For dark scenes, such as at dusk

- 90 -

Set the maximum zoom ratio for the Motion Picture Recording Mode.

*1 Not displayed in the following situations:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD] or [MP4/iFrame].

jWhen [REC MODE] is set to [1080/24p].

*2 Not displayed in the following situations:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4]

jWhen [REC MODE] is set to [2160/24p]

jWhen the Recording Mode is set to 4K Photo Mode

≥The larger the digital zoom magnification, the more the image quality is degraded.

≥This function cannot be used in Still Picture Recording Mode.

[ZOOM MODE]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [ZOOM MODE] # desired setting

[Opt.Zoom 20k]: Optical zoom only (Up to 20k)

[i.Zoom 25k]*1:This zoom function allows you to maintain 4K picture quality. (Up to

25k)

[i.Zoom 40k]*2:This zoom function allows you to maintain high-definition picture

quality. (Up to 40k)

[D.Zoom 60k]: Digital zoom (Up to 60k)

[D.Zoom 1500k]: Digital zoom (Up to 1500k)

- 91 -

Switch the recording format of motion picture.

≥Use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD Speed Class Rating when you want to

record motion pictures to the SD card using the setting [4K MP4] or [24p].

≥This function’s default setting is [4K MP4] mode.

Switch the picture quality and recording format of the motion pictures to record. The recording

formats that can be set change according to [REC FORMAT] setting.

≥When [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4]

Set the recording format to 2160/30p (72 Mbps).

≥This is a recording format suitable for editing images.

This format can record 4K motion pictures (3840k2160/30p), which deliver a resolution four

times higher than that of full high-definition motion pictures.

≥When [REC FORMAT] is set to [MP4/iFrame]

[REC FORMAT]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [REC FORMAT] # desired setting

[4K MP4]: Set the recording format to 4K MP4. (l2)

[MP4/iFrame]: Set the recording format to MP4/iFrame. (l2)

[AVCHD]: Set the recording format to AVCHD. (l2)

[24p] Set the recording format to 24p. (l2)

[REC MODE]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [REC MODE] # desired setting

[1080/50M]*1:Set the recording format to 1080/60p (50 Mbps).

[1080/28M]*1:Set the recording format to 1080/60p (28 Mbps).

[720]*1:Set the recording format to 720/30p.

[iFrame]*2:Set the recording format to iFrame.

- 92 -

≥When [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD]

AFavors image quality

BFavors Recording time

≥When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]

*1 [1080/50M]/[1080/28M] and [720] are recording modes suitable for playing back or editing on a PC.

*2 [iFrame] is a format suitable for Mac (iMovie etc.). It is recommended for when using a Mac.

*3 You can record motion pictures in 1080/60p (1920k1080/60 progressive), the best AVCHD

picture quality for this unit.

≥Please refer to page 13 for details about recordable time using the battery.

≥Use an SD card conforming to Class 10 of the SD Speed Class Rating when you want to

record motion pictures to the SD card using the setting [1080/50M].

≥Please refer to page 251 for details about approximate recordable time.

≥When the unit is moved a lot or moved quickly, or when a fast-moving subject is recorded,

mosaic-type noise may appear at playback.

Detected faces appear with frames.

≥Up to 5 frames are indicated. Larger faces and faces nearer to the center of the screen take

preference over others.

∫Prioritized face framing

Prioritized face framing is displayed as orange frames. Focus and adjustment of brightness will be

performed against the prioritized face framing.

≥

The prioritized face frame is displayed only with Portrait Mode in Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.

≥The white frame is for face detection only.

≥Focus will be set to prioritized face framing when the button is pressed halfway when

recording still pictures. Prioritized face framing will turn to green when the focus is set.

≥Faces are not detected in HDR Movie Mode or Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode. (l50, 72)

[PH]/[HA]/[HG]/[HE]:

(AB)

Set the recording format to 1080/60i.

[1080/60p]*3:Set the recording format to 1080/60p.

[2160/24p]: Set the recording format to 2160/24p (72 Mbps).

[1080/24p]: Set the recording format to 1080/24p (50 Mbps).

[FACE FRAMING]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [FACE FRAMING] # desired setting

[PRIMARY]:

Only the prioritized face framing is displayed.

[ALL]:

All face detection framings are displayed.

[OFF]:

Cancel the setting.

- 93 -

This function displays the horizontal/vertical tilt of the unit with the electronic level.

∫To correct the tilt

≥The horizontal tilt display A and vertical tilt display B appear yellow when there is a tilt, and

appear green when there is almost no tilt.

≥The maximum tilt display angles are approximately 45 o in horizontal direction and 10 o in vertical

direction.

≥The electronic level does not affect the actual recorded images.

≥The electronic level is not displayed when recording yourself or the LCD monitor is closed with

the screen facing outward.

≥Even when the tilt is in the corrected state, an error of approximately 1 o may occur.

≥In the following cases, the electronic level may not be displayed correctly:

jWhen moving this unit

jWhen pointing this unit up or down at an angle closer to perpendicular

If the unit continues to be tilted upside down from the normal horizontal position while recording

motion pictures, it is automatically put into recording pause.

≥The AGS function may activate and cause the unit to pause the recording if you are recording a

subject right above or right below you.

[LEVEL GAUGE]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [LEVEL GAUGE] # [ON]

(Horizontal direction) (Vertical direction)

When correcting the leftward tilt When correcting the downward tilt

[AGS]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [AGS] # [ON]





- 94 -

You can record bright pictures even in dark places by slowing the shutter speed.

≥Switch to Manual Mode. (l73)

≥The shutter speed is set to 1/30 or more (1/24 or more when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p])

depending on the ambient brightness.

≥This function cannot be used in Still Picture Recording Mode.

≥When the shutter speed becomes 1/30 or 1/24, the screen may be seen as if frames are missed

and afterimages may appear.

Recording motion pictures with more vivid colors, using x.v.Color™ technology.

≥Switch to Manual Mode. (l73)

≥Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD]. (l91)

≥For more realistic colors, use an HDMI micro cable (supplied) with a TV that supports the

x.v.Color™.

≥When motion pictures recorded while this function is turned [ON] are played back with a

TV not compatible with x.v.Color™, colors may not be reproduced properly.

≥When these images are played back with devices other than ones compatible with x.v.Color™, it

is recommended to record the images after this function is turned [OFF].

≥x.v.Color™ is a name for devices that are compatible with the xvYCC format, an international

standard for expanded color in motion pictures, and that follow the rules for signal transmission.

Message is displayed when this unit is moved rapidly.

When “CAMERA PANNING IS TOO FAST.” appears, move the unit slowly while recording.

≥In the following cases, message will not appear:

jWhile pausing the recording (only when [DEMO MODE] is not set to [ON])

jWhen [LEVEL GAUGE] is set to [ON]

[AUTO SLOW SHTR]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [AUTO SLOW SHTR] # [ON]

[Digital Cinema Color]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [Digital Cinema Color] # [ON]

[SHOOTING GUIDE]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [SHOOTING GUIDE] # [ON]

- 95 -

This will change the setting of the Image Stabilizer function and Maximum zoom ratio to the one

appropriate for the recording when a Wide Conversion Lens (optional) is attached to this unit.

≥The following functions will not work:

jVideo light

j[AF ASSIST LAMP]

jNight Mode ([Infrared])

≥In Motion Picture Recording Mode, [ZOOM MODE] (l90) is fixed to [Opt.Zoom 10k] (up to

10k). In Still Picture Recording Mode, a zoom magnification of up to 10k is possible.

This will reduce the wind noise coming into the built-in microphones while maintaining the realism.

≥Switch to Manual Mode. (l73)

≥When [Strong] is set, you can check how effectively the wind noise is reduced with the icon

displayed on the screen. In descending order of the strength of the reduction effect, / /

/ is displayed.

≥When [Normal] is set, will be displayed on the screen.

≥This function’s default setting is [Normal].

≥When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, [Wind Noise Canceler] is

set to [Strong], and the setting cannot be changed.

≥You may not see the full effect depending on the recording conditions.

≥This function cannot be set when using an external microphone.

This function reduces the low-pitched sound when using an external microphone.

≥Switch to Manual Mode. (l73)

≥This function can be set only when using an external microphone.

[WIDE CONV. LENS SET]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [WIDE CONV. LENS SET] # [ON]

[Wind Noise Canceler]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [Wind Noise Canceler] # desired setting

[Strong]: When a strong wind is detected, this option effectively reduces the

wind noise by minimizing the low-pitched sound.

[Normal]: This option extracts and reduces only the wind noise without

deteriorating the sound quality.

[OFF]: Cancel the setting.

[LOWCUT]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [LOWCUT] # [ON]

- 96 -

You can set the built-in microphone's sound quality as appropriate for the scene you want to record.

≥Set [MIC SETUP] to [SURROUND] or [STEREO MIC]. (l98)

1Select the menu.

2(When [Customize] is selected)

Select the desired item.

3(When [Microphone Gain] is selected in Step 2)

Select an item.

(When [Frequency Response] is selected in Step 2)

Touch / to adjust.

≥Before recording, check the effect you have selected with a headphone set, etc.

≥The high frequency range (dB) and low frequency range (dB) can be adjusted.

≥If noises such as the sound caused by the wind bother you, set the low frequency range to

[LowCut].

≥To end the adjustment, touch [EXIT].

[Sound Scene Select]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [Sound Scene Select] # desired setting

[Auto]: Records sounds with standard settings.

[Music]: For recording scenes in which you need to cover a wide sound range

and a wide volume range, such as music concerts.

[Speech]: For recording speeches, talk sessions, and other events in which

sounds will be coming mostly from the front of this unit.

[Nature]: For recording in serene environments, such as forests and rivers.

[Festival]: For recording festivals, fireworks displays, and other very loud

scenes.

[Customize]: Allows you to adjust [Microphone Gain], [Frequency Response] and

[Directional].

[Microphone Gain]: Select this item when the sound recorded in a loud scene is

distorted.

[Frequency Response]: Adjusts the high frequency range and low frequency range

levels.

[Directional]: Select [SURROUND]/[STEREO] or [MONO].

[Normal]:

Adjusts the sound quality automatically.

[Attenuate]: Records sounds of very loud scenes at appropriate volume.

- 97 -

(When [Directional] is selected in Step 2)

Select an item.

4Touch [EXIT].

≥ appears on the screen.

≥Depending on the recording condition or sound quality, the desired effect may not be achieved.

≥The option is set to [Auto] when an external microphone is connected.

≥(When [Music] or [Festival] is set)

The volume of the recorded sounds may be lower than that of the sounds recorded with [Auto].

≥(When [Speech] or [Nature] is set)

Sounds recorded with these effects are less realistic than those recorded with [SURROUND] or

[STEREO MIC] in [MIC SETUP].

You can switch the channel number setting of the built-in microphone.

≥Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD]. (l91)

≥[2ch] will be selected in the following cases:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to a setting other than [AVCHD]

jWhen using an external microphone

[SURROUND]/[STEREO]:

Records sounds with the setting of [MIC SETUP] ([SURROUND] or

[STEREO MIC]).

[MONO]: Records sounds from all directions without setting specific directivity.

[5.1ch/2ch]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [5.1ch/2ch] # desired setting

[5.1ch]: Records with the 5.1ch.

[2ch]: Records with the 2ch.

- 98 -

Recording setting of the built-in microphone can be adjusted.

≥Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD]. (l91)

*1 The option is displayed only when [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [5.1ch].

*2 The option is displayed only when [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [2ch].

≥If you wish to record higher quality sound and maintain realism even when zooming in, for

instance, when recording a music recital, we recommend setting [MIC SETUP] to [SURROUND].

≥[STEREO MIC] will be selected in the following cases:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to a setting other than [AVCHD]

jWhen using an external microphone

≥When [Directional] in [Customize] in [Sound Scene Select] is set to [MONO], [SURROUND] and

[STEREO MIC] cannot be set. (If you set [MONO], [SURROUND] and [STEREO MIC] will be

switched to [ZOOM MIC])

[MIC SETUP]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC SETUP] # desired setting

[SURROUND]*1:Records the surrounding sound with added realism.

[ZOOM MIC]: Sound is recorded with changing the directionality in conjunction

with the zoom operation. Sounds near the front of the unit are

recorded more clearly if you zoom in (close-up) and surrounding

sounds are recorded more realistically if you zoom out (wide angle).

[FOCUS MIC]*1:The forward sound is recorded more clearly by enhancing the

directionality toward the center.

[STEREO MIC]*2:Records sound from two forward directions.

- 99 -

When recording, the input level from the built-in microphones and the external microphone terminal

can be adjusted.

1Select the menu.

2(When [SET ]/[SET ] is selected)

Touch / to adjust.

≥The adjustment screen to be displayed depends on the

setting of [5.1ch/2ch]. (l97)

≥Adjust the microphone input level so that the last

2 bars of the gain value are not red. (Otherwise, the sound

is distorted.) Select a lower setting for microphone input

level.

3Touch [ENTER].

≥Touch [EXIT] to complete the setting.

≥When [MIC SETUP] is [ZOOM MIC], the volume will be different depending on the zoom rate.

≥ (microphone input level meter) is displayed on the screen when [5.1ch/2ch] is set to

[5.1ch], and (microphone input level meter) is displayed when [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [2ch]

and [MIC LEVEL] is set to a setting other than [AUTO].

≥You cannot record with the audio completely muted.

[MIC LEVEL]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [MIC LEVEL] # desired setting

[AUTO]: AGC is activated, and the recording level is adjusted automatically.

[SET ]: The desired recording level can be set. AGC is activated, and sound

distortions are reduced.

[SET ]: The desired recording level can be set. Sounds are recorded in

natural quality.

(When set to [5.1ch])

ACenter

BFront left

CBack left

DFront right

EBack right

FMicrophone input level

- 100 -

Adjust the quality of the image while recording.

Adjust by outputting to a TV while adjusting the quality of the image.

≥This setting is retained when you change between Motion Picture Recording Mode and

Still Picture Recording Mode.

≥Switch to Manual Mode. (l73)

1Select the menu.

2Touch the desired setting items.

3Touch / to adjust settings.

4Touch [ENTER].

≥Touch [EXIT] to complete the settings.

≥ appears on the screen.

∫Adjusting the picture quality with the Multi Manual Dial

1Push the Multi Manual Dial.

≥When an item on the picture quality adjustment icon or the manual icon (l73) is not selected,

each time you push the Multi Manual Dial, the picture quality adjustment icon and the manual

icon are displayed alternately. Display the picture quality adjustment icon.

2Rotate the Multi Manual Dial to select an item.

3Push the Multi Manual Dial to set.

4Rotate the Multi Manual Dial to adjust the

setting.

5Push the Multi Manual Dial to set.

≥ appears on the screen.

[PICTURE ADJUST]

: [RECORD SETUP] # [PICTURE ADJUST]

[SHARPNESS]: Sharpness of the edge

[COLOR]: Depth of the color of the image

[EXPOSURE]: Brightness of the image

[WB ADJUST]: Picture color balance

MNL

APicture quality

adjustment icon

[SHARPNESS]

[COLOR]

[EXPOSURE]

[WB ADJUST]

MNL



B[EXPOSURE]

- 101 -

The higher the number of pixels, the higher the clarity of the picture when printing.

≥The number of recording pixels that can be set changes depending on selected screen aspect

ratio. (l102)

∫Picture size and Maximum zoom ratio in Still Picture Recording

Mode

* Extra Optical Zoom cannot be used. The maximum zoom magnification is 20k.

∫Picture size in Motion Picture Recording Mode

≥Set this unit to Motion Picture Recording Mode (l20)

≥The available picture sizes vary depending on the [REC FORMAT] and [REC MODE] settings.

≥

The default setting is in Still Picture Recording Mode and in Motion Picture Recording Mode.

≥The recording will become longer depending on the recording pixels.

≥Please refer to page 252 for details about the number of recordable pictures.

[PICTURE SIZE]

: [PICTURE] # [PICTURE SIZE] # desired setting

Picture size Aspect ratio Extra Optical Zoom (l49)

5216k3912

4:3

–*

3808k2856 –*

640k480 50k

5472k3648

3:2

–*

3984k2656 –*

1728k1152 35.7k

6784k3816

16:9

–*

4992k2808 –*

1920k1080 30k

: [PICTURE] # [PICTURE SIZE] # desired setting

Recording format Recording mode Available picture

size Aspect ratio

[4K MP4] [2160] 6016k3384

16:9

3840k2160

[MP4/iFrame] All 4992k2808

[AVCHD] 1920k1080

[24p]

[2160/24p] 6016k3384

3840k2160

[1080/24p] 4992k2808

1920k1080

20.4M

10.9M

0.3M

20M

10. 6

25.9M

14 M

2.1M

20.4M

8.3M

14 M

2.1M

20.4M

8.3M

14 M

2.1M

25.9M 20.4M

- 102 -

This allows you to select the aspect ratio of the pictures to suit printing or the playback method.

≥This function’s default setting is [16:9].

≥When the aspect ratio is set to [4:3] or [3:2], black bands may appear on the left and right of the

screen.

≥The edges of still pictures recorded on this unit with a 16:9 aspect ratio may be cut at printing.

Check the printer or photo studio before printing.

The video light is turned on to make it easier to focus when you are recording in dark places where

it is hard to focus.

≥Switch to Manual Mode. (l73)

≥When switching to Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode, the setting is fixed to

[AUTO] and cannot be changed.

≥This setting is not available when [VIDEO LIGHT] is set to [ON].

You can add a shutter sound when recording still pictures.

≥No shutter sound is emitted in Motion Picture Recording Mode.

[ASPECT RATIO]

: [PICTURE] # [ASPECT RATIO] # desired setting

[4:3]: Aspect ratio of 4:3 television

[3:2]: Aspect ratio of conventional film camera or prints (such as L-size print)

[16:9]: Aspect ratio of high-definition television, etc.

[AF ASSIST LAMP]

: [PICTURE] # [AF ASSIST LAMP] # [AUTO]

[SHTR SOUND]

: [PICTURE] # [SHTR SOUND] # desired setting

:Volume low

:Volume high

[OFF]: Cancel the setting.

- 103 -

Motion picture playback using operation icon

For details on the basic playback operations, refer to page 33.

≥Scenes that are large in file size may cause this unit to respond slower to operations performed

by the user or cause certain operations performed by this unit to become slower.

Advanced (Playback)

Playback Operations

Playback operation Playback display Operating steps

Skip Playback

(to the start of a

scene)

During Playback Touch the LCD monitor and slide from right

to left (from left to right) during playback.

Slow-motion

Playback During Pause

With the playback paused, continue touching

. ( is for slow rewind playback)

Frame-by-frame Slow-motion Playback is

performed continuously while the display is

touched and held.

≥Normal playback is restored when you touch

≥For slow rewind playback, the intervals

between frames and the display time per

frame vary depending on the type of the

scene.

Frame-by-frame

Playback

With the playback paused, touch .

(Touch to advance the frames one at a

time in the reverse direction.)

≥Normal playback is restored when you touch

≥For reverse Frame-by-frame Playback, the

intervals between frames vary depending on

the type of the scene.

Direct Playback

Touch the direct playback bar or slide it

while touching.

≥

The playback pauses temporarily and skips to

the position touched or slid to while touching.

≥(When you touch the bar or slide it while

touching during playback)

Playback will start by releasing your touching

or sliding finger.

- 104 -

Creating still picture from motion picture

A single frame from the recorded motion picture can be saved as a still picture.

The size of pictures to be recorded is determined by their scene type.

Press the button fully at the location to be saved as a still picture during

playback.

≥It is convenient to use Pause, Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback.

≥Date the motion picture was recorded will be registered as date of the still picture.

≥Quality will be different from the normal still picture.

Highlight & Time Frame Index

An image of one scene is displayed as a thumbnail at set search condition. Scene can be played

back from any midway point of the scene you wish to see.

≥Operate the zoom lever to side and change over the

thumbnail display to Highlight & Time Frame Index. (l35)

1Touch .

≥To display the next (previous) page:

jSlide the thumbnail display upward (downward) while touching

it.

jTouch (up) / (down) on the thumbnail scroll lever. (l34)

2Touch the desired search condition.

* It cannot be set while playing back 4K MP4 scenes, MP4/iFrame scenes, 24p scenes or scenes

recorded as Backup for Twin Camera.

≥When select [FACE], it will select the portion for which Face Recognition was performed from the

scenes judged to be clearly recorded. This will then be displayed as a thumbnail.

≥A portion judged to be clearly recorded will be detected and displayed in thumbnail if you select

[HIGHLIGHT].

Scene type Picture size

4K MP4 scenes

Scene(s) recorded in the recording mode [2160/24p] (3840k2160)

Scenes recorded in the recording format [MP4/iFrame]

AVCHD scenes

Scene(s) recorded in the recording mode [1080/24p]

Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera

Scenes saved in MP4 (1920k1080/30p)

Scenes saved in MP4 (1280k720/30p)

(1920k1080)

Scenes saved in MP4 (640k360/30p) (640k360)

[3 SEC.]/[6 SEC.]/[12 SEC.]/[MINUTES]/[FACE]*/[HIGHLIGHT]*

8.3M

2.1M

0.2M

- 105 -

3(When [MINUTES] is selected)

Touch / to set the time.

≥It can be set up to a maximum of 60 minutes.

≥Touch [ENTER].

4Touch the thumbnail to be played back.

≥Next (Previous) thumbnail can be displayed by touching / .

Repeat Playback

Playback of the first scene starts after playback of the last scene finishes.

The indication appears on the full screen views.

≥All the scenes are played back repeatedly. (When playing back motion pictures by date, all the

scenes on the selected date are played back repeatedly.)

Resuming the previous playback

If playback of a scene was stopped halfway, the playback can be resumed from where it was

stopped.

If playback of a motion picture is stopped, appears on the thumbnail view of the stopped

scene.

≥The memorized resume position is cleared if you turn off the unit or press the recording/playback

button.

(The setting of [RESUME PLAY] does not change.)

: [VIDEO SETUP] # [REPEAT PLAY] # [ON]

: [VIDEO SETUP] # [RESUME PLAY] # [ON]

- 106 -

Setting the playback speed of FULL HD Slow Motion

Video

You can set the speed at which this unit will play back parts recorded as FULL HD Slow Motion

Video.

≥Touch the play mode select icon, and select [ALL MP4/iFrame] or [1080/60p] in [MP4/

iFrame].

≥If you play back the parts on another device, they will be played back at 1/2 normal speed. To play

them back at 1/4 normal speed, perform [Slow Speed Conversion] (l136).

≥Once you perform [Slow Speed Conversion] on the scenes, the parts will be played back at 1/4

normal speed.

Zooming in on a still picture during playback

(Playback zoom)

You can zoom in by touching a still picture during playback.

1Touch and hold the part you wish to zoom in on during still picture playback.

≥It will display enlarged in order of normal display (k1) # k2 # k4. Touch and hold the screen to

zoom in from the normal display (k1) to k2. Touch the screen to zoom in from k2 to k4.

≥The still picture is zoomed in on, centering on the part you touched.

2Move to the zoomed in position by touching /

/ / or slide while touching the screen.

≥The location of the zoom displays for about 1 second when

zooming in (zooming out) or moving the displayed location.

Zooming out from the zoomed still picture

Touch to zoom out. (k4 # k2 # k1)

≥Touch to return to normal playback (k1).

≥You can also perform zoom operations using the zoom lever.

≥The more picture is enlarged, the more its quality deteriorates.

: [VIDEO SETUP] # [SLOW PLAY SPEED] # desired setting

[Super Slow]: Plays back at 1/4 normal speed.

[Slow]: Plays back at 1/2 normal speed.

ビヹ

ADisplayed location of

the zoom

- 107 -

Playing back motion pictures/still pictures by date

The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the same day can be played back in succession.

1Touch the date select icon. (l24)

2Touch the playback date.

The scenes or the still pictures recorded on the date selected are displayed as thumbnails.

3Touch the scene or the still picture to be played back.

≥If you press the recording/playback button to switch between Recording Mode and Playback

Mode, the [VIEW ALL] screen will be displayed again.

≥In cases such as those described below, scenes and still pictures are grouped separately on the

date list, and –1, –2… may be added after the date:

jWhen the number of scenes exceeds 99

jWhen the number of still pictures exceeds 999

jWhen [REC MODE] in [AVCHD] is changed

jWhen the microphone input sound (5.1ch/2ch) is changed

jWhen recorded in Creative Control Mode.

jWhen the [ON]/[OFF] setting of Backup for Twin Camera is switched (l57)

jWhen recorded in Home Monitor function. (l166)

jScenes recorded as 4K Cropping (l108)

jWhen saved in Manual Edit (l121)

jWhen [NUMBER RESET] is performed

Advanced (Playback)

Various playback functions

ADate select icon

ALL



- 108 -

≥The following scenes and still pictures are grouped separately on the date list, and icons are

displayed according to the category:

4K Cropping

You can add various effects to 4K MP4 scenes and save them as 1080/30p scenes.

≥Touch the play mode select icon on the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and select

[4K MP4]. (l33)

1Touch . (l24)

2Touch the function you want to apply.

Scene or still picture Icon to be displayed

Scenes recorded with [1080/60p] in [AVCHD]

Scenes recorded with [1080/50M]/[1080/28M] in [MP4/iFrame]

Scenes saved in MP4 (1920k1080/30p) (l134)

Scenes recorded with [720] in [MP4/iFrame]

Scenes saved in MP4 (1280k720/30p) (l134)

Scenes recorded with [iFrame] in [MP4/iFrame]

Still pictures recorded in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode (l72)

Still pictures created from motion pictures (l104)

Still pictures saved in Tagging Favorite Scene (l124)

Scenes saved in Highlight Playback (l117)

Scenes saved in MP4 (640k360/30p) (l134)

- 109 -

≥Touch [ENTER].

3Set the selected function and start a preview. (l109, 111)

4Perform playback operations. (l34)

≥When the preview ends or the playback is stopped, a screen will be displayed, asking you to

select [REPLAY]*1, [SAVE] (l111), [SELECT AGAIN]*2 or [EXIT]. Touch the desired item.

*1 It cannot be selected when [Tracking Crop] is selected.

*2 It cannot be selected when [Stabilizing Crop] is selected.

≥You cannot perform fast forward playback, fast rewind playback, skip playback, Slow-motion

Payback, Frame-by-frame Playback, and direct playback during preview.

≥Scenes recorded with other devices and scenes edited with HD Writer AE 5.3 may not work

correctly.

1Touch the scene to which you want to apply the function.

≥Touch [OK].

2Perform playback operations to set a preview start point.

≥Set a start point so that the length between the start point and end point will be at least

3 second long (approx.).

≥You will find it convenient to use slow playback and Frame-by-frame Playback. (l103)

≥Pause the scene at the desired start point.

3Adjust the size and position of the cropping

frame for the start point.

≥Touching will change the cropping frame's size

and color. (White # Yellow)

The size will change in the following order each time

you touch the icon:

Large # Medium # Small

≥You can change the position of the medium- or small-

sized cropping frame by touching the screen.

≥If you leave the screen untouched, the cropping

frame's size and position will be set automatically.

Function Effect

[Zooming Crop]

Allows you to save a cropped image that changes its

position and size in high-definition picture quality after

setting the cropping positions and sizes for start and

end points.

[Tracking Crop]

Allows you to save a cropped image that tracks the

subject specified with touch operation in high-definition

picture quality.

[Stabilizing Crop]

Allows you to save a cropped image to which a

correction effect that stabilizes the blur on the subject

caused by hand-shake during recording is applied in

high-definition picture quality.

≥A cropped image that starts from the beginning of the

original scenes will be saved.

Applying [Zooming Crop]

Cropping frame

- 110 -

4Touch .

5Touch the desired zoom speed.

≥The scene will be skipped to the end point.

Depending on the set zoom speed, the end point will

vary.

≥Touch [OK].

6Adjust the size and position of the cropping

frame for the end point.

≥The cropping frame for the end point will be displayed in the same position as the cropping

frame for the start point.

≥The cropping frame for the start point is indicated in gray, while the cropping frame for the

end point is indicated in white.

≥To reset the cropping frame for the start point, touch .

≥Perform the same operations as Step 3 to change the size and position of the cropping

frame.

7Touch .

≥A preview will start.

≥You cannot apply this function to scenes shorter than 3 seconds (approx.).

1Touch the scene to which you want to apply the function.

≥Touch [OK].

2Perform playback operations to set a preview start point.

≥You will find it convenient to use slow playback and Frame-by-frame Playback. (l103)

3Touch the subject to lock the target.

ATarget frame

BCropping frame

≥The cropping frame B will be displayed in a size that

matches the subject.

≥To touch another subject, touch .

4Touch .

≥A preview will start.

5Touch to end the preview.

≥A confirmation message appears.

Touch [EXIT] to end the preview.

∫Notes on the target frame

≥If the target frame fails to lock the target, it will flash red and then disappear.

Touch a distinct portion of the subject (color, etc.), or reset the preview start point and then lock

the target again.

≥When a preview is played back until the end of the scene or the playback time of a preview

exceeds 20 minutes (approx.), the preview will end automatically.

If you save the image, the previewed portion (from the start point to the end point) will be saved.

[Fast]/[Slow]

Applying [Tracking Crop]

0h00m15s0h00m15s0h00m15s

- 111 -

≥Depending on the portion you touch, you may not be able to track or lock another subject in

situations such as the following:

jWhen another subject is too large or small

jWhen the background and another subject are similar in color

jWhen you have touched a dark portion

1Touch the scene to which you want to apply the function.

≥Touch [OK].

2Touch .

≥A preview will start from the beginning of the scene.

≥When a preview is played back for 1 hour (approx.), it automatically ends. If you save the image,

the entire scene from the beginning to the end will be saved. If the playback time of the scene

exceeds 1 hour, the first 1 hour (approx.) of the scene will be saved.

You can save a previewed scene as one scene.

The recorded scenes can be saved in the SD card.

1End a preview.

2Touch [SAVE].

3Touch [YES].

4Touch [EXIT].

≥Scenes will be saved in different ways depending on their 4K Cropping setting.

j[Zooming Crop]: A portion from the start point to the end point is saved.

j[Tracking Crop]: Only the previewed portion is saved.

j[Stabilizing Crop]: The entire scene from the beginning to the end or the first 1 hour (approx.) of

the scene will be saved.

(When saving a scene to which [Stabilizing Crop] is applied)

≥It may take time to save a long scene.

≥A scene exceeding 4 GB (approx.) or 30 minutes (approx.) will be automatically divided.

Applying [Stabilizing Crop]

Saving previews

- 112 -

Highlight Playback

Part that was recognized as clearly recorded is extracted from multiple scenes, and it can be played

back or stored in a short time with effects and music added.

It is also possible to create an original Highlight Playback by checking your favorite scenes and

setting up to extract those scenes.

1Touch . (l24)

2(When [ALL MP4/iFrame] is selected)

Touch the recording format of the scene to be

played back.

3Touch the desired effect.

≥The scenes matching the effect will be extracted and displayed in the thumbnail view.

≥Effects such as fade, slow-motion, still (pause), or digest playback are inserted.

≥The date at playback is the date that was last recorded in an extracted scene.

≥To change the settings, refer to page 114.

4Touch in the thumbnail view.

5Select the playback operation. (l34)

≥When the playback is finished or stopped, the screen to select [REPLAY], [SAVE] (l117),

[SELECT AGAIN] or [EXIT] is displayed. Touch the desired item.

≥Highlight Playback is not available for the following scenes :

siFrame scenes

s24p scenes

sScenes recorded with Creative Control Mode (l62), HDR Movie Mode (l50, 65) and

FULL HD Slow Motion Video (l68, 71)

sScenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera

sScenes recorded as 4K Cropping (l108)

sScenes saved as Highlight Playback

sScenes saved as manually-edited scenes (l118)

[1080/60p]/[1080/30p]/[720/30p]/[360/30p]

[POP]: Recommended for party scene.

[NATURAL]: Recommended for scenery.

[CLASSICAL]: Recommended for slow moving scene.

[DYNAMIC]: Recommended for fast moving scene such as sports scene.

[CUSTOM]: Set the combination of the effect and the music. (l113)

ALL

- 113 -

sScenes that were converted to MP4 scenes and copied (with the MP4 conversion

function) (l134)*

s(For the )

Scenes recorded with Slow & Quick Video Mode (l67) and Dolly Zoom Mode (l70)

* Excluding scenes that were converted from 4K MP4 scenes

≥Skip Playback, Slow-motion Playback, Frame-by-frame Playback and Direct Playback are not

possible.

∫Setting up the custom effect

It is possible to enjoy the Highlight Playback with your favorite effect by setting up the combination

of an image effect and music.

1Touch [CUSTOM].

2Touch [EFFECT SETUP] or [MUSIC SELECT].

3(When [EFFECT SETUP] is selected)

Touch the desired effect.

≥When [EFFECT SETUP] is changed, [MUSIC SELECT] will be set

the same as [EFFECT SETUP]. (To set [EFFECT SETUP] and

[MUSIC SELECT] to different settings, change [MUSIC SELECT]

after setting [EFFECT SETUP].)

(When [MUSIC SELECT] is selected)

Touch the desired sound.

≥[USER BGM] lets you use the music stored on your smartphone. To set [USER BGM], use the

Wi-Fi function [Link to Cell] and create Highlight Playback from the smartphone app “Image App”.

The music data will be saved in this unit as [USER BGM].

≥Only one track can be saved in this unit as music data for [USER BGM]. Each time you create

Highlight Playback using the “Image App”, music data will be replaced.

≥For information on the file format and playback time of music data that can be used as [USER

BGM], refer to the “Image App”.

≥To delete the music data saved as [USER BGM] in this unit, perform [DELETE USER BGM].

(l44)

≥When [EFFECT SETUP] is set to [NONE], you will be able to select [NO MUSIC]. When [NO

MUSIC] is selected, the audio recorded at the time of shooting is played back.

(To test the music audio)

Touch [START].

≥Touch the other music option to change the music to be tested.

≥When you touch [STOP], the music playback stops.

4Touch [ENTER].

WXF991

- 114 -

Touch [SET] to select the item to change.

*1 If you touch [SET] of Highlight Playback when the Baby Calendar is displayed, [SELECT DATE]

and [SELECT SCENES] will not be available. (l122)

*2 If you touch [SET] of Highlight Playback when the Baby Calendar is displayed, these items will

not be displayed. (l122)

≥When you have finished changing the settings, touch [EXIT].

∫Scene setting

1(Only when Highlight Playback is started from [ALL AVCHD])

Touch the recording format of the scene to be played back.

2Touch [SELECT DATE] or [SELECT SCENES].

3(When [SELECT DATE] is selected)

Touch the date to be played back.

≥A maximum of 7 days can be selected.

≥When touched, the date is selected and surrounded by red. Touch the date again to cancel the

operation.

(When [SELECT SCENES] is selected)

Touch the scenes to be played back.

≥Up to 99 scenes can be selected in succession.

≥When touched, the scene is selected and is displayed. Touch the scene again to cancel the

operation.

4Touch [Enter]/[ENTER].

Playing back with the settings changed

[SCENE SETUP]*1:

Select the scene or date to be played back.

[FAVORITE SCENE SETUP]*2:

Set up the favorite scenes. (l115)

[FAVORITE SCENE PLAY]*2:

Set up if the favorite scenes are to be included in the Highlight

Playback or not. (l115)

[PRIORITY SETUP]:

Select the target to give priority to play back. (l115)

[PLAYBACK TIME]:

Select the time to play back. (l116)

[TITLE SETUP]:

Select the title sheet to be displayed at the beginning, and enter

the title. (l116)

[1080/60p]/[1080/60i]

- 115 -

∫Checking the favorite scenes

1Touch the scenes to be played back.

2Touch [Add] and add the favorite part.

≥Approximately 4 seconds before and after touching [Add] will be

added as favorite.

≥Number of favorite scenes that can be added are 1 to 14. (Number

of scenes that can be added differs depending on the scenes

selected.)

≥Favorite check display (A) is displayed in orange, and favorite

check display B is displayed on the slide bar.

≥To cancel the favorite, play back to the position checked as favorite,

and touch [Cancel].

≥It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame

Playback. (l103)

3Touch and stop the playback.

≥It will return to the thumbnail display screen and ¡ is displayed on

the scenes added as favorite scenes.

4Touch [Return].

≥All the scenes checked as favorite may not be played back depending on the playback time

setting. (l116)

≥Parts added as favorite scenes are not recognized as registered scenes for “Tagging Favorite

Scene” (l124).

To clear the favorite scenes from the thumbnail display

1Touch [Reset].

2Touch [RESET ALL] or [RESET SELECTED].

≥The check on all the favorite scenes will be cleared when [RESET

ALL] is selected.

3(When [RESET SELECTED] is selected in Step 2)

Touch the scene to be cleared.

∫Playing back the favorite scenes

Touch [ON] or [OFF].

∫Priority settings

Touch [NONE] or [FACE].

≥If you touch [FACE], priority is given to the part detected as a face.

[ON]: Include the scenes added in the [FAVORITE SCENE SETUP] into the Highlight

Playback.

[OFF]: Do not include the scenes added in the [FAVORITE SCENE SETUP] into the

Highlight Playback.

0h01m30s





0h01m30s0h01m30s0h01m30s

- 116 -

∫Playback time setting

Touch the playback time.

≥The playback time of [AUTO] is a maximum of approx. 5 minutes.

≥Playback time may become shorter than the setting, or it may not even be played back if the part

recognized as clearly recorded is short.

∫Setting up the title

1Touch / to select your favorite title sheet.

≥Title and date will not be displayed when [NONE] is selected.

2Touch [TITLE].

3Enter the title.

≥Touch the text entry icon in the center of the screen and enter the

title.

≥After entering the title, touch [Enter].

Entering text

≥The characters can be conveniently input without moving the cursor when the [Auto Cursor

Position] is set to [ON]. (l44)

≥A maximum of 18 characters can be entered.

4Touch [ENTER] to end registration.

≥The date of the first scene of the Highlight Playback will be displayed as the date.

≥The entered title will be cleared when the unit is turned off or the Highlight Playback is finished.

[APPROX 90 SEC.]/[APPROX 3 MIN.]/[AUTO]

[NONE]/[PICTURE 1]/[PICTURE 2]/[PICTURE 3]/[PICTURE 4]



AText entry icon

Icon Description of operation

[A] etc. Enters a character.

/ Moves the cursor to left or right.

[A/a/1] Switches between [A]/[a] (alphabet) and [&/1] (symbols/numbers).

Enters a space.

[Delete] Deletes a character.

Deletes the previous character if the cursor is in an empty space.

[Enter] Ends text entry.

- 117 -

The scenes put together as a Highlight Playback can be saved as a single scene.

The recorded scenes can be saved in the SD card.

1Stop the playback of the Highlight Playback or wait until the Highlight

Playback is finished.

2Touch [SAVE].

3Select the format to save.

*1 This format is displayed only when an AVCHD scene is selected.

*2 This format is not displayed when an AVCHD scene is selected.

*3 [MP4 1920k1080/30p] cannot be selected when an MP4 [720/30p] scene is selected.

*4 [MP4 1920k1080/30p] and [MP4 1280k720/30p] cannot be selected when an MP4 [360/30p]

scene is selected.

(When [AVCHD 1920k1080/60i] is selected)

≥Scenes recorded in 1080/60p are converted to 1080/60i (picture quality [HA] of [REC MODE])

and saved.

≥Scenes recorded in 1080/60i are recorded in [HA] regardless of [REC MODE] ([PH]/[HA]/[HG]/

[HE]) of a scene.

4Touch [YES].

5Touch [EXIT].

≥ is displayed on the thumbnail of the scenes saved by the Highlight Playback.

Saving the Highlight Playback

[AVCHD 1920k1080/60i]*1:It will be saved in high-definition image quality.

[MP4 1920k1080/30p]*2, 3, 4:It will be saved in high-definition image quality. The format

supports playback on a PC.

[MP4 1280k720/30p]*4:It will be saved with an image quality, allowing you to upload it

on the Internet in higher image quality. The format supports

playback on a PC.

[MP4 640k360/30p]: It will be saved with an image quality, allowing you to upload it

on the Internet faster. The format supports playback on a PC.

- 118 -

Manual Edit

You can join desired AVCHD scenes, scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera or parts of these

scenes in the order they were recorded to play back or save as a single scene with music added.

≥Touch the play mode select icon on the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and select

scenes recorded as [AVCHD] or Backup for Twin Camera. (l33)

1Select the menu.

2Touch [1080/60p] or [1080/60i].

≥Touch [Enter].

≥Thumbnails are displayed by each scene.

3Select the scene or part of the scene to play back, and set the music.

≥To select a scene (l119)

≥To select part of a scene (l119)

≥To set the music (l120)

≥Touching [Return] after selecting a scene may cancel the selected scene.

4Touch [Enter].

5Touch [YES], and select the playback operation for the edited scene. (l34)

≥In the following cases, the screen for selecting [PREVIEW], [SAVE] (l121), [SELECT AGAIN],

and [EXIT] is displayed. Touch the desired item.

jTouch [NO]

jPlayback finishes

jStop playback

≥You can also select combinations of scenes and parts of scenes.

≥You can select up to 99 scenes. (Each 3 second thumbnail of part of a scene is treated as a

single scene.)

≥You can create a combined scene of up to about 6 hours long.

≥Skip Playback, Slow-motion Playback, Frame-by-frame Playback and Direct Playback are not

possible.

: [EDIT SCENE] # [MANUAL EDIT]

- 119 -

≥When saving a manually edited scene, check the free space on the SD card.

Before selecting the scene, check the table below and create sufficient free space for saving it.

(Approximate free space requirements for saving a manually edited scene)

≥“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “min” for minute and “s” for second.

∫To select a scene

Touch the scene to be played back.

≥The scene selection is made as you touch it, and the indication appears on the thumbnail. To

cancel the operation, touch the scene again.

≥When part of a scene has been selected, the indication appears on the thumbnail. If you

touch the thumbnail, the scene will be displayed by 3 second thumbnails.

≥Next (previous) page is displayed by touching / .

∫To select part of a scene

1Touch [3 sec].

≥To cancel the operation, touch it again.

2Touch the desired scene.

≥The touched scene is displayed by 3 second thumbnails.

3(To select a single thumbnail)

Touch the thumbnail of the part you want to play back.

≥The thumbnail selection is made as you touch it, and the indication (white) appears on the

thumbnail. To cancel the selection, touch the thumbnail again.

≥Next (previous) thumbnail is displayed by touching / .

≥Touching [Return] when the thumbnail has been selected returns you to the screen that displays

the thumbnails of scenes. The indication appears on the thumbnail of the scene

containing the selected part.

Saving format Total time of an edited

scene Free space required

[AVCHD 1920k1080/60i] 30 min Approx. 4 GB

1 h Approx. 8 GB

[MP4 1280k720/30p] 30 min Approx. 2 GB

1 h Approx. 4 GB

[MP4 640k360/30p] 30 min Approx. 0.4 GB

1 h Approx. 0.8 GB

- 120 -

4(To select thumbnails by specifying a range)

Touch [Range].

≥To cancel the operation, touch it again.

5(To select thumbnails by specifying a range)

Touch the range (start and finish points) you want to

play back.

≥The range between start and finish points are selected, and the

indication (white) appears on the thumbnails.

≥To cancel the selected thumbnails, from among the thumbnails with

the indication (white), touch the range (start and finish points)

you want to cancel.

≥If you touch [Enter]/[Return]/[Music]/[Range] when a start point has

been selected, the start point thumbnail will be canceled.

≥Touching [Return] when the thumbnail has been selected returns

you to the screen that displays the thumbnails of scenes. The

indication appears on the thumbnail of the scene containing the selected part.

≥You can also select multiple ranges within the same scene.

≥Next (previous) thumbnail is displayed by touching / .

≥To select other scenes, touch [Return] to return to the screen that displays the thumbnails of

scenes, and perform the following operations.

jWhen selecting a scene:

Touch the desired scene.

jWhen selecting part of a scene:

Perform the operations in Steps 1-5.

∫To set the music

1Touch [Music].

2Touch the desired sound.

≥When [NO MUSIC] is selected, the audio recorded at the time of shooting is played back.

≥[USER BGM] lets you use the music stored on your smartphone. To set [USER BGM], use the

Wi-Fi function [Link to Cell] and create Highlight Playback from the smartphone app “Image App”.

The music data will be saved in this unit as [USER BGM].

≥Only one track can be saved in this unit as music data for [USER BGM]. Each time you create

Highlight Playback using the “Image App”, music data will be replaced.

≥For information on the file format and playback time of music data that can be used as [USER

BGM], refer to the “Image App”.

≥To delete the music data saved as [USER BGM] in this unit, perform [DELETE USER BGM].

(l44)

(To test the music audio)

Touch [START].

≥Touch the other music option to change the music to be tested.

≥When you touch [STOP], the music playback stops.

3Touch [ENTER].



AStart point

BFinish point

- 121 -

∫To save a manually-edited scene

You can save manually edited scenes as a single scene.

The recorded scenes can be saved in the SD card.

1Stop the playback of a manually-edited scene or wait until the playback is

finished.

2Touch [SAVE].

3Select the format to save.

(When [AVCHD 1920k1080/60i] is selected)

≥Scenes recorded in 1080/60p are converted to 1080/60i (picture quality [HA] of [REC MODE])

and saved.

≥Scenes recorded in 1080/60i are recorded in [HA] regardless of [REC MODE] ([PH]/[HA]/[HG]/

[HE]) of a scene.

4Touch [YES].

≥If you are using the battery, a message recommending that you use the AC adaptor will be

displayed. To start the saving operation, touch [START].

5Touch [EXIT].

≥You can save scenes even when using the battery, but we recommend that you use the AC

adaptor.

≥Manually-edited scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera will be saved as normal AVCHD or

MP4 scenes.

≥For information on the approximate free space requirements for saving a manually edited scene,

refer to page 119.

[AVCHD 1920k1080/60i]: It will be saved in high-definition image quality.

[MP4 1280k720/30p]: It will be saved with an image quality, allowing you to upload it on

the Internet in higher image quality. The format supports playback

on a PC.

[MP4 640k360/30p]: It will be saved with an image quality, allowing you to upload it on

the Internet faster. The format supports playback on a PC.

- 122 -

Baby Calendar

When a baby’s birthday and name are registered, scenes recorded since the baby’s birthday are

displayed as thumbnails for each age in months.

≥You cannot select scenes recorded as 24p or Backup for Twin Camera.

≥Scenes recorded before the birthday are not displayed.

≥Scenes with no baby in them are also displayed.

≥You can register up to 3 babies.

1Touch .

2(When registering for the first time)

Enter the baby’s birthday.

≥Touch the date to be set, then set the desired value using / .

≥The year can be set between 2000 and 2039.

≥Touch [Enter].

3(When registering for the first time)

Touch [YES], and enter the baby’s name.

≥If you touch [NO], the Baby Calendar will be displayed without the baby’s name registered.

([Baby 1] is displayed.)

≥Input method is same operation as for setting up the title. (l11 6)

≥After entering the name, touch [Enter].

≥A maximum of 9 characters can be entered.

4Check the Baby Calendar.

≥The name of the registered baby and its age in months are

displayed.

≥You can switch the age in months display by touching / .

≥Except for months with no recordings, the age in months display

is available for each month.

: Changes the age in months display to that of

the previous month

If you touch this icon when the youngest age in months is

displayed, the oldest age in months will be displayed.

: Changes the age in months display to that of

the next month

If you touch this icon when the oldest age in months is

displayed, the youngest age in months will be displayed.





AName display

BAge in months display

CThumbnail for the

previous age in

months

DThumbnail for the next

age in months

- 123 -

≥If you touch the name display, the screen for selecting a registered baby is displayed. From

among the 3 registered babies, select the baby you want to display, and touch [ENTER].

If you touch a name with no registered birthday ([Baby 1]/[Baby 2]/[Baby 3]), you can register a

new baby. Perform Step 2-3.

5Touch the thumbnail in the center.

≥The thumbnails of the scenes recorded in the same age in months are displayed. Touch the

desired scene to select the playback operation. (l34)

≥The thumbnail display cannot be set to 1 scene/20 scenes display or to the Highlight & Time

Frame Index.

≥You cannot perform Highlight Playback if the number of scenes exceeds 99.

≥Touching returns you to the screen that lets you select the age in months.

To return to the normal thumbnail display

Touch the while the Baby Calendar is displayed.

To change/add a baby’s registered details

1Touch the name display on the Baby Calendar (l122) or select the menu.

2Touch the name of the baby whose details are to be changed.

≥When [Baby 1]/[Baby 2]/[Baby 3] is displayed, the birthday and name or name only are not

registered.

3Touch the desired item.

≥The setting method is the same as when registering for the first time. (l122)

4Touch [ENTER].

≥The Baby Calendar of the registered baby is displayed.

To delete a baby’s registered details

1Touch the name display on the Baby Calendar (l122) or select the menu.

2Touch the name of the baby whose details are to be deleted.

3Touch [DELETE].

≥To delete the registered details of other babies, repeat Steps 2 to 3.

≥When the Baby Calendar is displayed, the following operations are not available:

j4K Cropping

jTagging Favorite Scene

j[SCENE PROTECT]

j[SECTION DELETE]

j[DIVIDE]

j[MANUAL EDIT]

j[SPLIT&DELETE]

j[CONVERT TO MP4]

j[Slow Speed Conversion]

: [VIDEO SETUP] # [Baby Calendar Setup]

Name: Register/change the name.

Birthday: Register/change the birthday.

: [VIDEO SETUP] # [Baby Calendar Setup]

- 124 -

Tagging Favorite Scene

You can extract portions of a 4K MP4 scene that were recognized by this unit as clearly recorded or

that you registered as favorite scenes while recording the 4K MP4 scene, and save the extracted

portions as still pictures.

≥For information on the registration of favorite scenes, refer to page 32.

≥Touch the play mode select icon on the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and select

[4K MP4]. (l33)

1Touch .

≥Touch [OK].

2Touch the desired scene.

≥Scenes to which favorite scenes are registered are displayed with the indication.

≥Protected scenes cannot be selected.

3Touch [SAVE ALL] or [SAVE SELECTED].

≥Touching [SAVE ALL] will save all the pictures to the same media as where the selected

scene is stored.

4(When you have touched [SAVE SELECTED] in Step 3)

Touch [OK], and select the pictures to be

saved.

≥Pictures registered as favorite scenes are displayed

with the indication.

≥Touch a thumbnail to select the picture. will be

displayed. To cancel the selected picture, touch the

thumbnail again.

5(When you have touched [SAVE SELECTED] in Step 3)

Touch [Enter].

≥The pictures will be saved to the same media as where the selected scene is stored.

≥This function is not available for playback using (USB HDD).

- 125 -

Changing the playback settings and playing back the

slide show

1Touch . (l24)

2(Only when you would like to change the settings)

Touch [SET] to select the item to change.

* Setting is not possible when the operation in Step 1 is performed while thumbnails in the Stop

Motion Animation Assist Mode are displayed. (l127)

3(When [DATE SETUP] is selected)

Touch the playback date.

(When [SLIDE INTERVAL] is selected)

Touch the interval of playback for the slide show.

(When [EFFECT SETUP] is selected)

Touch the desired effect.

≥Touch [ENTER].

≥When [EFFECT SETUP] is changed, [MUSIC SELECT] will be

set the same as [EFFECT SETUP]. (To set [EFFECT SETUP]

and [MUSIC SELECT] to different settings, change

[MUSIC SELECT] after setting [EFFECT SETUP].)

≥[SLIDE INTERVAL] cannot be set, when [EFFECT SETUP] is set.

ALL

[DATE SETUP]: Select the date to be played back.

[SLIDE INTERVAL]*:Select the interval between still pictures at playback.

[EFFECT SETUP]*:Select the effect for playback.

[MUSIC SELECT]: Select the music to be played on playback.

[SHORT]: Approx. 1 second

[NORMAL]: Approx. 5 seconds

[LONG]: Approx. 15 seconds

- 126 -

(When [MUSIC SELECT] is selected)

Touch the desired sound.

≥Touch [ENTER].

≥[USER BGM] lets you use the music stored on your smartphone. To set [USER BGM], use the

Wi-Fi function [Link to Cell] and create Highlight Playback from the smartphone app “Image App”.

The music data will be saved in this unit as [USER BGM].

≥Only one track can be saved in this unit as music data for [USER BGM]. Each time you create

Highlight Playback using the “Image App”, music data will be replaced.

≥For information on the file format and playback time of music data that can be used as [USER

BGM], refer to the “Image App”.

≥To delete the music data saved as [USER BGM] in this unit, perform [DELETE USER BGM].

(l44)

(To test the music audio)

Touch [START] and start the audio testing.

≥Touch the other music option to change the music to be tested.

≥When you touch [STOP], the music playback stops.

4Touch [START].

5Select the playback operation. (l34)

≥When the playback is finished or stopped, the screen to select [REPLAY], [SELECT AGAIN] or

[EXIT] is displayed. Touch the desired item.

- 127 -

Playing back still pictures recorded in Stop Motion

Animation Assist Mode as a slide show

≥For details on recording in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode, refer to page 72.

1Touch .

≥The recording group created most recently in Stop Motion

Animation Assist Mode is displayed.

≥Touching again, returns the display to the normal

thumbnail display.

2Touch a thumbnail to play back the slide show.

≥The thumbnail display cannot be set to 9 scenes or 20 scenes

display.

3Select the playback operation. (l34)

≥The display returns to the thumbnail display when playback is

finished or stopped.

To play back other recording groups:

You can play back other recording groups by touching the date select icon.

1Touch the date select icon.

2Touch the playback date.

≥Touch a date with the indication.

≥Recording groups in the selected date are displayed.

≥Touch a thumbnail to play back the slide show.

≥Slide shows can be played back with settings changed. (l125)

≥The recording group played back as a slideshow cannot be saved as a single scene.

NEW



ADate select icon

- 128 -

¬Press the recording/playback button to switch this unit to the Playback Mode.

∫To delete the scene or still picture being played back

Touch while scenes or still pictures to be deleted

are being played back.

∫To delete scenes or still pictures from the thumbnail display

≥Switch to the thumbnail display of the scenes or still pictures to delete. (l33)

1Touch . (l24)

≥When the thumbnail display is 1 scene display or Highlight &

Time Frame Index, the scene or still picture being displayed is

deleted.

≥When the thumbnails of still pictures recorded in Stop Motion

Animation Assist Mode are displayed, the still pictures cannot

be deleted. (l127)

2Touch [ALL SCENES], [MULTI] or [SINGLE].

≥All the scenes or still pictures displayed as thumbnails will be

deleted by selecting [ALL SCENES].

(In case of playing back scenes or still pictures by date, all the

scenes or still pictures on the selected date will be deleted.)

≥Protected scenes/still pictures cannot be deleted.

3(When [MULTI] is selected in Step 2)

Touch the scene/still picture to be deleted.

≥When touched, the scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the thumbnail.

Touch the scene/still picture again to cancel the operation.

≥Up to 99 scenes can be selected to be deleted.

(When [SINGLE] is selected in Step 2)

Touch the scene/still picture to be deleted.

4(When [MULTI] is selected in Step 2)

Touch [Delete].

≥To continuously delete other scenes/still pictures, repeat Steps 3-4.

Advanced (Playback)

Deleting scenes/still pictures

Deleted scenes/still pictures cannot be restored, so perform appropriate confirmation of

the contents before proceeding with deletion.

0h01m30s0h01m30s0h01m30s

- 129 -

When you stop deleting halfway:

Touch [CANCEL] while deleting.

≥The scenes or still pictures that have already been deleted when the deletion is canceled cannot

be restored.

To complete editing:

Touch [Return].

≥You can also delete scenes by touching , selecting [EDIT SCENE] # [DELETE] # [ALL

SCENES], [MULTI] or [SINGLE].

≥You can also delete still pictures by touching , selecting [PICT. SET UP] # [DELETE] # [ALL

SCENES], [MULTI] or [SINGLE].

When the thumbnails of still pictures recorded in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode are

displayed, the still pictures cannot be deleted from the menu. (l127)

≥Deletion is not possible in the following situations:

jDuring 4K Cropping preview

jDuring Highlight Playback

≥Scenes that cannot be played back (the thumbnails are displayed as ) cannot be deleted.

≥In case of [ALL SCENES], the deletion may take time if there are many scenes or still pictures.

≥If you delete scenes recorded on other products or still pictures conforming to DCF standard with

this unit, all the data related to the scenes/still pictures may be deleted.

≥When still pictures recorded on an SD card by other products are deleted, a still picture (other

than JPEG) that cannot be played back on this unit, may be erased.

- 130 -

Deleting part of a scene (AVCHD/Backup for Twin

Camera)

Unnecessary part of an AVCHD scene or a scene recorded as Backup for Twin Camera can be

deleted.

The deleted scenes cannot be restored.

≥Touch the play mode select icon on the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and select

scenes recorded as [AVCHD] or Backup for Twin Camera. (l33)

1Select the menu.

2Touch the scene with a part to delete.

3Set the section to delete by touching and sliding

the top and bottom section selection buttons .

≥It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-

frame Playback. (l103)

4Touch [ENTER].

5Confirm (play back) the scene after editing by touching [YES].

≥A confirmation message appears when [NO] is touched. Proceed to Step 7.

6Stop the playback.

≥A confirmation message appears.

7Touch [ENTER].

≥Repeat Steps 2-7 to continuously delete parts from other scenes.

To complete editing

Touch [Return].

≥Deleting a part of a scene cannot be performed when there are 99 scenes in a single date.

≥It may not be possible to delete part of a scene with a short recording time.

≥The scene will be divided into two scenes when the middle part of a scene is deleted.

: [EDIT SCENE] # [SECTION DELETE]

0h00m15s

- 131 -

Dividing a scene (AVCHD/Backup for Twin Camera)

It is possible to divide an AVCHD scene or a scene recorded as Backup for Twin Camera.

Any unwanted parts in the scene can be deleted after dividing.

≥Touch the play mode select icon on the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and select

scenes recorded as [AVCHD] or Backup for Twin Camera. (l33)

1Select the menu.

2Touch and play back the scene you want to divide.

≥It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback. (l103)

3Touch to set the dividing point.

≥Touch [YES].

≥Touch [YES] to continue dividing the same scene. To continue

dividing other scenes, touch [NO] and repeat Steps 2-3.

4Touch [Return] to complete dividing.

≥Unwanted parts can be deleted. (l128)

To delete all the divided points

≥The scenes that were deleted after division cannot be recovered.

≥You cannot divide a scene if the number of scenes of a given date would exceed 99 scenes.

≥It may not be possible to divide scenes with a short recording time.

≥Data that has been recorded or edited on another device cannot be divided and the divided points

cannot be deleted.

: [EDIT SCENE] # [DIVIDE] # [SET]

: [EDIT SCENE] # [DIVIDE] # [CANCEL ALL]

0h01m30s0h01m30s0h01m30s

- 132 -

Dividing a scene to partially delete (4K MP4, MP4/

iFrame)

Divide the 4K MP4 scenes or MP4/iFrame scenes, and delete unnecessary parts.

This divides the recorded scenes in two and deletes the front half or back half.

The scenes deleted by dividing cannot be restored.

≥Touch the play mode select icon on the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and select

scenes recorded as [4K MP4] or [MP4/iFrame]. (l33)

1Select the menu.

2Touch and play back the scene you want to divide.

≥It is convenient to use Slow-motion Playback and Frame-by-frame Playback. (l103)

3Touch to set the dividing point.

≥Set the dividing point so there will be 2 seconds or more for the

part for deletion, and 3 seconds or more for the part to be kept.

4Touch the part for deletion ([FRONT] or [BACK]).

5Touch [YES] and confirm (play back) the part for

deletion.

≥A confirmation message appears when [NO] is touched. Proceed to Step 7.

6Stop the playback.

≥A confirmation message appears.

7Touch [YES].

≥To continue dividing and deleting other scenes, repeat Steps 2-7.

To complete editing

Touch [Return].

≥[SPLIT&DELETE] is not available for 24p scenes.

≥It may not be possible to divide scenes with a short recording time.

≥The actual division may slightly slip off the previously designated dividing point.

: [EDIT SCENE] # [SPLIT&DELETE]

0h01m30s

- 133 -

Protecting scenes/still pictures

Scenes/still pictures can be protected so that they are not deleted by mistake.

(Even if you protect some scenes/still pictures, formatting the media will delete them.)

≥Press the recording/playback button to switch this unit to the Playback Mode.

1Select the menu.

* [TRANSFER/PROTECT] is displayed when using the Eye-Fi card that is set as the selected

transfer setting device in advance on the computer.

2Touch the scene/still picture to be protected.

≥When touched, the scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the

thumbnail. Touch the scene/still picture again to cancel the operation.

≥Touch [Return] to complete the settings.

≥When the thumbnails of still pictures recorded in Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode are

displayed, protection cannot be set on the still pictures.

: [VIDEO SETUP] or [PICT. SETUP] # [SCENE PROTECT]*

- 134 -

You can convert and copy AVCHD scenes, scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera, and MP4

scenes. The image quality will be converted into a format that supports playback on a PC and online

sharing (MP4 (1280k720/30p) or MP4 (640k360/30p)).

≥4K MP4 scenes can also be converted to high-definition picture quality (MP4 (1920k1080/30p))

scenes and copied.

1Select the menu.

2Touch the scene you want to convert.

≥The scene selection is made as you touch it, and the indication appears on the thumbnail. To

cancel the operation, touch the scene again.

≥You can select up to 99 scenes in succession.

3Touch [Enter].

4Select the quality after conversion.

≥MP4 scenes after conversion are saved to the same media as the scenes before conversion.

5Touch [YES].

≥To continue converting scenes to MP4, repeat Steps 2 to 5.

Advanced (Playback)

Convert to MP4

: [EDIT SCENE] # [CONVERT TO MP4]

[FHD(1920k1080/30p)]*1:Convert to MP4 (1920k1080/30p) and copy.

[HD(1280k720/30p)]*2:Convert to MP4 (1280k720/30p) and copy.

[VGA(640k360/30p)]: Convert to MP4 (640k360/30p) and copy.

*1 This quality is displayed only when a 4K MP4 scene is selected.

*2 You cannot convert and copy MP4 [720/30p] scenes.

- 135 -

To stop converting to MP4 halfway

Touch [CANCEL] during format conversion.

To exit the MP4 conversion

Touch [Return].

≥[CONVERT TO MP4] is not available for the following scenes:

jiFrame scenes

j24p scenes

jScenes saved in MP4 (640k360/30p)

≥A scene recorded over a long time may take time.

≥When the following scenes are converted to MP4 scenes and copied, those exceeding

4 GB (approx.) or 30 minutes (approx.) will be automatically divided.

jScenes recorded with [1080/50M] of [MP4/iFrame]

j4K MP4 scenes

jAVCHD scenes

jScenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera

≥If you convert protected scenes to MP4, their protection will be cleared after the conversion.

≥Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera will be saved as normal MP4 scenes when

converted to MP4 scenes and copied.

- 136 -

You can convert the playback speed of parts recorded in FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode (

68, 71)

to 1/4 normal speed, and copy them.

Once converting scenes recorded in FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode, you can play them back on

another device at 1/4 normal speed.

≥Touch the play mode select icon on the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, and select

[ALL MP4/iFrame] or [1080/60p] in [MP4/iFrame]. (l33)

1Select the menu.

2Touch a scene recorded in FULL HD Slow Motion Video.

≥On the thumbnail screen in Playback Mode, scenes recorded as FULL HD Slow Motion Video are

displayed with the indication.

≥The scene selection is made as you touch it, and the indication appears on the thumbnail. To

cancel the operation, touch the scene again.

≥Up to 99 scenes can be selected in succession.

3Touch [Enter].

≥The converted scene will be saved in the same medium as the one storing the original scene.

≥A message asking whether to delete the original scene will be displayed. To delete the scene,

select [YES]. To keep it, select [NO].

To cancel the slow speed conversion or the deletion of the original scene

midway

During the conversion or deletion, touch [CANCEL].

To exit the slow speed conversion

Touch [Return].

≥When a converted scene is recorded in a medium, the scene becomes larger in size than the

original one. The converted scene may be divided depending on its size.

≥It may take a while to convert a long scene.

≥If you perform [Slow Speed Conversion] on protected scenes, their protection will be cleared after

the conversion.

Advanced (Playback)

Slow speed conversion

: [EDIT SCENE] # [Slow Speed Conversion]

- 137 -

≥Use the HDMI micro cable (supplied).

≥HDMI is the interface for digital devices. If you connect this unit to an HDMI compatible high-

definition TV and then play back the recorded high-definition images, you can enjoy them in high

resolution with high quality sound.

≥You can enjoy finely-detailed 4K motion pictures by connecting this unit to a TV that supports 4K

motion pictures and playing back 4K MP4 scenes or scenes recorded in the recording mode

[2160/24p].

Although the output resolution will be lower, you can also play them back by connecting this unit

to a high-definition TV or other device that does not support 4K motion pictures.

1Connect this unit to a TV.

≥Check that the plugs are inserted as far as they go.

≥Do not use any other HDMI micro cable except the supplied one.

Advanced (Playback)

Watching Video/Pictures on your TV

Confirm the terminals on your TV and use a cable compatible with the terminals. Image

quality may vary with the connected terminals.

AHigh quality

1HDMI terminal

2Video terminal

AHDMI micro cable (supplied)

≥Be sure to connect to the HDMI

terminal. (Insert the connector

with the arrow side facing

down.)

≥Connecting with an HDMI

micro cable (l139)

≥Listening in 5.1 channel sound

(AVCHD) (l140)

≥Playback using VIERA Link

(l140)

BComposite video cable

(commercially-available)

Picture quality

1To play back images

recorded in 4K or high-

definition picture quality,

connect this unit to the HDMI

terminal of the TV.

2Standard images when

connecting to video terminal

A/V

- 138 -

2Select the video input on the TV.

≥Example:

Select the [HDMI] channel with an HDMI micro cable.

Select the [Video 2] channel with a Composite video cable.

(The name of the channel may differ depending on the connected TV.)

≥Check the input setting (input switch) and the audio input setting on the TV. (For more

information, please read the operating instructions for the TV.)

3Change the mode to to play back.

≥When this unit and the TV are connected with the HDMI micro cable (supplied) or a Composite

video cable (commercially-available) in any of the following situations, no image will be displayed

on the TV. Use the LCD monitor of this unit.

jWhen recording a motion picture or using PRE-REC in HDR Movie Mode*1

jWhen [HDMI RESOLUTION] is set to [480p] in HDR Movie Mode

jFULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode

When recording a motion picture with [Backup for Twin Camera] set to [ON] or during PRE-REC

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [4K MP4], when recording a motion picture in 4K Photo Mode

or during PRE-REC

jWhen recording a motion picture with [REC FORMAT] set to [24p] or during PRE-REC

jWhen saving a scene previewed with 4K Cropping

jWhen saving the Highlight Playback scene or a manually edited scene

jWhen performing [CONVERT TO MP4]/performing [Slow Speed Conversion]

j(For the )

Slow & Quick Video Mode

≥If you connect this unit to the TV when this unit is set to Recording Mode, a squealing sound*2

may be output. Before connecting this unit, set it to Playback Mode.

≥When connected to the TV, sound in Playback Mode is not output from this unit. Also, since the

volume cannot be adjusted with this unit, adjust the volume of the TV.

≥Some screens, such as the menu screen, may be displayed in reduced sizes on the TV.

≥Image and audio is not output from this unit while using the Wi-Fi function.

*1 In addition, when the devices are connected with a Composite video cable (commercially-

available), no image is displayed while recording is paused.

*2 The microphone may pick up the sound from the speakers, producing an abnormal sound.

∫To watch images on a regular

TV (4:3) or when both sides of

the images do not appear on

the screen

Change the menu setting to display the images

correctly. (Check the TV setting.)

Example of images with a 16:9 aspect ratio

on a regular TV (4:3)

≥If a wide-screen TV is connected, adjust the

aspect setting on the TV. (Refer to the

operating instructions of the TV for details.)

WXF991

: [SETUP] # [TV ASPECT] # [4:3]

[TV ASPECT] setting

[16:9] [4:3]

- 139 -

∫To display the on-screen

information on the TV

When the menu setting is changed, the

information displayed on the screen (operation

icon and time code etc.) can be displayed/not

displayed on the TV.

*3 This setting is only available in Motion

Picture Recording Mode or Still Picture

Recording Mode.

Connecting with an HDMI micro cable

Select the desired method of HDMI output.

≥[AUTO] determines the output resolution automatically based on information from the connected

TV.

If the images are not output on the TV when the setting is [AUTO], switch to the method [2160p],

[1080p], [1080i] or [480p] which enables the images to be displayed on your TV. (Please read the

operating instructions for the TV.)

≥Images may not be displayed on the television for several seconds in some cases, such as when

changing between scenes.

≥Even if you select [2160p], images are output in 1080p in the following cases:

jWhen this unit is connected to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD] or [MP4/iFrame] in Recording Mode

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [1080/24p] in Recording Mode

jWhen a scene other than a [4K MP4] or [2160/24p] scene is played back in Playback Mode

jWhen you start a 4K Cropping preview in Playback Mode

jWhen this unit is set to Still Picture Recording Mode or when you play back a still picture

≥You can output 2160/24p scenes*1 in 24 frames per second by connecting this unit to a TV that

supports 4K motion picture and setting [HDMI RESOLUTION] to [AUTO] or [2160p].

In the following situations, the scenes cannot be output in 24 frames per second.

jWhen this unit is connected to a TV that does not support 4K motion picture

jWhen [HDMI RESOLUTION] is set to a setting other than [AUTO] or [2160p]

≥1080/24p scenes*2 cannot be output in 24 frames per second.

*1 In Recording Mode: When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [2160/24p]

In Playback Mode:

When

2160/24p

scenes are played back

*2 In Recording Mode: When [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p] and [REC MODE] is set to [1080/24p]

In Playback Mode:

When

1080/24p

scene are played back

: [SETUP] # [EXT. DISPLAY] #

desired setting

[SIMPLE]*3:Information partially

displayed

[DETAIL]: Detailed information

displayed

[OFF]: Not displayed

Refer to the following support site for information about Panasonic TVs with an SD card

slot for playing back your pictures.

http://panasonic.net/

≥It may not be possible to play back scenes on the TV depending on the [REC FORMAT] or

[REC MODE].

≥For details on how to play back, please read the operating instructions for the TV.

: [SETUP] # [HDMI RESOLUTION] # [AUTO]/[2160p]/[1080p]/[1080i]/[480p]

- 140 -

Listening in 5.1 channel sound (AVCHD)

You still can listen to the 5.1 channel sound recorded from the internal microphones when this

unit is connected to the 5.1 channel compatible AV amplifier or TV using the HDMI micro cable.

Please read the AV amplifier and TV operating instructions for how to connect this unit to the

AV amplifier and TV.

≥If you connect this unit to a Panasonic AV amplifier that are compatible with VIERA Link,

linked operations (VIERA Link) become possible. (l140)

≥Audio recorded when [5.1ch/2ch] is set to [2ch] or recorded from an external microphone is

in stereo (2 ch).

¬Press the recording/playback button to switch this unit to the Playback Mode.

1Select the menu.

≥If you are not using VIERA Link, set to [OFF].

2Connect this unit to a Panasonic TV compatible with VIERA Link with an

HDMI micro cable. (l137)

≥It is recommended to connect this unit to an HDMI terminal other than the HDMI1 if there are 2 or

more HDMI input terminals on the TV.

≥VIERA Link must be activated on the connected TV. (Read the operating instructions of the TV for

how to set etc.)

Advanced (Playback)

Playback using VIERA Link

What is the VIERA Link (HDAVI Control™)?

≥VIERA Link™ is a new name for EZ Sync™.

≥This function allows you to use your remote control for the Panasonic TV for easy operations

when this unit has been connected to a VIERA Link compatible device using an HDMI micro

cable (supplied) for automatic linked operations. (Not all operations are possible.)

≥VIERA Link is a unique Panasonic function built on an HDMI control function using the

standard HDMI CEC (Consumer Electronics Control) specification. Linked operations with

HDMI CEC compatible devices made by other companies are not guaranteed.

When using devices made by other companies that are compatible with VIERA Link, refer to

the operating instructions for the respective devices.

≥This unit supports “VIERA Link Ver.5” function. “VIERA Link Ver.5” is the standard for

Panasonic’s VIERA Link compatible equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s

conventional VIERA Link equipment.

: [SETUP] # [VIERA Link] # [ON]

- 141 -

3Operate with the remote control for the TV.

≥You can select the scene or picture you want to play back by pressing the button up, down, left or

right, and then the button in the center.

≥

The following operations are available by pressing the color buttons on the remote control.

∫Other linked operations

Turning the unit off:

If you use the remote control for the TV to turn off the power, this unit also turns off.

Automatic input switching:

If you connect with an HDMI micro cable and then turn on this unit, the input channel on the TV

automatically switches to this unit’s screen. If the TV’s power is in standby status, it will turn on

automatically (if [Set] has been selected for the TV’s [Power on link] setting).

≥Depending on the HDMI terminal on the TV, the input channel may not switch automatically. In

this case, use the remote control for the TV to switch the input channel.

≥If you are unsure whether or not the TV and AV amplifier you are using are compatible with

VIERA Link, read the operating instructions for the devices.

≥Available linked operations between this unit and a Panasonic TV is different depending on the

types of Panasonic TVs even if they are compatible with VIERA Link. Refer to the operating

instructions of the TV for the operations that support on the TV.

≥Operation is not possible with a cable that is not based on the HDMI standard.

(When selecting scenes) (When playing back)

ADisplay/Cancel operation icons

Green ≥Switching the number of scenes/still pictures in thumbnail display

(9 thumbnails > 20 thumbnails > 9 thumbnails...)

≥Zoom in on still picture

Yellow ≥Deleting scenes/still pictures

Red ≥Zoom out from still picture



- 142 -

≥In this Owner’s Manual, “USB hard disk drive” is indicated as “USB HDD”.

If you connect a USB HDD (commercially-available) to this unit by using a USB Connection Cable

(commercially-available), you can copy motion pictures and still pictures recorded on this unit to a USB HDD.

It can also play back the scenes and still pictures copied to the USB HDD.

≥You can copy scenes and still pictures recorded with this unit while maintaining the image quality.

≥Please read the operating instructions of the USB HDD for how to use it.

Preparing for copying/playing back

≥In the following cases, a USB HDD cannot be used by connecting it to this unit:

jA USB HDD with a capacity of below 160 GB or above 2 TB

jWhen a USB HDD has two or more partitions

jIf a USB HDD is in a format other than FAT32/exFAT*

jWhen connected by using a USB hub

* FAT32 is a format used for SDHC Memory Cards.

exFAT is a format used for SDXC Memory Cards.

≥Following scenes are not copied from an SD card to a USB HDD in FAT32 format.

j4K MP4 scenes

j24p scenes

jScenes recorded with [1080/50M] of [MP4/iFrame]

AUSB Connection Cable (commercially-available)

BUSB HDD (commercially-available)

CTurn the side with the symbol up to connect the micro A end of the USB Connection Cable to

the USB terminal of this unit.

≥Connect this unit to the AC adaptor

Copy/Dubbing

Copying/playing back with a USB HDD

Refer to the following support site for information about USB HDD.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam

(This Site is English only)

When the USB HDD that requires formatting is connected, a message is displayed. Follow the

instructions on the screen to format it.

Once the USB HDD has been formatted, all data stored on it will be deleted. The data cannot be recovered.

≥This unit formats the USB HDD in exFAT.*



- 143 -

1(When using a desktop HDD)

Connect the AC adaptor (supplied with USB HDD) to the USB HDD.

≥If you are using a bus-powered or portable USB HDD, this unit can supply power to the USB HDD

by USB Connection Cable (commercially-available).

2Connect the AC adaptor and a sufficiently charged battery to this unit.

≥If the AC adaptor is not connected to this unit, the USB HDD cannot be used.

3Turn on this unit, and press the recording/playback button to switch this unit

to the Playback Mode.

4Connect this unit to the USB HDD with the USB Connection Cable

(commercially-available).

≥Use a USB Connection Cable (commercially-available) compatible with the USB terminals of this

unit and the USB HDD. Connect the micro A end of the USB Connection Cable to the USB

terminal of this unit.

For information on the USB terminal of the USB HDD, refer to the operating instructions of the

USB HDD.

≥It may take several minutes until the connection is completed.

5Touch the desired item.

≥Following can be performed by connecting the USB HDD with the scenes and still pictures copied

from this unit to other devices.

jSave on a PC or rewrite on USB HDD using HD Writer AE 5.3

≥When using an Eye-Fi card (commercially-available), set [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] to [OFF]. (l152)

When the item is set to [ON], even if you connect the USB HDD to this unit, it will not recognize

the USB HDD.

[Simple copy]: Copies all scenes and still pictures recorded with this unit that

have not been copied yet. (l145)

[Copy selected files]: Allows you to select desired scenes/still pictures, and then

copy. (l145)

[Playback HDD]: Plays back scenes and still pictures stored in a USB HDD on

this unit. (l146)

[Safe Removal]: Allows you to safely remove this unit and a USB HDD.

When the USB HDD is connected to other devices such as Blu-ray disc recorder, a

message prompting to format the USB HDD may display. All the scenes and still pictures

recorded on the USB HDD will be erased if formatted. Do not format as important data will

get erased and it will be impossible to restore.

- 144 -

∫Points to check before copying

≥When using a USB HDD for the first time, or using a USB HDD that has been used with

other devices, first run [FORMAT MEDIA].

≥Before copying, go to [MEDIA STATUS] to check the amount of free space on the USB HDD.

≥In the following cases, copying may take longer:

jThere are lots of scenes

jThe temperature of this unit is high

≥If you copy protected scenes or still pictures, the protection setting of the copied scenes or still

pictures are canceled.

≥The order in which the scenes were copied cannot be changed.

∫Formatting

This is for initializing the USB HDD.

≥Please be aware that if a media is formatted then all the data recorded on the media is

erased and cannot be recovered. Back up important data on a PC etc.

≥Connect this unit to the USB HDD and touch [Playback HDD].

≥When formatting is complete, touch [EXIT] to exit the message screen.

≥Connect this unit and the USB HDD to format.

You may no longer be able to use the USB HDD if you format them on another device such as a

PC etc.

≥This unit formats the USB HDD in exFAT.

∫Displaying media information

The used space of the USB HDD can be checked.

≥Connect this unit to the USB HDD and touch [Playback HDD].

≥If you touch [CHANGE MEDIA], you can switch the display between the SD card and USB HDD.

Before you delete the data on the media after copying is complete, be sure to play back

the USB HDD to check that they have been copied to correctly. (l146)

: [SETUP] # [FORMAT MEDIA] # [HDD]

: [SETUP] # [MEDIA STATUS]

- 145 -

Simple copy

1Connect this unit to the USB HDD to prepare for copying. (l142)

2Touch [Simple copy].

≥When [Copy selected files] or [Playback HDD] is selected, terminate the connection with the USB

HDD (l146), and then perform the operation of Step 1.

3Touch [YES].

4Touch [EXIT] when the copy complete message is displayed.

≥The thumbnail view of the copy destination is indicated.

When you stop copying halfway:

Touch [CANCEL] while copying.

Copy selected files

1Connect this unit to the USB HDD to prepare for copying. (l142)

2Touch [Copy selected files].

≥You can also copy scenes or still pictures by touching , selecting [COPY].

3Touch [NEXT].

4Touch the desired items following the instructions on the screen.

≥It will return to the previous step by touching .

≥(When [SELECT SCENES] is selected)

When touched, the scene/still picture is selected and the indication appears on the

thumbnail. Touch the scene/still picture again to cancel the operation.

≥(When [SELECT DATE] is selected)

When touched, the date is selected and surrounded by red. Touch the date again to cancel the

operation.

≥Up to 99 scenes/ 99 dates can be selected continuously.

5Touch [EXIT] when the copy complete message is displayed.

≥The thumbnail view of the copy destination is indicated.

When you stop copying halfway:

Touch [CANCEL] while copying.

≥[SELECT SCENES] and [SELECT DATE] cannot be selected for 24p scenes.

- 146 -

Playing back the USB HDD

≥Only motion picture/still picture that have been copied by connecting this unit to the USB

HDD or copied with HD Writer AE 5.3 can be played back.

AUSB Connection Cable (commercially-available)

BUSB HDD (commercially-available)

CTurn the side with the symbol up to connect the micro A end of the USB Connection Cable to

the USB terminal of this unit.

1Connect this unit to the USB HDD to prepare for playback. (l142)

≥When playing back on a TV, connect this unit to the TV. (l137)

2Touch [Playback HDD].

3Touch the scene or still picture to be played back and then play it back.

≥The playback operation is performed the same as when playing back motion pictures or still

pictures. (l33, 103)

To terminate the connection between this unit and the USB HDD

Touch on the Touch Menu.

≥Disconnect the USB Connection Cable from this unit.



ALL

- 147 -

≥It is also possible to switch the media to play back by touching the play mode select icon.

When the USB HDD is connected, the (USB HDD) can be selected from the displayed media

types. (l33)

≥Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera will be saved as normal AVCHD scenes when

copied to the USB HDD.

≥The scenes you have saved in Highlight Playback or 4K Cropping during playback of the USB

HDD are saved in the SD card.

≥Deleting scenes and still pictures on the USB HDD may take time.

≥You cannot set the following items during playback of (USB HDD).

jTagging Favorite Scene

j[SCENE PROTECT]

j[SECTION DELETE]

j[DIVIDE]

j[MANUAL EDIT]

j[SPLIT&DELETE]

j[CONVERT TO MP4]

j[Slow Speed Conversion]

- 148 -

≥Blu-ray recorders are not sold in US.

∫Check before dubbing

Check the equipment used for dubbing.

* Some equipment may not be compatible with 4K MP4, MP4 (iFrame), 24p or high-definition

(AVCHD). In such a case, connect with a Composite video cable (commercially-available) and

dub with standard picture quality. (l151)

≥For the positions of the SD card slot, USB terminal, or terminal for connecting the Composite

video cable, refer to the operating instructions of the equipment used.

Copy/Dubbing

Dubbing with a Blu-ray disc recorder,

video device, etc.

Equipment used

for dubbing Dubbing picture quality To dub

Equipment with

SD card slot

4K picture quality/

High-definition picture

quality*

Insert the SD card directly

(l149)

Equipment with USB

terminal

4K picture quality/

High-definition picture

quality*

Connect with supplied

USB cable (l149)

Equipment without

SD card slot or USB

terminal

Standard picture quality

This can be played back on

equipment incompatible with

high-definition (AVCHD), so it

is convenient if you are

dubbing for distribution.

Connect with Composite

video cable

(commercially-available)

(l151)

You can dub scenes recorded with this unit to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD

recorder that supports the recording format or recording mode you want to use.

≥Note that the equipment described may not be available in certain countries and

regions.

- 149 -

∫To dub using equipment with an SD card slot

You can dub by directly inserting an SD card.

∫To dub using equipment with a USB terminal

You can dub by connecting a USB cable.

≥Use the AC adaptor to free you from worrying about the battery running down.

≥Turn on the unit.

AUSB cable (supplied)

BTurn the side with the symbol up to connect the micro B end of the USB Cable to the USB

terminal of this unit.

≥Insert the plugs as far as they will go.

1Connect the unit to the Blu-ray disc recorder or high-definition (AVCHD)

compatible DVD recorder.

≥The USB function selection screen will appear on the screen of the unit.

2Touch [RECORDER] on the screen of this unit.

≥When you select an option other than [RECORDER], reconnect the USB cable.

≥When using the battery, the LCD monitor turns off after about 5 seconds. Touch the screen to turn

the LCD monitor on.

Dubbing in high-definition picture quality



- 150 -

3Dubbing through operations on the Blu-ray disc recorder or high-definition

(AVCHD) compatible DVD recorder.

≥Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any

other USB cables.)

≥Scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera will be saved as normal AVCHD scenes when

dubbed on a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or a DVD recorder.

≥When this unit is connected to a Panasonic Blu-ray disc recorder or a DVD recorder using a USB

cable while the unit is turned on, power is also supplied from the connected equipment to this

unit.

≥For details on dubbing and playback methods, read the operating instructions of the Blu-ray disc

recorder or DVD recorder.

≥When you connect the unit to a Blu-ray disc recorder, a dubbing operations screen may appear

on the television connected to the Blu-ray disc recorder. In this case as well, perform the

operations of Steps 1 to 3.

≥You cannot switch the Recording Mode/Playback Mode by pressing the recording/playback

button on this unit while the Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD recorder is connected. Disconnect the

USB cable before performing either of these operations.

≥If the battery runs down during dubbing, a message will appear. Operate the Blu-ray disc recorder

to cancel the dubbing.

About the screen indication of the unit

≥When the unit is accessing the SD card, card access icon ( ) appears on the unit screen

or the access lamp is on.

≥Be careful not to disconnect the USB cable, AC adaptor or battery while the unit is accessing

the media, as this may result in the loss of recorded content.

- 151 -

∫Dubbing using equipment without an SD card slot or a USB terminal,

or using a video device

You can dub by connecting a Composite video cable (commercially-available).

≥Use the AC adaptor to free you from worrying about the battery running down.

≥Press the recording/playback button to switch this unit to the Playback Mode.

1Connect this unit to a video device and start playback on this unit.

2Start recording on the connected device.

≥To stop recording (dubbing), stop playback on this unit after stopping recording on the recorder.

≥Some screens, such as the menu screen, may be displayed in reduced sizes on the TV.

≥If the date and time display and function indication are not wanted, cancel them before dubbing.

(l40, 139)

Dubbing in standard picture quality

Change the video input on the

video device and TV that this

unit is connected to.

≥The channel set will differ depending on

the terminal to which the unit is

connected.

≥See the operating instructions of the

video device for details.

≥Insert the plugs as far as they will go.

AComposite video cable (commercially-

available)

If the dubbed images are played back on a wide-screen TV, the images may be stretched

vertically.

In this case, refer to the operating instruction for the device you are connecting to or read the

operating instructions of the wide-screen TV and set the aspect ratio to 16:9.

A/V

- 152 -

By using an Eye-Fi card (commercially-available), you can record motion pictures and still pictures

on the card, and save them on a PC or upload them on a file-sharing website via a wireless

network.

≥Insert an Eye-Fi card (commercially available) to the unit.

Select the menu.

≥When [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [ON], the transferable files will be transferred automatically.

≥To cancel the transferring of a file, turn off the unit or set [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] to [OFF].

≥The setting at the time of purchase is [OFF]. Every time the Eye-Fi card is removed from the unit,

this setting is set to [OFF].

≥Eye-Fi transfers are not available during motion picture recording.

≥You can check the file transfer status on the thumbnail screen.

Copy/Dubbing

Using the Eye-Fi™ card

≥The functions of the Eye-Fi card (including wireless transmission) are not guaranteed to work

on this product. In the case of a malfunction of the card, please contact the card

manufacturer.

≥To use the Eye-Fi transfer feature, a broadband wireless LAN environment is required.

≥To use the Eye-Fi card, permission from the national or regional government is required. Do

not use if you have not obtained permission. If you are unsure as to whether use is permitted,

please check with the card manufacturer.

≥To prevent the interception of communications, misuses, identity thefts, etc., we strongly

recommend you configure the appropriate security settings (encryption settings). For details,

refer to the manuals of your Eye-Fi card and access point.

≥Install the software supplied with the Eye-Fi card in advance on your PC, and configure

the Eye-Fi settings. (For settings methods etc., please read the card operating

instructions or consult the card manufacturer)

: [SETUP] # [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] # [ON]

File has been transferred

File waiting for transfer

File cannot be transferred

- 153 -

∫Using Eye-Fi direct mode

The files can be transferred directly from the Eye-Fi card to a smartphone without going through the

wireless access point when necessary setting is performed in a PC in advance.

≥Install the software supplied with the Eye-Fi card on your PC, and configure the

Eye-Fi direct mode settings.

≥Insert an Eye-Fi card (commercially available) to the unit.

Select the menu.

≥This mode is displayed only when [Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [ON].

≥The mode will be canceled using the following steps.

jWhen the unit is turned off

jIf you start recording motion picture

In addition to the steps above, the mode may also be canceled by the Eye-Fi card.

≥When connected via Eye-Fi direct mode, [ECONOMY (BATT)]/[ECONOMY (AC)] are disabled.

∫Selecting files to transfer

If you perform the required settings in advance on your PC, you can transfer selected files alone.

For settings methods etc., please read the card operating instructions or consult the card

manufacturer.

≥Install the software supplied with the Eye-Fi card on your PC, and configure the selection

transfer settings.

≥Insert an Eye-Fi card (commercially available) to the unit.

1Press the recording/playback button to switch to the Playback Mode.

2Touch the play mode select icon. (l33)

3Select [4K MP4], [MP4/iFrame], [24p] or [PICTURE]. (l33)

≥AVCHD scenes or scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera cannot be used as the selected

transfer setting.

4Select the menu.

≥The setting method is the same as that for the scene protect settings. (l133)

≥If the selected transfer setting is not configured on the computer, [SCENE PROTECT] is

displayed and the selected transfer setting cannot be configured.

≥When the write protect switch on the Eye-Fi card is on the LOCK side, [SCENE PROTECT] is

displayed and selected transfer setting is disabled. Please unlock the write protect switch.

≥The protect setting is also applied to the files for which [TRANSFER/PROTECT] is set. To delete

a file, first cancel [TRANSFER/PROTECT] and then perform the operation.

: [SETUP] # [Eye-Fi DIRECT]

: [VIDEO SETUP] or [PICT. SETUP] # [TRANSFER/PROTECT]

- 154 -

≥The Eye-Fi menu only appears when an Eye-Fi card is used.

≥The Eye-Fi transfer feature cannot be guaranteed to continue to operate in the future due to

changes to the card specification etc.

≥Update the firmware of the Eye-Fi card to the latest one using the software supplied with the

Eye-Fi card before use.

≥When the endless memory function of the Eye-Fi card is set to on, the files transferred from the

card may be deleted automatically.

≥The Eye-Fi card may heat up as a result of the files being transferred. Note that the use of an

Eye-Fi card accelerates the battery drain, so we recommend you use the card in Playback Mode.

≥The Eye-Fi setting can be checked while pausing the recording.

≥If the Eye-Fi card is removed and then reinserted into the unit, set functions related to Eye-Fi

again from the menu.

≥When using the Eye-Fi card, please be sure to unlock the write-protect switch. (l16)

≥Before deleting the files, please confirm they have been transferred to your PC and uploaded to

the sharing site.

≥Do not use the Eye-Fi card in locations where the use of wireless devices is forbidden, such as

inside aircraft etc.

≥Depending on network conditions, the transfer may take some time. Also, if network conditions

deteriorate, the transfer may be suspended.

≥Files over 2 GB in size cannot be transferred. Such files should first be split to reduce the file size.

(l131)

[Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [ON]

(Transferring in Eye-Fi direct mode)

[Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [ON]

[Eye-Fi TRANSFER] is set to [OFF]

- 155 -

∫Use this unit as a wireless LAN device

When using equipment or computer systems that require more reliable security than wireless LAN

devices, ensure that the appropriate measures are taken for safety designs and defects for the

systems used. Panasonic will not take any responsibility for any damage that arises when using this

unit for any purpose other than as a wireless LAN device.

∫Use of the Wi-Fi function of this unit is presumed to be in countries

where this unit is sold

There is the risk that this unit violates the radiowave regulations if used in countries other than those

where this unit is sold, and Panasonic takes no responsibility for any violations.

∫There is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be

intercepted

Please note that there is the risk that data sent and received via radio waves may be intercepted by

a third party.

∫Do not use this unit in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or

interference

≥Do not use this unit in areas with magnetic fields, static electricity or interference, such as near

microwave ovens. Radio waves may not reach this unit.

≥Using this unit near devices such as cordless telephones or any other wireless LAN device that

use the 2.4 GHz radio wave band may cause a decrease in performance in both devices.

∫Do not connect to the wireless network you are not authorized to

use

When this unit utilizes its Wi-Fi function, wireless networks will be searched automatically. When

this happens, wireless networks that you are not authorized to use (SSID*) may be displayed,

however do not attempt to connect to the network as it may be considered as unauthorized access.

* SSID refers to the name of device that is used to identify a network over a wireless LAN

connection. If the SSID matches for both devices, transmission is possible.

∫Before use

To use a Wi-Fi function with this unit, you need a wireless access point or destination device

equipped with a wireless LAN function.

≥For the operations and settings of your device such as the smartphone, please read the

operating instructions of the device.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi® function

- 156 -

∫This unit is WPS-compatible

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup™) is a function that allows you to easily set up a connection with a

wireless LAN device and make security-related settings.

≥This unit cannot be used to connect to a public wireless LAN connection.

≥Use a IEEE802.11b, IEEE802.11g or IEEE802.11n compatible device when using a wireless

access point.

≥This unit uses the 2.4 GHz frequency band. You cannot establish a wireless LAN connection

using the 5 GHz frequency band.

≥When using a wireless access point, we strongly recommend that you set a encryption to

maintain information security.

≥When sending

scenes

or still pictures, we recommend you use the AC adaptor. If you are using

the battery, we recommend you use the fully charged one.

≥When sending motion pictures or still pictures on a mobile network or tethering, high packet

communication fees may be incurred depending on the details of your contract.

≥This unit may not connect to a wireless access point depending on the radio wave condition.

≥When motion picture or still picture transmission is not successful, point the Wi-Fi transmitter

(l7) at the wireless device (smartphone, etc.).

≥When the battery indicator is flashing red, the connection with other equipment may not start or

the connection may be disrupted.

≥The Wi-Fi transmitter may become warm when using the Wi-Fi function; however this is not a sign

of a malfunction. (l7)

- 157 -

Using a smartphone, you can perform record/playback operations from a remote location or upload

motion pictures and still pictures recorded in this unit on SNS (Social Networking Service).

AWhen connecting directly to a smartphone

BWhen connecting to a wireless access point

≥Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about how to operate.

Wi-Fi

[Link to Cell]

≥You need to turn on the Wi-Fi function of your smartphone.

≥Do not remove the SD card during remote operations.

Caution:

Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the Portrait rights, etc. of the subject when you use

this function. Use at your own risk.

Image App

- 158 -

Preparations before using [Link to Cell]

Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (l183)

Operate this unit and the smartphone to set up a direct connection.

Check the [Direct Connection Password] setting in [Wi-Fi Setup]. (l195)

≥The default setting for [Direct Connection Password] is [OFF].

Select [ON] as needed, for example when the setting seems necessary for your Wi-Fi

environment.

≥When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]

jProceed to “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]” in “Using [Link to Cell] with a

direct connection”. (l159)

≥When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]

[HC-WXF991PP]/[HC-VX981PP]:

Enter SSID and Password or scan QR code to connect.

j[WPS Connection] (l189)

jConnecting with QR code (l190)

jConnecting by entering an SSID and Password (l191)

When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, proceed to “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to

[ON]” in “Using [Link to Cell] with a direct connection”. (l160)

1Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

2Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.

≥[WPS Connection] (l186)

≥Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l187)

≥Setting up a connection manually (l188)

3When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Using [Link

to Cell] with a wireless access point connection”. (l160)

≥Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the

smartphone application “Image App”. (l185)

Setting up a direct Wi-Fi connection between this unit and a

smartphone

Setting up a Wi-Fi connection via a wireless access point

- 159 -

Using [Link to Cell] with a direct connection

5When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the

smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi

Setup].

2Touch [Direct Connection].

≥This unit will go into connection standby with the smartphone.

≥The SSID of this unit is displayed on the screen of this unit.

3Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s

setup menu.

4On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select

the SSID displayed on this unit.

≥It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.

Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete

jThe status indicator of this unit is lit green

j is displayed on the screen

6(If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting

to this unit)

Confirm the message “Connect this

smartphone?”, and touch [YES] on the screen of

this unit.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the image from

this unit is displayed on the smartphone screen.

Control this unit remotely with the smartphone.

2/2

 

A[Wi-Fi Setup]

B[EXIT]

Wi-Fi



C[Device Name]

D[YES]

EMessage

- 160 -

≥

Proceed to Step 5 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Direct Connection] in [Wi-Fi Setup] (

189).

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Link to Cell].

≥(If you have touched [Link to Cell] for the first time)

A message will be displayed asking whether to connect to a wireless access point. Touch [NO].

≥If a wireless access point is already registered in [Wireless Settings] in [Wi-Fi Setup], priority will

be given to a connection using the wireless access point. A connection using the wireless access

point will be established for remote operations.

2Touch [Wi-Fi].

≥It will go into connection standby for remote operation.

3Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.

On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this unit.

≥If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit via Wi-Fi, enter the Password

displayed on this unit’s screen into the smartphone.

≥It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.

5When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the

smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the image from this unit is displayed on the

smartphone screen. Control this unit remotely with the smartphone.

Touch [EXIT] or press Wi-Fi button.

≥The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.

≥The following operations allow you to register up to ten smartphones. If the number exceeds ten,

smartphone information with the oldest registration date and time will be deleted.

Setting [Direct Connection Password] to [OFF] and connecting this unit and a smartphone directly.

Using [Link to Cell] with a wireless access point

connection

≥Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Wireless Settings] in [Wi-Fi

Setup] (l186 to 189).

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [Link to Cell] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.

≥It will go into connection standby for remote operation.

3Connect the smartphone to a wireless access point.

4Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

≥

When the connection to this unit is complete, the image from this unit is displayed on the smartphone screen.

Control this unit remotely with the smartphone.

To exit [Link to Cell]:

Touch [EXIT] or press Wi-Fi button.

≥The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.

When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]

To exit [Link to Cell]

- 161 -

About [Link to Cell]

Smartphone screen shots are example displayed in Motion Picture Recording Mode and Playback Mode.

≥Depending on your OS or the version of the smartphone application “Image App”, the screens

may differ from the ones above.

∫In Recording Mode

≥Recording motion pictures/still pictures

≥Selecting a mode

≥Using the zoom (Available in the medium or fast speed)

Screen display during remote operations

Recording screen

1Recording media/remaining recordable

time

2Remaining battery power of this unit

3Zoom

4Photoshot button

5Menu display

6Playback mode button

7Remote control button

8Recording start/stop button

9Motion Picture Recording Mode/Still

Picture Recording Mode toggle button

:Name of the connected device

Playback screen

1Camera function button

2Number of scenes

3Remaining battery power of this unit

4Delete

5Upload

6Copy

7Name of the connected device

8Scene information display

Functions available for remote operations

XXXXXXXXX

R 1h 20min



















XXXXXXXXX 1/16

AVCHD_0001 2016/12/15 15:30:50

















- 162 -

≥Switching between the Recording Mode:

≥Registering your favorite scenes

≥Twin Camera*

≥Changing and adjusting the Sub Window settings*

≥Backup for Twin Camera

≥Recording format

≥Recording mode

≥Picture size

≥White Balance

≥Manual shutter speed/iris adjustment (4K Photo Mode only)

≥Backlight Compensation

≥Night Mode

≥Self-timer

≥Aspect ratio

≥Turning the unit off

∫In Playback Mode

≥Playback

≥Switching between thumbnails (4K MP4, MP4/iFrame, AVCHD, 2160/24p, 1080/24p, Backup for

Twin Camera, JPEG (Still picture))

≥Delete

≥Save (Copy)

jAVCHD scenes or scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera cannot be copied.

jScenes recorded in iFrame can only be copied with iOS devices.

Depending on your smartphone, scenes recorded in MP4 format or scenes exceeding 4 GB may not be copied.

≥Smart Home Network

jIt is possible to post to SNS or perform playback operation when this unit is connected to the

DLNA-compatible TV via wireless access point using a smartphone.

≥Creating and saving scenes with Highlight Playback

≥Highlight Photo Collage

jParts that were recognized as clearly recorded are automatically extracted from multiple

scenes and saved as still pictures. (Highlight Photo Collage is not available for 4K MP4 scenes,

MP4/iFrame scenes, 24p scenes and scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera.)

In addition, the multiple still pictures you have captured can be put in a frame and saved as a single still picture.

≥Functions other than those listed above are not available for remote operation.

≥If you record an image when the LCD monitor of this unit is closed with the screen facing outward,

the LCD monitor turns off.

jIntelligent Auto Mode

jManual Mode

FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode ([Always])

jSlow Zoom Mode*

j4K Photo Mode

jStop Motion Animation Assist Mode

* only

WXF991

- 163 -

You can use your smartphone to check on your baby being monitored by this unit when you are in

another room. The smartphone and this unit can be used like radio transceivers, allowing the users

to have a conversation by taking turns. This unit can also send a notification to the smartphone

whenever the baby cries.

Preparations before using [Baby Monitor]

1Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

2Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (l183)

3Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.

≥[WPS Connection] (l186)

≥Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l187)

≥Setting up a connection manually (l188)

4When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Using [Baby

Monitor]”.

≥Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the

smartphone application “Image App”. (l185)

Wi-Fi

[Baby Monitor]

≥You need to turn on the Wi-Fi function of your smartphone.

≥If [CLOCK SET] (l25) is not set correctly, the sound detection function will not work

(l164).

≥Notifications cannot be sent to more than one smartphone.

≥Check your contract details carefully, as smartphone and internet contract details may

result in high communication charges being incurred, or a limit placed on

communication traffic.

Caution:

≥It is the responsibility of parents or guardians to check on their child. Use [Baby Monitor]

only as an aid.

≥Place this unit so that it will be out of the reach of the baby.

XXXXXXXXX

- 164 -

≥[Baby Monitor] is not available in the following cases:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]

jWhen you set [MEDIA, VIDEO/PICTURE] to [2160/24p] or [1080/24p] in Playback Mode

Using [Baby Monitor]

≥Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Wireless Settings] in [Wi-Fi

Setup] (l186 to 189).

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [Baby Monitor] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.

≥The SSID of the wireless access point to which this unit is connected is displayed.

3Connect the smartphone to a wireless access point.

≥To connect it, select the SSID of the wireless access point displayed on the screen of this unit.

4Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

≥When this unit is connected to the Internet via the wireless access point, the notification function,

which sends notifications from this unit to the smartphone, becomes available.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the screen of this unit turns off. To turn on the

screen again, touch the screen.

To exit [Baby Monitor]:

Touch [EXIT] displayed on the screen of this unit or press the Wi-Fi button.

≥The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.

∫Checking on the baby in your house

You can check the image of the baby being monitored on your smartphone.

≥Images of baby-monitoring cannot be recorded.

≥It cannot be confirmed with multiple smartphones simultaneously.

∫Voice message function

The smartphone and this unit can be used like radio transceivers, allowing the users to have a

conversation by taking turns.

≥A voice message of up to 1 minute can be sent.

≥Open the LCD monitor of this unit when using the Voice message function.

∫Sending notifications to your smartphone

In the following cases, this unit sends a notification to the smartphone:

≥When baby monitoring starts

≥When a sound is detected

∫Sound detection

When this unit detects a sound, it can automatically send a notification to the connected

smartphone.

≥This function can be used only if this unit is connected to the Internet via the wireless access

point when [Baby Monitor] is used.

≥Depending on [Sound Detection Sensitivity] setting and recording conditions, sounds may not be

detected. Test the sound detection function in advance to check if sounds can be detected and

notified.

What you can do with [Baby Monitor]

- 165 -

Touch [Setup] on the screen of this unit, and select the item you want to set.

∫[Notification Setup]

This sets whether to send a notification to the smartphone when a sound is detected.

∫[Notification Test]

This tests if a notification can be sent to the smartphone when a sound is detected.

∫[Remote Voice Level]

This sets the voice message volume.

∫[Sound Detection Sensitivity]

This sets the sound detection sensitivity.

≥[Sound Scene Select] is set to [Auto].

Changing [Baby Monitor] settings

[ON]/[OFF]

(Volume high)/ (Volume low)

[High]/[Low]

- 166 -

You can confirm the recording screen of this unit from outside using a smartphone.

Preparations before using [Home Cam]

1Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

2Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (l183)

3Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.

≥[WPS Connection] (l186)

≥Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l187)

≥Setting up a connection manually (l188)

4When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Using

[Home Cam]”. (l167)

≥Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the

smartphone application “Image App”. (l185)

≥[Home Cam] is not available in the following cases:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]

jWhen you set [MEDIA, VIDEO/PICTURE] to [2160/24p] or [1080/24p] in Playback Mode

Wi-Fi

[Home Cam]

≥Switch the Wi-Fi setting to off on your smartphone and use with mobile network such

as 3G.

≥If [CLOCK SET] (l25) is not set correctly, [Home Cam] cannot be used.

≥Check your contract details carefully, as smartphone and internet contract details may

result in high communication charges being incurred, or a limit placed on

communication traffic.

Caution:

This function is not designed for anti-theft or disaster use.

XXXXXXXXX

- 167 -

Using [Home Cam]

≥Perform the home monitoring operation on the smartphone. (l169)

≥When the firewall is turned on, the Wi-Fi function may not work correctly. If this occurs, check the

network settings.

≥Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Wireless Settings] in [Wi-Fi

Setup] (l186 to 189).

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [Home Cam] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.

3Turn off the Wi-Fi setting of the smartphone.

4Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

≥(If the device is Android™)

When a Wi-Fi connection guidance screen is displayed, select [No].

≥(If the device is iOS)

If a confirmation message for the Wi-Fi setup is displayed, select [Close].

5Enable the home monitoring setting from the menu of the smartphone

application “Image App”.

≥Select [ (MENU)] # [Application function] # [Home Monitor], and enable [Use Home

Monitor].

6Select [Set connect. dest.] of the smartphone.

7Enter the Device ID and Password displayed on the screen of this unit into

the smartphone.

≥When the entry is complete, select [OK] (on your Android device) or [Complete] (on your iOS

device).

≥If you want to check the Device ID and Password after performing Step 8, on the screen of this

unit, touch [Setup] # [Home Monitor Connect].

8Touch [ENTER] on the screen of this unit.

≥Check that the message “Connecting...” has disappeared from this unit.

9On the smartphone, select [Start Home Monitor] to start home monitoring.

∫When configuring the home monitor settings using QR code

≥Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Wireless Settings] in [Wi-Fi

Setup] (l186 to 189).

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [Home Cam] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.

3Touch [QR code].

≥QR code is displayed on the screen of this unit.

4Turn off the Wi-Fi setting of the smartphone.

When using the home monitor function for the first time

- 168 -

5Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

≥(If the device is Android)

When a Wi-Fi connection guidance screen is displayed, select [No].

≥(If the device is iOS)

If a confirmation message for the Wi-Fi setup is displayed, select [Close].

6Enable the home monitoring setting from the menu of the smartphone

application “Image App”.

≥Select [ (MENU)] # [Application function] # [Home Monitor], and enable [Use Home

Monitor].

7Select [Set connect. dest.] of the smartphone.

8On the smartphone, select [QR code] to scan the QR code displayed on the

screen of this unit.

≥The Device ID and Password will be set. Select [OK] (on your Android device) or [Complete] (on

your iOS device).

9Touch [NEXT] on the screen of this unit.

≥Check that the message “Connecting...” has disappeared from this unit.

On the smartphone, select [Start Home Monitor] to start home monitoring.

To exit [Home Cam]:

Touch [EXIT] displayed on the screen of this unit or press the Wi-Fi button.

≥The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Home Cam].

2Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

≥When a Wi-Fi connection guidance screen is displayed, select [NO].

≥Use the smartphone to start home monitor.

To exit [Home Cam]:

Touch [EXIT] displayed on the screen of this unit or press the Wi-Fi button.

≥The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to close the indication.

The image and sound may be interrupted or the connection may be terminated depending on your

line conditions. Use the recommended optimal speed (upstream) below as a guide to make

necessary settings.

∫Recommended optimal speed (upstream) for the broadband line, mobile

router (tethering), etc. connected to this unit

≥For information on the optimal speed, contact your service provider, etc.

When using the home monitor function for the second time or later

Image quality

Recommended optimal speed

(upstream)

500 kbps or higher

- 169 -

≥Operation cannot be guaranteed for all devices.

≥Even with a broadband line, the recommended optimal speed may not be reached depending on

your environment.

≥Narrowband lines such as analog modems cannot be used.

≥If the line for the smartphone is switched, communication may be interrupted. In that case,

connect again.

Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about how to operate.

If you have difficulty establishing a connection with [Home Cam] or the connection is

disconnected, wait for a while, and connect again. If the connection still cannot be established,

check the settings from the menu of the smartphone application “Image App” below.

[ (MENU)] # [Application function] # [Home Monitor] # [Advanced Settings]

Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about the settings.

What you can operate/set with a smartphone during home monitoring

∫What you can operate with a smartphone

Confirm the condition inside the house

The monitoring video can be confirmed.

≥The monitoring image can be recorded as a video or a still picture.

≥It cannot be confirmed with multiple smartphones simultaneously.

≥Depending upon the environment in which the device is used, motion picture may be like a

frame rate is low.

Voice message

The smartphone and this unit can be used like radio transceivers, allowing the users to have a

conversation by taking turns.

≥You can talk up to 10 seconds in 20 second interval.

≥Open the LCD monitor of this unit when using the Voice message function.

∫What you can set with a smartphone

Moving/non-moving object detection

This unit can detect moving objects and non-moving objects in the home monitoring detection area.

≥Once this unit is set to home monitoring (home monitoring standby state), it cannot detect

moving objects for up to 5 minutes.

≥

Detection of some moving and stationary subjects may not be possible due to the condition of the

subject. Check beforehand to see if detection of the moving or stationary object can be detected.

≥If the movement of the subject is too fast or too slow, if the subject is too small, or if the

surroundings are too dark, detection of moving and stationary objects may be impossible.

Automatic recording

You can record a motion picture on this unit as it detects a moving or non-moving object.

≥Automatic recording will record for approximately 30 seconds.

≥Automatic recording can record a maximum of 1 hour 15 minutes per day. Check the remaining

available recording time.

≥When automatic recording is performed with moving object detection, automatic recording is

performed only once within the set time.

≥When automatic recording is performed with non-moving object detection, the set time will be

reset and non-moving object detection will start again.

- 170 -

≥Setting cannot be performed while operating monitoring with a smartphone.

Touch [Setup] and select desired setting.

∫[Home Monitor Connect]

You can display the registration screen for a Device ID and Password.

≥If [QR code] is touched, a QR code will be displayed on the screen of this unit.

∫[Remote Voice Level]

You can set the initial remote voice level and speaker volume level of the remote voice function.

≥The mode cannot be switched to another one during home monitoring operations.

≥Although home monitoring can be performed with the battery, we recommend you use the AC

adaptor.

≥It is recommended to use this unit fixed so that it will not move since it may cause false detection.

≥Power of this unit will automatically turn off when monitoring condition continues for

approximately 10 days.

≥[REC MODE] is set to [HE].

≥[ZOOM MODE] is set to [Opt.Zoom 20k].

≥The following recording modes are not available (l59):

jCreative Control Mode

jHDR Movie Mode

jFULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode

j4K Photo Mode

j(For the )

Cinema Like Effect Mode

≥Backup for Twin Camera is not available during home monitoring.

≥If you record an image when the LCD monitor of this unit is closed with the screen facing outward,

the LCD monitor turns off.

≥The password for the home monitor settings will change when [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] is

performed. Set the home monitor settings of the smartphone again and reconnect to this unit

when [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] is performed.

Changing the home monitor settings of this unit

(Volume high)/ (Volume low)

WXF991

- 171 -

Connecting this unit to a DLNA-compatible device via Wi-Fi, you can playback scenes and still

pictures on the DLNA device.

ADLNA-compatible device

Preparations before using [DLNA Play]

1Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

2Check if the Device is DLNA-compatible.

3Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.

≥[WPS Connection] (l186)

≥Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l187)

≥Setting up a connection manually (l188)

4When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Playing

back on a TV”. (l172)

≥Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the

smartphone application “Image App”. (l185)

≥[DLNA Play] is not available in the following cases:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]

jWhen you set [MEDIA, VIDEO/PICTURE] to [2160/24p] or [1080/24p] in Playback Mode

Wi-Fi

[DLNA Play]

≥Please read the operating instructions for the TV about connecting TV to the wireless

access point.

≥Do not remove the SD card in playing back on a TV.



- 172 -

Playing back on a TV

You can play back the scenes and still pictures recorded with or stored in this unit on a TV.

≥The following scenes can be played back:

jScenes recorded in AVCHD

jScenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera

jScenes recorded in MP4/iFrame [720]

jScenes saved in MP4 (1280k720/30p) or MP4 (640k360/30p)

≥Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Wireless Settings] in [Wi-Fi

Setup] (l186 to 189).

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [DLNA Play] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.

≥If you touch [Change AP], you can switch the wireless access point to another one that has been

registered to this unit.

≥If you touch [CANCEL], the Wi-Fi connection is canceled.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the screen of this unit turns off. To display it again,

touch the screen.

3Select this unit (SSID) by the TV side.

≥Select SD media and select the motion picture ([AVCHD/MP4]) or still picture ([JPEG]) to play

back.

4Perform playback operations with the TV remote control.

≥Playback operations may differ depending on the TV in use.

≥The following operations can be performed if a color button is

pushed.

Blue/Red: Skip playback

≥Fast forward/Fast rewind playback cannot be performed.

≥You cannot perform playback operations with this unit.

To exit [DLNA Play]:

Touch [EXIT] or press Wi-Fi button.

≥A message is displayed. Touch [YES] to exit.

≥You cannot play back the following scenes:

jScenes recorded in 4K MP4

jScenes recorded in 24p

jScenes recorded with [1080/50M], [1080/28M] or [iFrame] of [MP4/iFrame]

jScenes saved in MP4 (1920k1080/30p)

≥Depending on your environment, such as the network condition, scenes may not be played back

smoothly.







(Examples of operations during

motion picture playback)

ASkip playback

BStop

CPlayback/Pause

- 173 -

By setting up a Wi-Fi communication between this unit and a PC, you can copy scenes and still

pictures recorded with this unit to the PC.

APC

Preparations before using [Copy]

1Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

2Check if the PC and the wireless access point are connected via Wi-Fi.

≥You can also use a LAN cable to connect the PC and the wireless access point.

3Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.

≥[WPS Connection] (l186)

≥Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l187)

≥Setting up a connection manually (l188)

4When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in “Copying to

a PC”. (l175)

≥Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the

smartphone application “Image App”. (l185)

Wi-Fi

[Copy]

≥If [CLOCK SET] (l25) is not set correctly, scenes and still pictures may not be able to

be copied to a PC.

≥For information on the connection between a PC and a wireless access point, refer to

the operating instruction of the device in use.

≥If this unit and a PC are not connected to the same wireless access point, copying is

not possible.

- 174 -

To copy scenes and still pictures by setting up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the PC,

complete the following preparations:

jTurn on the PC

jCreate a shared folder (destination folder)*1

*1 The name of the folder must consist of 15 or less alphanumeric characters.

∫When using HD Writer AE 5.3

1Install HD Writer AE 5.3.

≥For information on the operating environment and installation, refer to “Operating environment”

(l225) and “Installation” (l228).

2Using HD Writer AE 5.3, create a destination folder.

≥Select [Auto-create] or [Create manually]. The first option creates a destination folder

automatically, while the second option allows you to specify a destination folder or create a new

one. With the second option, you can also set password protection for a destination folder.

≥For details, refer to the Operating Instructions of HD Writer AE 5.3 (PDF file). (l232)

∫When not using HD Writer AE 5.3

≥If the workgroup setting of the connected PC has been changed from the standard one, you also

need to change the [PC Connect Setup] setting of this unit. (l197)

≥The user account of the PC (both the Account Name and the Password) must consist of 32 or

less alphanumeric characters.*2

If you use non-alphanumeric characters for the user account, a destination folder may not be set

up.

*2 If you use more than 32 characters for the user account, copying via a Wi-Fi connection is not

possible.

(For Windows)

Supported OS: Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10

Example: Windows 7

1Select a destination folder, and right-click.

2Select [Properties], and enable sharing of the folder.

≥For details on how to enable sharing, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or the help of

your OS.

(For Mac)

Supported OS: OS X v10.4 to v10.11

Example: OS X v10.11

1Select a destination folder, and click the following items:

[File] # [Get Info]

2Enable sharing of the folder.

≥For details on how to enable sharing, refer to the operating instructions of your PC or the help of

your OS.

Creating a shared folder (destination folder) on the PC

- 175 -

Copying to a PC

≥Create a shared folder (destination folder) on the PC. (l174)

≥Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Wireless Settings] in [Wi-Fi

Setup] (l186 to 189).

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [Copy] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.

3Touch the PC to be connected.

≥To search for PCs again, touch [Refresh].

(When the PC you want to connect to is not displayed)

Touch [Manual Setting].

4(When [Manual Setting] is touched)

Enter the computer name of the PC (NetBIOS name for Mac computers).

≥Enter the computer name of your PC (NetBIOS name for Mac computers).

(A maximum of 15 characters can be entered.)

≥When the computer name (or NetBIOS name) contains a space (blank character), etc., it may not

be recognized correctly. If a connection attempt fails, we recommend that you change the

computer name (or NetBIOS name) to the one consisting of only alphanumeric characters, with a

maximum of 15 characters.

≥Input method is same operation as for setting up the title. (l11 6)

≥After entering the computer name of the PC, touch [Enter].

5Touch [INPUT], and enter the name of the shared folder.

≥If you have created a shared folder (destination folder) using HD Writer AE 5.3 (l174), touch

[NEXT].

≥Enter the name of the shared folder that you have created on your PC and then touch [Enter].

(A maximum of 15 characters can be entered.)

≥If a screen asking you to enter a user account and password is displayed after you have entered

the name of the shared folder, enter the one you have created on your PC.

≥When the connection to the PC is complete, copying starts.

≥When copying is complete, this unit turns off automatically.

When you stop copying halfway

Touch [CANCEL] while copying.

- 176 -

≥Copying can be performed even when the battery is used for power, but we recommend that the

AC adaptor be used.

≥Once scenes or still pictures are copied to a PC, the original scenes or still pictures cannot be

copied to any PCs.

≥If the total length of the scenes recorded on the same date on the SD card exceeds

approximately 8 hours, the scenes will not be copied.

≥If the copy source contains scenes or still pictures recorded on other devices, copying may be

canceled.

≥Depending on your environment, copying may take time or may not be available.

≥If the scene to be copied is long or copying fails, we recommend that the following be performed

for copying.

jConnecting this unit to the PC by USB cable (l229, 233)

jInserting the SD card to the built-in SD card slot of the PC or your SD card reader/writer directly

≥Scenes exceeding 4 GB may not be copied.

If you intend to delete the original scenes or still pictures when the copying has finished,

always play back the duplicate scenes or still pictures on PC before deletion to confirm that

they have been copied normally.

- 177 -

You can broadcast motion pictures of this unit live by setting up a link between the “LUMIX CLUB”

and USTREAM.

AYou can also broadcast motion pictures live by connecting this unit and a smartphone that

supports tethering.

Wi-Fi

[Live Cast]

≥If [CLOCK SET] (l25) is not set correctly, [Live Cast] cannot be used.

≥Check your contract details carefully, as smartphone and internet contract details may

result in high communication charges being incurred, or a limit placed on

communication traffic.

Caution:

Be sure to pay special attention to the privacy, the Portrait rights, etc. of the subject when you use

this function. Use at your own risk.

- 178 -

Preparations before using [Live Cast]

1(When connecting to a wireless access point)

Check if the wireless access point is compatible with IEEE802.11b/g/n.

(For tethering connection)

Check if your smartphone is compatible with the tethering function.

≥For information on how to set up the tethering function, refer to the operating instructions for your

smartphone.

2Acquire a USTREAM ID/Password/APP.

≥Acquire a USTREAM ID/Password/APP using a smartphone or a PC.

≥Operation cannot be guaranteed on future USTREAM services and updates. The service content

and screens which can be used are subject to change without prior notice. (This service is current

as of November 2015)

3Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID/Password.

≥When you connect this unit to a wireless access point (l186), you can acquire a “LUMIX CLUB”

4Use linked services with “LUMIX CLUB”

≥Log in to the “LUMIX CLUB” and register/set up the USTREAM on WEB service link setup.

5Set up a Wi-Fi connection between this unit and the wireless access point.

≥[WPS Connection] (l186)

≥Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection (l187)

≥Setting up a connection manually (l188)

6When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, follow the procedure in

“Broadcasting live”. (l179)

≥Using [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard], you can also set up a Wi-Fi connection in conjunction with the

smartphone application “Image App”. (l185)

≥[Live Cast] is not available in the following cases:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]

jWhen you set [MEDIA, VIDEO/PICTURE] to [2160/24p] or [1080/24p] in Playback Mode

About the USTREAM

With this video-sharing website, you can stream and watch motion pictures this unit is

broadcasting.

Refer to the USTREAM site for details.

http://www.ustream.tv/

To use the Live Cast, access following website.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

- 179 -

Broadcasting live

≥Proceed to Step 2 when your Wi-Fi connection has been made via [Wireless Settings] in [Wi-Fi

Setup] (l186 to 189).

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [Live Cast] on the Wi-Fi menu screen.

≥If a “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Password has not been registered to this unit yet, enter them

according to the screen.

≥You can register up to three wireless access points. When connecting to a wireless access point,

this unit will try to connect to wireless access points one after the other. For example, if it fails to

connect to the first one, it will try to connect to the second one. (l194)

≥If you touch [Change AP], you can switch the wireless access point to another one that has been

registered to this unit.

≥When the connection is made correctly, the screen of this unit switches to the Live Cast Mode.

∫To send e-mails

You can send e-mails containing such information as the USTREAM channel name or the

scheduled broadcast date.

≥This unit can only set the scheduled broadcast date. (l181) For other settings, set them on the

“LUMIX CLUB”.

≥On the “LUMIX CLUB”, register the destination addresses of the e-mail in advance.

Touch .

≥/ / will disappear when no touch function is

performed for a specific period of time. To display them again,

touch the screen.

∫To start the live broadcast

Touch .

≥If you press the start recording button, you can simultaneously

record the broadcast to this unit. The Backup for Twin Camera

function is not available.

≥/ / will disappear when no touch function is

performed for a specific period of time. To display them again,

touch the screen.

∫To stop the live broadcast

Touch .

≥When (gray) is displayed, unsent data is present. Wait until the unsent data is sent and is

displayed.

To exit the Live Cast Mode:

Touch [EXIT] or press Wi-Fi button.

≥A message is displayed. Touch [YES] to exit.



R 1h20m

A[EXIT]



R 1h20m

A[EXIT]

- 180 -

∫About the screen indications in the Live Cast Mode

≥Recording is performed in Intelligent Auto Mode.

≥In Live Cast Mode, [REC FORMAT] is set to [AVCHD], and [REC MODE] (l182) is set to [PH]/

[HA]/[HG]/[HE].

≥If you record an image when the LCD monitor of this unit is closed with the screen facing outward,

the LCD monitor turns off.

≥If this unit is on the e-mail sender block list of destination devices or if their firewall setting is

enabled, the Wi-Fi function may not work correctly when you send an e-mail. If this occurs, check

the network settings.

≥When the live broadcast cannot be watched on a USTREAM application for TVs or smartphones,

cancel the Password for the Program, and restart the broadcast.

≥Image content may be leaked to third parties depending on the USTREAM image publication

method settings. Set the publication range and Password using USTREAM if required.

Touch to display the live broadcast setting

screen.

≥/ / will disappear when no touch function is

performed for a specific period of time. To display them again,

touch the screen.

/Live broadcast indication

Image quality (l181)

1h23m Elapsed time of the live broadcast

10fps Frame rate (l181)

Number of people watching the live

broadcast

≥Up to 9999 viewers can be

indicated. The indication does not

appear when the number is 0.

E-mail delivery setting

Live broadcast microphone setting

(l182)

≥The indication appears when

[Microphone On Air] is set to

[OFF].

Configuring the live broadcast settings



R 1h20m

A[EXIT]

- 181 -

∫To configure the e-mail delivery settings

You can make the delivery setting of a broadcast notification e-mail and the setting for the

scheduled time and date of the broadcast indicated in the e-mail.

1Touch [Send E-mail].

2Touch [ON] or [OFF].

3(When [ON] is selected)

To set the scheduled broadcast date.

∫To set the image quality

1Touch [IMAGE QUALITY].

2Touch the desired image quality.

≥Frame rate in parentheses are when recorded in simultaneously.

≥Depending on the line status of the broadband line, mobile router (tethering), etc. to which this

unit is connected, the image and sound may be interrupted or the connection may be lost. Set the

image quality on this unit by referring to the recommended optimal speeds (upstream) above.

≥For information on the optimal speed, contact your service provider, etc.

≥If the image being broadcast appears as if frames were dropped or stops when [AUTO] is set,

change [IMAGE QUALITY] according to your environment.

≥If the selected image quality has an image quality higher than the one you are using, images will

appear as if the frame rate is low.

≥Operation cannot be guaranteed for all devices.

≥Even with a broadband line, the recommended optimal speed may not be reached depending on

your environment.

≥Narrowband lines such as analog modems cannot be used.

≥If the line for the smartphone is switched, communication may be interrupted. In that case,

connect again.

[ON]: Enables e-mailing.

[OFF]: Disables e-mailing.

[Set to Sending E-mail

Time]: Allows you to set the date on which is touched.

[Manual Setting]: Allows you to set the desired time and date.

≥The setting method is the same as [CLOCK SET]. (l25)

Image

Quality Picture size Frame rate Screen

indications

Recommended optimal

speed (upstream)

[High] 1280k720 5 to 30 fps

(5 to 10 fps) 3 Mbps or higher

[Medium] 640k360 5 to 30 fps

(5 to 10 fps) 1 Mbps or higher

[Low] 320k176 5 to 30 fps

(5 to 15 fps) 500 kbps or higher

[AUTO] Use this option to check the image quality and automatically set the item.

- 182 -

∫To save in USTREAM

1Touch [Save in USTREAM].

2Touch [ON] or [OFF].

∫To set the image quality of a motion picture you simultaneously

broadcast and record

1Touch [REC MODE].

2Touch desired recording mode.

∫Broadcasting live with no sound

1Touch [Microphone On Air].

2Touch [OFF].

≥If you broadcast and record a motion picture simultaneously when this item is set to [OFF], the

sound of the broadcast will not be recorded.

[ON]: Live motion pictures are saved on USTREAM.

[OFF]: Select this option not to save on USTREAM.

[PH]/[HA]/[HG]/[HE]

[ON]: Sound is output during live broadcasts.

[OFF]: Sound is not output during live broadcasts.

- 183 -

≥To use the following Wi-Fi functions, you need to install the smartphone application “Image App”.

j[TWIN CAMERA]/[Multi Camera] (l203)

j[Link to Cell] (l157)

j[Baby Monitor] (l163)

j[Home Cam] (l166)

* The supported OS version are current as of November 2015 and subject to change.

≥Use the latest version.

≥Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about function of Image App.

≥The service may not be able to be used properly depending on the type of smartphone being

used. For information on the “Image App”, check the support website below.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam

(This Site is English only.)

≥When downloading the app on a mobile network, high packet communication fees may be

incurred depending on the details of your contract.

Wi-Fi

Install the “Image App”

About the “Image App”

The “Image App” is an application provided by Panasonic.

For Android apps For iOS apps

OS Android 4.0 or later*iOS 7.0 or later*

Installation

procedure

1Connect your Android

device to a network.

2Select “Google Play™

Store”.

3Enter “Panasonic Image

App” into the search

box.

4Select “Panasonic

Image App” and install

it.

≥The icon will be added

to the menu.

1Connect your iOS

device to a network.

2Select “App StoreSM”.

3Enter “Panasonic Image

App” into the search

box.

4Select “Panasonic

Image App” and install

it.

≥The icon will be added

to the menu.

- 184 -

To use the Wi-Fi function, connect this unit to a wireless access point or smartphone via Wi-Fi.

≥Depending on the Wi-Fi connection method, available Wi-Fi functions differ.

≥If you select [History], you can set up a Wi-Fi connection that uses the connection settings of a

previously used Wi-Fi function. (l191)

∫About the status indicator (l9) and the connection status icon when

connected to Wi-Fi

≥For information on how to set up a Wi-Fi connection for the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function,

refer to page 203; for information on the connection status icons, refer to page 212.

Wi-Fi

Setting Up a Wi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi connection

methods

Connecting to a wireless access

point (l186)

Setting up a direct connection to a

smartphone (l189)

Available Wi-Fi

functions

≥[Link to Cell] (l157)

≥[Baby Monitor] (l163)

≥[Home Cam] (l166)

≥[DLNA Play] (l171)

≥[Copy] (l173)

≥[Live Cast] (l177)

≥[Link to Cell] (l157)

ALit green

≥The status indicator is lit green while this unit is

connected to a destination device after completing a

Wi-Fi connection.

≥When Wi-Fi is disconnected, the status indicator is lit

red again.

BThe connection status icon

When connected to wireless access point:

connected to Wi-Fi/ not connected to Wi-Fi

≥The display will change as follows according to the

radio wave intensity: (Weak) # # #

(Strong).

When directly connected:

connected to Wi-Fi/ not connected to Wi-Fi





- 185 -

Using the [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard] to set up a connection

With the smartphone application “Image App”, you can transfer the following information between

the smartphone and this unit.

≥Set [Direct Connection Password] in [Wi-Fi Setup] to [ON]. (l195)

(The default setting is [OFF].)

* Acquire a Login ID and Password for the “LUMIX CLUB” on this unit in advance.

≥Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (l183)

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

2Touch [Wi-Fi Setup Wizard].

3Touch [YES].

4Touch [QR code] or [Wi-Fi].

When [QR code] is selected

1Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

2On the smartphone, select [QR code] to scan the QR code displayed on the

screen of this unit.

≥The setup screen is displayed on the smartphone.

≥When using an iOS device, perform the following operations:

1Select the option that allows you to install the app on the profile screen of the “Image App”, and

follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

2Press the home button to close the displayed screen.

3Touch [NEXT] on the screen of this unit to display its SSID.

4After selecting the network name (SSID) of this unit from the Wi-Fi setup of the smartphone,

start up “Image App”.

3Follow the on-screen instructions of the smartphone to set up a connection.

≥When the settings is complete, the smartphone and this unit are connected directly, allowing you

to use remote operations.

Control this unit remotely with the smartphone. (l161)

When [Wi-Fi] is selected

1Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.

2On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this unit.

≥If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit via Wi-Fi, enter the Password

displayed on this unit’s screen into the smartphone.

≥It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.

3When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the

smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

4Follow the on-screen instructions of the smartphone to set up a connection.

≥When the settings is complete, the smartphone and this unit are connected directly, allowing you

to use remote operations.

Control this unit remotely with the smartphone. (l161)

Set on the smartphone and

transfer to this unit

≥Clock information

≥Information on wireless access points (SSIDs and Passwords)

≥“LUMIX CLUB” Login ID, Password*

Transfer from this unit to the

smartphone

≥Device ID for home monitoring

- 186 -

Connecting to a wireless access point

Check if the wireless access point you are using is compatible with WPS

jIf the wireless access point is compatible with WPS:

Proceed to the following [WPS Connection]

jIf the wireless access point is not compatible with WPS:

“Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection” (l187)

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

3Touch [Wireless Settings].

4Touch the part with no display of a wireless

access point C.

≥For information on how to delete wireless access points or

change the search order of wireless access points, please

refer to [Wireless Settings] on page 194.

5Touch [WPS Connection].

6Set the wireless access point to waiting for WPS.

≥For further details, please read the operating instructions for the

wireless access point. (When using a tethering connection, please

read the operating instructions for the smartphone.)

≥A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Touch

[ENTER], and exit [Wireless Settings].

≥A message is displayed when the connection attempt fails. Touch

[ENTER], and set the connection again.

[WPS Connection]





A[Delete]

B[ENTER]

- 187 -

Enter a PIN code to set the Wi-Fi connection

1Touch [PIN code] in Step 6.

2Touch the wireless access point to be connected.

≥If you touch [Refresh], you can search for wireless access points again.

≥If you touch and select a wireless access point, all characters will be displayed. In this

case, touch [ENTER].

3Enter the PIN code displayed on this unit screen into the wireless access

point.

≥For further details, please read the operating instructions for the wireless access point. (When

using a tethering connection, please read the operating instructions for the smartphone.)

4Touch [NEXT].

≥A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Touch [ENTER], and exit [Wireless

Settings].

≥A message is displayed when the connection attempt fails. Touch [ENTER], and set the

connection again.

≥Confirm Encryption key (Password) of the selected wireless access point if the network

authentication is encrypted.

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

3Touch [Wireless Settings].

4Touch the part with no display of a wireless

access point C.

≥For information on how to delete wireless access points or

change the search order of wireless access points, please

refer to [Wireless Settings] on page 194.

5Touch [Search for wireless network].

6Touch the wireless access point to connect.

≥If you touch [Refresh], you can search for wireless access

points again.

≥If you touch and select a wireless access point, all characters will be displayed. In this

case, touch [ENTER].

≥When no wireless access points are displayed, refer to “Setting up a connection manually”.

(l188)

≥If an Encryption key (Password) is not set, the connection is complete and a message is

displayed. Touch [ENTER], and exit [Wireless Settings].

Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete

jThe status indicator of this unit is lit green

j is displayed on the screen

Searching for wireless access points to set up a connection





A[Delete]

B[ENTER]

- 188 -

7(When there is an Encryption key (Password))

Enter the Password.

≥For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 116.

≥When the entry is complete, touch [Enter].

≥A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Touch [ENTER], and exit [Wireless

Settings].

≥When connecting by [Manual Setting], confirm the SSID (Identification name), Authentication

method, Encryption type, and Encryption key (Password) of the wireless access point you are

using.

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit.

2Touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

3Touch [Wireless Settings].

4Touch the part with no display of a wireless

access point C.

≥For information on how to delete wireless access points or

change the search order of wireless access points, please

refer to [Wireless Settings] on page 194.

5Touch [Manual Setting].

6Touch [INPUT], then enter the SSID of the

wireless access point to connect.

≥For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 116.

≥When the entry is complete, touch [Enter].

7Touch the desired Network Authentication method.

≥When [WEP] is selected, proceed according to Step 9.

8Touch the desired Encryption method.

≥If you select [NONE], a message is displayed after completing the connection. Touch [ENTER],

and exit [Wireless Settings].

Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete

jThe status indicator of this unit is lit green

j is displayed on the screen

Setting up a connection manually

Network authentication type Encryption types that can be set

[Open] [NONE]/[WEP]

[WEP] There is no setup of an encryption types.

[WPA-PSK]/[WPA2-PSK] [TKIP]/[AES]





A[Delete]

B[ENTER]

- 189 -

9(When selecting [WEP]/[TKIP]/[AES])

Touch [INPUT], then enter the Password.

≥For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 116.

≥When the entry is complete, touch [Enter].

≥A message is displayed when the connection is complete. Touch [ENTER], and exit [Wireless

Settings].

≥Check the wireless access points instruction manual and settings when a saving wireless access

point.

≥The Encryption methods are [AES], [TKIP] and [WEP] in descending order of strength. We

recommend you connect with the strongest possible Encryption method.

≥When the signal of the wireless access point is weak, a connection may not be established. Refer

to “Messages” (l238) and “Troubleshooting” (l240) for details.

≥Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is

used in.

Setting up a connection manually

Setting up a direct connection to a smartphone

Check the [Direct Connection Password] setting in [Wi-Fi Setup]. (l195)

≥The default setting is [OFF].

Select [ON] as needed, for example when the setting seems necessary for your Wi-Fi

environment.

≥When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]

jProceed to the following section, “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]” in

“Using [Link to Cell] with a direct connection”. (l159)

≥When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]

If your smartphone is compatible with WPS, refer to “[WPS Connection]”. If not, refer to

“Connecting with QR code”.

[HC-WXF991PP]/[HC-VX981PP]:

Enter SSID and Password or scan QR code to connect.

jProceed to the following [WPS Connection]

jProceed to the “Connecting with QR code” (l190)

jProceed to the “Connecting by entering an SSID and Password” (l191)

When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, refer to “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]”

in “Using [Link to Cell] with a direct connection”. (l160)

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

2Touch [Direct Connection].

3Touch [Change connection type].

4Touch [WPS Connection].

Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete

jThe status indicator of this unit is lit green

j is displayed on the screen

[WPS Connection]

- 190 -

5Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.

6Set the smartphone to WPS Mode.

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

2Touch [Direct Connection].

3Touch [Change connection type].

4Touch [QR code].

≥QR code is displayed on the screen of this unit.

5Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

6On the smartphone, select [QR code], and scan the QR code displayed on the

screen of this unit.

≥When using an Android device, the smartphone and this unit are connected directly, allowing you

to use remote operations.

Control this unit remotely with the smartphone. (l161)

For information on how to exit [Link to Cell], refer to page 160.

≥When using an iOS device, perform the following operations:

1Select the option that allows you to install the app on the profile screen of the “Image App”, and

follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

2Press the home button to close the displayed screen.

3Select the network name (SSID) of this unit from the Wi-Fi setup of the smartphone.

≥When the QR code cannot be scanned, refer to “Connecting by entering an SSID and Password”.

Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete

jThe status indicator of this unit is lit green

j is displayed on the screen

Connecting with QR code

Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete

jThe status indicator of this unit is lit green

j is displayed on the screen

- 191 -

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

2Touch [Direct Connection].

3Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.

4On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this

unit.

5Enter the Password displayed on this unit’s screen on the smartphone.

≥Transmission speed may decrease, or may not be usable depending on the environment it is

used in.

Connecting from the history

Each use of a Wi-Fi function is stored in the Wi-Fi connection history. Connecting from the history

allows you to easily set up a connection using the previous connection settings.

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [History].

2Touch the desired item to be connected.

≥

The history of Wi-Fi functions and connection destinations that have been used is displayed as a list.

≥For periods when a smartphone, etc. and this unit were connected directly, only the list of Wi-Fi

functions is displayed.

Each item stores its [Direct Connection Password] setting (l195). Connections without a

password are displayed with [No Password] on the history list.

≥To display the connection details, touch [DETAIL].

3Touch [ENTER].

≥When the connection is complete, a message will be displayed and the screen will switch to the

Wi-Fi function screen selected in Step 2. Perform the operation of the selected Wi-Fi function.

≥If you have selected [Link to Cell], start up the smartphone application “Image App” after checking

that “Under smartphone control.” is displayed on the LCD monitor.

If the connection cannot be established, check the Wi-Fi setup of the smartphone.

≥The history can store up to 8 most-recently used Wi-Fi connections.

≥In the following cases, the Wi-Fi connection will not be stored in the history:

jIf you set up a Wi-Fi connection from [Wireless Settings] in [Wi-Fi Setup]

jIf you set up a Wi-Fi connection for the Wireless Multi-Camera function (l207)

Connecting by entering an SSID and Password

Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete

jThe status indicator of this unit is lit green

j is displayed on the screen

Confirming that the Wi-Fi connection is complete

jThe status indicator of this unit is lit green

jThe following icons are displayed on the screen:

When connected to wireless access point:

When directly connected:

- 192 -

If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established

≥Please refer to the operating instruction of the device in use for details about the setting of the

wireless access point or smartphone.

Problem Check points

It cannot connect to the

wireless access point.

The wireless access point

is not detected.

(General)

≥Turn ON the wireless access point.

≥Approach the wireless access point and reconnect.

≥If it takes time to complete the connection, the Wi-Fi

connection will be aborted.

Reset the connection settings.

≥Check how to connect to the wireless access point and how

to set the security settings.

≥If the wireless access point supports both the 2.4 GHz band

and the 5 GHz band, check if the setting for the 2.4 GHz band

is enabled.

≥Make sure the wireless access point is registered in this unit.

(l194)

≥The device may be unable to locate the wireless access point

due to problems with the signal. Refer to “Setting up a

connection manually”. (l188)

([WPS Connection])

≥Make sure the wireless access point is in the correct WPS

standby mode.

≥Make sure the PIN code has been correctly input.

([Search for wireless network] or [Manual Setting])

≥Make sure the SSID and password have been correctly input.

≥Check the Authentication method, Encryption type, and

Encryption key (Password).

Radio waves of the

wireless access point get

disconnected.

≥The condition may improved by moving the location or

changing the angle of the wireless access point.

≥If you use another 2.4 GHz band device such as a microwave

oven or cordless telephone nearby, you may interrupt the

signal. Keep a sufficient distance from these types of devices.

- 193 -

The Wi-Fi connection is

not possible between this

unit and a smartphone.

(Wireless Access Point Connection)

≥Make sure the smartphone is properly connected to the

wireless access point by checking the Wi-Fi settings of the

smartphone.

≥Make sure this unit and the smartphone are connected to the

same wireless access point.

≥Make sure the wireless access point is registered in this unit.

(l194)

(Direct Connection)

≥Check the Wi-Fi settings of the smartphone to see if the SSID

of this unit is selected so that a Wi-Fi connection will be made

from the smartphone to this unit.

≥Make sure the SSID and password have been correctly input.

≥Make sure the smartphone is not connected to the wireless

access point. If it is connected to the wireless access point,

change the Wi-Fi access point using the smartphone’s Wi-Fi

set up.

It takes long time every

time to connect to a

smartphone.

≥It may take longer time to connect depending on the Wi-Fi

connection setting of the smartphone, but it is not a

malfunction.

This unit is not displayed

in the Wi-Fi setting screen

of the smartphone.

≥Try switching the ON/OFF of the Wi-Fi function in the Wi-Fi

settings of the smartphone.

The Wi-Fi connection is

disconnected immediately.

≥If there is a setting for avoiding poor connections in the Wi-Fi

setting menu of the Android device 4.0 or later version, turn it

OFF.

When this unit is

connected to a wireless

access point and “Image

App” is started up, it

cannot find this unit.

≥Close “Image App”, and press the Wi-Fi button on this unit to

terminate the Wi-Fi connection. After that, reconnect this unit

to the wireless access point, and start up “Image App”.

Problem Check points

- 194 -

Configure various settings necessary to use the Wi-Fi function.

When connected to Wi-Fi, the settings cannot be changed.

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

2Touch desired menu item.

You can add or delete wireless access points, or rearrange the display order of wireless access

points.

≥Up to 3 wireless access points can be set.

≥Please refer to page 186 for details about [Wireless Settings].

To add a wireless access point

1Touch the part where no wireless access points

are displayed D.

2Configure the wireless access point settings.

(l186)

To delete a wireless access point

1Touch the wireless access point to be deleted.

2Touch [Delete].

≥The message is displayed. Touch [YES] to delete.

To switch the search order

1Touch the access point you want to switch the order.

2Switch the order by touching or .

≥To change the wireless access point, delete one of the registered wireless access points, and

then add one.

Please refer to page 185.

Please refer to page 189.

Wi-Fi

How to Use the [Wi-Fi Setup] Menu

[Wireless Settings]

[Wi-Fi Setup Wizard]

[Direct Connection]







A[Wireless Settings]

B[Delete]

C[ENTER]

- 195 -

This setting controls whether or not a password is required when you directly connect this unit and a

smartphone to start remote operations or to use the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function.

≥If you select [OFF], you can directly connect this unit and a smartphone without entering the

password for this unit’s SSID into the smartphone.

≥If you select [OFF], you cannot set up a connection with [WPS Connection] or [QR code].

Set up a connection by setting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone. (l159, 203, 207)

≥The default setting is [OFF]. If you perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings], the default setting will be

restored. (l44, 196)

You can use this unit as a Wireless Sub Camera.

For the connection procedure and other details, check the website below.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam

≥This function is not available when [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p].

Please refer to page 198.

Please refer to page 170.

If you set [ON], the LCD monitor turns off when remotely operating this unit with a smartphone (in

Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still Picture Recording Mode) so that power consumption is

reduced.

≥When the LCD monitor is turned off, you can display the screen by touching it.

≥If the Wi-Fi connection is turned off, this unit will turn off automatically approximately 15 minutes

later.

[Direct Connection

Password]

[ON]/[OFF]

[Wireless Sub Camera]

[LUMIX CLUB]

[Home Monitor Connect]

[ECONOMY (Wi-Fi)] [ON]/[OFF]

- 196 -

This will set/clear the Password to limit the startup of the Wi-Fi setting menu.

By setting the Password, it will prevent erroneous operation, prevent wrongful use of the Wi-Fi

function by third party, and protect the set personal information.

1Touch [Setup].

2Touch [INPUT], and enter the Password (6 characters).

≥After finish entering the Password, touch [Enter].

≥If the Password has already been set, is displayed.

≥For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 116.

3Touch [NEXT].

4Touch [INPUT], and enter the same Password again.

≥After finish entering the Password, touch [Enter].

≥If the Passwords match with each other, a message is displayed.

5Touch [EXIT].

≥If you set the Wi-Fi Password, you will need to enter the Password each time you touch [Wi-Fi

Setup] on the Wi-Fi home screen.

≥When you forget your Wi-Fi Password, perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] from the Setup menu. This

will set the Wi-Fi setting to the condition at the time of purchase, and you will be able to use the

Wi-Fi setting menu. (l44)

You can change the Wi-Fi setting back to the default condition.

≥The “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Wi-Fi Password are also deleted.

≥Information on wireless access points, smartphones, and Wireless Sub Cameras registered to

this unit is also deleted.

You can view and change this unit’s Device name (SSID), which is used for operating this unit as a

wireless access point.

1Touch [INPUT], and enter the desired Device name (SSID).

≥Input up to 20 characters are recommended. All the characters cannot be confirmed when

displaying the Device names on this unit if a long Device name is used. (l159, 191, 203, 207)

≥For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 116.

≥Touch [Enter].

2Touch [EXIT].

≥If you are going to connect directly to a smartphone after changing the Device name (SSID), set

the connection again with the changed Device name (SSID). (l159, 191, 203, 207)

≥The Password entered during the setting of direct connection cannot be changed. (l191, 203,

207)

[Menu Password] [Setup]/[Delete]

[Reset Wi-Fi Settings]

[Device Name]

- 197 -

You can change or check your wireless LAN’s network settings, such as the [IP Address], [Subnet

Mask] and [MAC Address].

≥If you touch [AUTO], the network settings are configured automatically. If you touch [MANUAL],

you can set each item. Select the item you want to set, and set it.

≥[MAC Address] cannot be changed.

You can test the connection between this unit and the wireless access point. The following

connections can be verified:

jConnection to the wireless access point

jConnection to “LUMIX CLUB”

jConnection to USTREAM

jConnection to the home monitor server

1Touch [NEXT].

≥The connection test starts.

2Check the connection test result, and touch [EXIT].

≥If the connection is successful, “±” is displayed. If the connection is not successful, “t” is

displayed.

≥To test the connection to “LUMIX CLUB” or USTREAM, you need to make other settings in

advance. (l178)

You can change the workgroup setting.

≥When copying scenes or still pictures to a PC using a Wi-Fi function [Copy], you need to create a

shared folder on the PC and connect this unit to the workgroup to which the PC belongs. (The

default setting is [WORKGROUP].)

≥For information on how to create a shared folder, refer to page 174.

≥For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 116.

≥A maximum of 15 characters can be entered.

[IP Address/DNS

Settings]

[IP Address]/[Subnet Mask]/[Gateway]/[Primary DNS]/[Secondary DNS]/[MAC Address]

[Connection Test]

[PC Connect Setup] [Change]/[Return to default]

[Change]: Enter the name of the workgroup to which the destination PC belongs.

[Return to default]: This will set to the condition at the time of purchase.

- 198 -

Acquire a “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID (free).

You can upload the scenes and still pictures recorded with this unit to WEB service with [Link to

Cell] or use the [Live Cast] function if you register to “LUMIX CLUB”.

≥You can set the same “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID for this unit and a smartphone.

When Login ID is acquired over the smartphone (“Image App”) only, it is possible to register the

same Login ID to this unit using the “Image App”. (l199)

When different Login IDs are acquired for this unit and the smartphone, change one of the Login

ID and Password to the one you like to keep.

≥Set a wireless access point in [Wireless Settings]. (l186)

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

2Touch [LUMIX CLUB].

3Touch [Add/Change Account].

4Touch [New account].

≥Connect to the network. Proceed to the next page by touching [NEXT].

5Read through the “LUMIX CLUB” terms then touch [Agree].

≥Touch [EXIT] to cancel the process without acquiring a Login ID.

6Touch [NEXT] and enter a Password.

≥Enter any combination of 8 to 16 characters and numbers for the Password.

≥For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 116.

7Check the Login ID and touch [OK].

≥The Login ID (12-digit number) will be displayed automatically. When logging in to the “LUMIX

CLUB” with a computer, you only need to enter the numbers.

≥Be sure to make a note of the Login ID and Password.

∫Check or change the acquired Login ID/Password

≥To change the “LUMIX CLUB” Password on this unit, access the “LUMIX CLUB” website from

your smartphone or PC and change the “LUMIX CLUB” Password in advance.

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

2Touch [LUMIX CLUB].

3Touch [Add/Change Account].

4Touch [

Change Account

≥The Login ID and Password are displayed.

≥The Password is displayed as “ ”.

5Touch [

] or [Password].

6Enter the Login ID or Password, and touch [Enter].

≥For details on how to enter characters, refer to page 116.

≥Input the Password that was changed with the smartphone or the PC.

Using the “LUMIX CLUB”

Refer to the “LUMIX CLUB” site for details.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

- 199 -

∫Register the Login ID of the smartphone (“Image App”) into this unit

It is convenient to match the Login IDs for this unit and the smartphone (“Image App”) when using

the Wi-Fi function utilizing the “LUMIX CLUB”.

1Connect this unit to the smartphone.

2From the “Image App” menu, set the common Login ID.

∫Check the “LUMIX CLUB” terms of use

Check the details if the terms of use have been updated.

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

2Touch [LUMIX CLUB].

3Touch [Terms of use].

≥This unit will connect to the network and the terms of use will be displayed. Touch [EXIT] to close

the menu after checking the terms of use.

∫Delete your Login ID and account from the “LUMIX CLUB”

Delete the Login ID from this unit when transferring it to another party or disposing of it. You can

also delete your “LUMIX CLUB” account.

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [Wi-Fi Setup].

2Touch [LUMIX CLUB].

3Touch [Delete account].

≥The message is displayed. Touch [NEXT].

4Touch [YES] in the Login ID delete confirmation screen.

≥The message is displayed. Touch [NEXT].

5Touch [YES] on the confirmation screen for deleting the “LUMIX CLUB”

account.

≥The message is displayed. Touch [NEXT].

≥If you are not deleting the “LUMIX CLUB” account, only the Login ID will be erased when [NO] is

selected.

6Touch [EXIT].

≥Changes and other actions to Login IDs can only be made to the Login ID acquired with this unit.

When sending images to WEB services, the WEB service being used must be registered with the

“LUMIX CLUB”. Registering multiple WEB services will send images to all services simultaneously.

≥Check the “FAQ/Contact us” on the following site for compatible WEB services.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

Preparation:

Make sure that you have created an account on the WEB service you want to use, and have the

1Connect to the “LUMIX CLUB” site using a smartphone or computer.

2Enter your “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Password and log in to the service.

3Save your e-mail address.

4Select the WEB service to be used and save it.

≥Follow the instructions on the screen to save the service.

Using WEB services

- 200 -

When this unit and one or more smartphones are connected via Wi-Fi, you can display the image

transmitted from the smartphone on this unit’s Sub Window and record it simultaneously with the

Main Camera’s image. (Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera)

* only

Use your Wireless Sub Camera to enjoy recording your own face or any scenery different from what

is being recorded with the Main Camera.

CSub Window

≥The image transmitted from the Wireless Sub Camera is displayed on the Sub Window.

∫Wireless Twin Camera function

Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera

Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function

≥In this owner’s manual, a function that displays an image from one smartphone in one Sub

Window is referred to as “Wireless Twin Camera”, and a function that displays images

from up to three smartphones and the Sub Camera of this unit* in two Sub Windows is

referred to as “Wireless Multi-Camera”.

Recording different types

of subjects in one image

Recording the same subject

from different angles

Recording a view seen

from the subject

This owner’s manual describe the procedure for connecting this unit and a smartphone.

For information on non-smartphone devices that support the Wireless Sub Camera

function and the procedures for using them, check the support website below. (As of

November 2015)

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam

WXF991





ASmartphone (Wireless Sub Camera)

BThis unit (Main Camera)



- 201 -

∫Wireless Multi-Camera function

Connecting multiple smartphones to this unit via Wi-Fi allows you to simultaneously display two Sub

Windows and record images in them.

Up to three smartphones can be connected simultaneously. (l207)

(For the )

≥You can also use the Sub Camera of this unit*.

* When the LCD monitor is either closed or closed with the screen facing outward, the Sub Camera

does not work. Open the LCD monitor.

WXF991

- 202 -

Notes on the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function

The performance of the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function varies depending on the surrounding

radio wave conditions. Since the human body blocks radio waves, it is also influenced by how

crowded the area is.

∫Recording tips

≥Use your Wireless Sub Camera in a position where as much of it as possible can be seen from

the position of this unit.

≥When the signal between this unit and the Wireless Sub Camera weakens, a warning icon

appears. In such a case, close the distance between them.

≥We recommend that you attach a tripod to this unit when recording.

∫When using a smartphone as a Wireless Sub Camera

≥The Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function commands the smartphone to process images and

transmit Wi-Fi signals.

≥Image processing performance, Wi-Fi signal transmission performance, and the antenna location

vary depending on the smartphone.

≥The Sub Window’s image, which is transmitted from the smartphone, is displayed with a slight

delay compared to the Main camera’s image.

≥Depending on the device and environment, movement in the image transmitted from the

smartphone may not look smooth or may look as if frames were missed. This is particularly the

case with vertical orientation, which increases the smartphone’s processing burden.

≥For information on the setup of your smartphone, refer to its operating instructions.

≥Please also refer to “If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established”. (l192)

Keep the following points in mind when using a smartphone as a Wireless Twin/Multi-

Camera:

≥We recommend that you use an Android device with a Quad Core or higher CPU or the latest

iOS device.

≥We recommend that you look at the image transmitted from your smartphone in advance to

check the optimal recording distance for the smartphone, the easiest way to hold it, and other

recording conditions.

≥We recommend that you turn off the smartphone’s GPS and Bluetooth functions, which may

affect the Wireless Sub Camera’s image.

≥We recommend that you close as many other applications as possible.

≥Recording consumes a large amount of battery power. When recording for a long period of

time, pay attention to the remaining battery power.

- 203 -

When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a

Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the

Wireless Twin Camera function)

≥(For the )

Exit the Twin Camera function. (l53)

≥The default setting for [Direct Connection Password] is [OFF].

≥The QR code is not displayed when [Direct Connection Password] (l195) is set to [OFF].

Refer to “Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection”

1(When using the Wi-Fi menu screen)

Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [TWIN

CAMERA].

Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera

Using a Smartphone as a Wireless Sub

Camera

≥You need to turn on the Wi-Fi function of your smartphone.

≥Set [REC FORMAT] to [AVCHD] or [MP4/iFrame].

≥Install the smartphone application “Image App” on your smartphone. (l183)

Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection

WXF991

1/2





A[TWIN CAMERA]

B[EXIT]

- 204 -

(When using the recording screen)

Touch the recording screen on this unit and

touch .

2Touch [Smartphone] on the screen of this

unit.

3Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the

smartphone’s setup menu.

≥When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]

Proceed to the “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]”. (l205)

≥When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]

Proceed to the “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]”. (l205)

 





A[Wireless Twin Camera]

B[Smartphone]

C[Other Camera]

D[CANCEL]

- 205 -

4On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this

unit.

≥It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.

5When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the

smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

6(If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit)

Confirm the message, and touch [YES] on the screen of this unit.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the image being captured by the smartphone will be

displayed on the Sub Window of this unit.

4Touch [Wi-Fi] on the screen of this unit.

5On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this

unit.

≥If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit via Wi-Fi, enter the Password

displayed on this unit’s screen on the smartphone.

≥It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.

6When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the

smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the image being captured by the smartphone will be

displayed on the Sub Window of this unit.

≥The following operations allow you to register up to ten smartphones. If the number exceeds ten,

smartphone information with the oldest registration date and time will be deleted.

jSetting [Direct Connection Password] to [OFF] and connecting this unit and a smartphone

directly.

≥Set [Direct Connection Password] to [ON]. (l195)

1(When using the Wi-Fi menu screen)

Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch [TWIN

CAMERA].

When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]

When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]

Scanning a QR code to set up a connection

1/2





A[TWIN CAMERA]

B[EXIT]

- 206 -

(When using the recording screen)

Touch the recording screen on this unit and

touch .

2Touch [Smartphone] on the screen of this

unit.

3Touch [QR code] on the screen of this unit.

4Start up the smartphone application

“Image App”.

5On the smartphone, select [QR code] to scan the QR code displayed on the

screen of this unit.

≥When using an iOS device, perform the following operations:

1Select the option that allows you to install the app on the profile screen of the “Image App”, and

follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.

2Press the home button to close the displayed screen.

3Touch [NEXT] on the screen of this unit to display its SSID.

4After selecting the network name (SSID) of this unit from the Wi-Fi setup of the smartphone,

start up “Image App”.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the image being captured by the smartphone will be

displayed on the Sub Window of this unit.

≥If the QR code cannot be scanned, refer to “Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set

up a connection”. (l203)

 





A[Wireless Twin Camera]

B[Smartphone]

C[Other Camera]

D[CANCEL]

- 207 -

When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a

Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the

Wireless Multi-Camera function)

≥The default setting for [Direct Connection Password] is [OFF].

≥The QR code is not displayed when [Direct Connection Password] (l195) is set to [OFF].

Refer to “Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection”.

≥Up to three smartphones can be connected simultaneously.

≥You cannot register one smartphone as multiple Wireless Sub Cameras.

3Turn on the Wi-Fi function in the smartphone’s setup menu.

≥When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]

Proceed to the “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]”. (l208)

≥When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]

Proceed to the “When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]”. (l208)

Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch

[Multi Camera].

2Touch [Unregistered] to register the

smartphone to be connected.

≥Touching [Unregistered] will start a Wi-Fi connection.

1/2



A[Multi Camera]

B[EXIT]

 

C[Unregistered]

D[Reset]

E[ENTER]

- 208 -

On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this unit.

≥It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.

5When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the

smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

(If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit)

Confirm the message “Connect this smartphone?”, and touch [YES] on the screen of this unit.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the device name of the smartphone will be

displayed on the registration screen in Step 2.

≥Repeat Steps 2–6 to register and use two or more smartphones.

≥(For the )

When using the Sub Camera of this unit, you can use the Wireless Multi-Camera function with

only one registered smartphone. Rotate the Sub Camera to enable it. (l51)

7Touch [ENTER] to complete the registration.

The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit or the image being captured

by the Sub Camera of this unit* will be displayed in a Sub Window of this unit.

* Displayed if you have connected one smartphone to this unit and enabled the Sub Camera of this unit.

The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit will be displayed in a Sub

Window of this unit.

≥If you touch , the registration will be canceled.

4Touch [Wi-Fi] on the screen of this unit.

On the smartphone’s Wi-Fi setting screen, select the SSID displayed on this unit.

≥If this is the first time the smartphone is connecting to this unit via Wi-Fi, enter the Password

displayed on this unit’s screen on the smartphone.

≥It may take time to complete the Wi-Fi connection.

6When the Wi-Fi connection is complete, press the home button on the

smartphone and start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the device name of the smartphone will be

displayed on the registration screen in Step 2.

≥Repeat Steps 2–6 to register and use two or more smartphones.

≥(For the )

When using the Sub Camera of this unit, you can use the Wireless Multi-Camera function with

only one registered smartphone. Rotate the Sub Camera to enable it. (l51)

7Touch [ENTER] to complete the registration.

The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit or the image being captured

by the Sub Camera of this unit* will be displayed in a Sub Window of this unit.

* Displayed if you have connected one smartphone to this unit and enabled the Sub Camera of this unit.

The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit will be displayed in a Sub Window of this unit.

≥If you touch , the registration will be canceled.

When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [OFF]

≥(For the )

When [Direct Connection Password] is set to [ON]

≥(For the )

WXF991

VX981

WXF991

VX981

- 209 -

≥Set [Direct Connection Password] to [ON]. (l195)

3Touch [QR code] on the screen of this unit.

4Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

5On the smartphone, select [QR code] to scan the QR code displayed on the

screen of this unit.

≥When using an iOS device, refer to page 206 in Step 5.

≥When the connection to this unit is complete, the device name of the smartphone will be

displayed on the registration screen in Step 2.

≥If the QR code cannot be scanned, refer to “Selecting this unit’s SSID on the smartphone to set

up a connection”. (l207)

≥Repeat Steps 2–5 to register and use two or more smartphones.

≥(For the )

When using the Sub Camera of this unit, you can use the Wireless Multi-Camera function with

only one registered smartphone. Rotate the Sub Camera to enable it. (l51)

6Touch [ENTER] to complete the registration.

≥(For the )

The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit or the image being captured

by the Sub Camera of this unit* will be displayed in a Sub Window of this unit.

* Displayed if you have connected one smartphone to this unit and enabled the Sub Camera of this unit.

≥(For the )

The image being captured by the smartphone connected to this unit will be displayed in a Sub

Window of this unit.

≥If you touch , the registration will be canceled.

Scanning a QR code to set up a connection

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch

[Multi Camera].

2Touch [Unregistered] to register the

smartphone to be connected.

≥Touching [Unregistered] will start a Wi-Fi connection.

1/2



A[Multi Camera]

B[EXIT]

 

C[Unregistered]

D[Reset]

E[ENTER]

WXF991

VX981

- 210 -

≥You cannot connect devices other than smartphones for the Wireless Multi-Camera function.

≥Changing the [Direct Connection Password] setting clears registered smartphones.

≥When you have made a connection with [Direct Connection Password] set to [ON], connect the

second and subsequent smartphones with the same setting. The smartphones can be connected

even if different connection methods, [Wi-Fi] and [QR code], are used for them.

≥The following operation allows you to register up to ten smartphones. If the number exceeds ten,

smartphone information with the oldest registration date and time will be deleted. (Smartphones

may become unregistered when you use the Wireless Multi-Camera function.)

Setting [Direct Connection Password] to [OFF] and connecting this unit and a smartphone directly.

≥

You can also switch the image in the Sub Window. Refer to “Switching the image in the Sub Window” on page 217.

When connecting for the second time or later

Touch the recording screen on this unit and touch .

Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

≥

This unit and the smartphone will be connected via Wi-Fi. When the

connection to this unit is complete, the image being captured by the

smartphone will be displayed on the Sub Window of this unit.

≥If the connection cannot be established or no image appears

on the Sub Window, follow the steps below to set up the connection again:

1Close the smartphone application “Image App”.

2Touch the recording screen of this unit again and touch .

3Touch [Change Device] on the screen of this unit.

After completing the steps above, follow the procedure from Step 2 onwards in “Selecting this unit’s

SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection” in “When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a

Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the Wireless Twin Camera function)”. (l203)

≥

[History] allows you to set up a Wi-Fi connection with the Wi-Fi function settings you have used before. (

191)

To use the last connected smartphones

Start up the smartphone application “Image App”.

To use the Wireless Twin Camera function

To use the Wireless Multi-Camera function

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch

[Multi Camera].

Touch [ENTER].

1/2



A[Multi Camera]

B[EXIT]

- 211 -

≥

This unit and the smartphone will be connected via Wi-Fi. When the connection to this unit is complete,

the image being captured by the smartphone will be displayed on the Sub Window of this unit.

≥If the connection cannot be established or no image appears on the Sub Window, follow the steps

below to set up the connection again:

1Touch the screen of this unit and touch .

2Touch [Change Device] on the screen of this unit.

Close the smartphone application “Image App”, and then touch [Reset] on the device registration screen.

4Touch [YES].

After completing the steps above, follow the procedure from Step 2 onwards in “Selecting this unit’s

SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection” in “When connecting a smartphone to this unit as a

Wireless Sub Camera for the first time (To use the Wireless Multi-Camera function)”. (l207)

To replace the registered smartphones

To clear all of the registered smartphones

Close the smartphone application “Image App”, and then touch [Reset] on the device

registration screen.

≥A message will be displayed. Touching [YES] will clear all the registered information, and device

names will be indicated as [Unregistered].

≥

Wi-Fi connections made with the Wireless Multi-Camera function are not saved as records in [History].

Terminating the connection

1Touch the recording screen on this unit and

touch .

2Touch [EXIT] on the screen of this unit.

≥The Wi-Fi connection will be terminated.

≥Close the “Image App” on the smartphone.

≥You can also terminate the connection by pressing the Wi-Fi button on this unit.

If you press the Wi-Fi button during recording pause, a message will be displayed. To terminate

the connection, touch [YES].

1Press Wi-Fi button on this unit and touch

[Multi Camera].

2Touch the name of the registered device you

want to replace.

≥Close the smartphone application “Image App”, and then

follow the procedure from Step 3 on page 207.

≥To set up a connection by scanning a QR code, follow

the procedure from Step 3 on page 209.

≥

When the connection to this unit is complete, the device

name will be changed to that of the newly-registered device.

 

C[Reset]

D[ENTER]

- 212 -

1Connect a smartphone to this unit as a Wireless Sub Camera. (l203, 207)

2Start recording.

≥Recording and Sub Window operations cannot be performed until all of the Sub Windows are

displayed.

Screen display when using a Wireless Sub Camera

∫Connection status icons for a Wireless Sub Camera

Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera

Recording with a Wireless Sub Camera

(Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera)

≥(For the )

The Sub Camera of this unit is not available for the Wireless Twin Camera function.

≥An image recorded with the Main Camera and the Wireless Sub Camera’s image

displayed on the Sub Window are recorded as a single scene or still picture*. When you

play back such a scene or still picture, it is not possible to delete only the Sub Window

image or hide it.

≥If you set [Backup for Twin Camera] to [ON], when recording images with the Wireless

Twin/Multi-Camera function, you can also record the Main Camera’s image without the

Sub Window image as a separate scene. (l57)

* When the Wireless Multi-Camera function is in use, still pictures cannot be recorded.

ALit green

≥The status indicator (l9) is lit green when the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function is

activated.

≥When Wi-Fi is disconnected, the status indicator is lit red again.

When a Wireless Sub Camera is connected :

BWhen using the Wireless Twin Camera function

The display will change as follows according to the radio wave intensity: (Weak) #

# # (Strong).

CWhen using the Wireless Multi-Camera function (example: Wireless Sub Camera 1)

The display will change as follows according to the radio wave intensity: (Weak) #

# # (Strong).

≥The number for the icon varies depending on the selected Wireless Sub Camera. (1–3)

WXF991







- 213 -

When the Wi-Fi signal weakens

If the signal weakens when the Sub Window is displayed, the connection status icon changes to

/ (Weak) and / flashes on the Sub Window.

If the signal weakens further, the connection status icon changes to / and the Sub

Window image disappears.

≥You cannot perform the following operation of the Sub Window:

jChanging the display position of the Sub Window (Only for Wireless Twin Camera)

jChanging the color of the Sub Window frame

When using the Wireless Twin Camera function

When using the Wireless Multi-Camera function

(When the signal condition for Wireless Sub Camera 1 weakens)

≥You can operate the Sub Window again when the signal becomes stronger.

≥Your Wi-Fi connection may be terminated depending on the smartphone.

- 214 -

∫Displaying or hiding the Sub Window

Touch .

≥Each time you touch the icon, you can display or hide the

Sub Window.

≥When the Sub Window is hidden, the Sub Window will not be

recorded.

∫Sub Window size when using a Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera

The size of the image displayed on the Sub Window varies depending on the smartphone camera

and the orientation of the smartphone.

Example: Sub Window display when the Main Camera’s aspect ratio is set to 16:9

(The yellow frames correspond to the size of the image be displayed on the Sub Window.)

* Depending on the smartphone, it may not be possible to use horizontal orientation.

Smartphone orientation Vertical Horizontal*

Sub Window display

- 215 -

Changing the Wireless Twin Camera settings

1Touch Sub Window.

2Touch the display position you want to change.

≥Depending on the display position of the Sub Window, the

positions of the icons displayed on the screen may change.

1Touch Sub Window.

2Touch .

3Touch , and select the desired frame.

Changing the display position of the Sub Window

Changing the color of the Sub Window frame

1 : Pink

2 : Green

3 : Orange

4 : Gray

5 : Drop shadow*

6 : No frame

* This adds a drop shadow on the right and bottom sides.







 



A[FRAMING]

- 216 -

Changing the Wireless Multi-Camera settings

1Touch Sub Window to be changed.

≥The selected Sub Window will be highlighted in yellow.

2Touch the display position you want to change.

≥Depending on the display position of the Sub Window, the

positions of the icons displayed on the screen may change.

≥You cannot move a Sub Window to the display positions for

the other Sub Window.

1Touch Sub Window to be changed.

2Touch .

3Touch , and select the desired frame.

Changing the display position of the Sub Window

Changing the color of the Sub Window frame

1 : Pink

2 : Green

3 : Orange

4 : Gray

5 : Drop shadow*

6 : No frame

* This adds a drop shadow on the right and bottom sides.







 



A[FRAMING]

- 217 -

1Touch Sub Window to be switched.

≥The selected Sub Window will be highlighted in yellow.

≥The Sub Camera select icons will be displayed and the selected icon will be highlighted in yellow.

2Touch the desired icon to switch the image in the Sub Window.

≥(For the )

If you have touched (Sub Camera of this unit), rotate the Sub Camera of this unit to enable

it.*

* When the LCD monitor is closed with the screen facing outward, the Sub Camera does not work.

Open the LCD monitor.

≥If you have touched / / (Wireless Sub Camera 1/2/3), connect the registered

smartphone to this unit and start up “Image App”.

≥In the following cases, the Sub Window frame will be displayed on the LCD monitor of this unit,

but it will not be recorded. After the Sub Camera select icons disappear, the Sub Window is

displayed in semi-transparent gray.

jWhen you leave the Sub Camera of this unit closed even after touching (Sub Camera of

this unit)

jWhen the registered smartphone that you have selected by touching / /

(Wireless Sub Camera 1/2/3) is not connected to this unit, or when the Wi-Fi signal between

the smartphone and this unit is weak.

jWhen you have touched (OFF)

≥(For the )

When the image for a Sub Window is set to (Sub Camera of this unit), the following Sub

Window settings can be changed:

jChanging the size of the Sub Window（l54）

jZooming in/out the Sub Window (l54)

jSetting and adjusting the Sub Camera and the Sub Window（WB/Brightness/Focus/Narration

Mode）（l55）

Switching the image in the Sub Window

: Displays the image from the Sub Camera of this unit

().

: Displays the image from Wireless Sub Camera 1.

: Displays the image from Wireless Sub Camera 2.

: Displays the image from Wireless Sub Camera 3.

: OFF

WXF991

ASub Camera select icons

WXF991

- 218 -

1Touch Sub Window to be swapped.

≥The selected Sub Window will be highlighted in yellow.

≥The Sub Camera select icons will be displayed and the

selected icon will be highlighted in yellow.

2Touch the icon selected for the other Sub

Window.

≥The Sub Window images will be swapped.

≥It takes some time until the Sub Window appears.

≥You cannot set this unit to Playback Mode when it is connected to a Wireless Sub Camera.

≥The following button icons may not be displayed when the Sub Window is displayed. To display

them, touch the Main Camera’s image on the screen.

≥The following functions do not work:

≥The following functions do not work when the Sub Window is displayed:

≥The following settings are disabled when a Wireless Sub Camera’s image is displayed in a Sub

Window:

jSub Window settings (WB/Brightness/Focus/Narration)

jMagnification level and size of the Sub Window

≥Depending on recording conditions, the color balance, brightness and other settings may differ

between the Main Camera and the Wireless Sub Camera.

Swapping the images between the Sub Windows

j (Touch Menu)

j/ (Zoom button icons)

j (Recording button icon)

jRecording Mode button icon (l59)

jCreative Control Mode

jHDR Movie Mode

jFULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode

j4K Photo Mode

jStop Motion Animation Assist Mode

jSetup menu items

jEye-Fi transfer feature

jSwitching to other Wi-Fi functions

jRemote Pan Tilt Cradle

jRecording format [4K MP4] or [24p]

j(For the )

Cinema Like Effect Mode

jTouch Shutter

j[FACE FRAMING]

jAF/AE tracking

jOptical Image Stabilizer Lock

jAF assist lamp

WXF991

- 219 -

≥Recording menu items, operation icons, and functions such as Image Stabilizer, Level Shot

Function and [QUICK POWER ON] work only for the Main Camera.

≥The Fade function’s image effects do not affect the Sub Window.

≥When the “Image App” screen disappears, image transmission to the Sub Window stops. (The

Wi-Fi connection stays connected.) This may occur when, for example, the smartphone receives

a call or you press the home button.

If you start up “Image App” on the smartphone again, image transmission to the Main Camera will

restart and the Sub Window will be displayed automatically.

≥You cannot record Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera images on the smartphone.

(While using the Wireless Twin Camera function)

≥When you record still pictures, it may take longer than usual to achieve focus. (l30)

≥Simultaneous recording of still pictures is not possible while recording a motion picture or using

PRE-REC.

≥If an image is not received from the Wireless Sub Camera selected for a Sub Window for

4 minutes (approx.) or more, the Wi-Fi connection will be terminated. (It will not be terminated

while motion picture is being recorded.)

(While using the Wireless Multi-Camera function)

≥This function is available only in Motion Picture Recording Mode. You cannot switch to Still

Picture Recording Mode or take still pictures.

≥If an image is not received from the Wireless Sub Camera selected for a Sub Window for

4 minutes (approx.) or more, the Wi-Fi connection will be terminated. (It will not be terminated

while motion picture is being recorded or an image is being received from either of the Sub

Windows.)

- 220 -

≥For information on the setup of your smartphone, refer to its operating instructions.

≥Please also refer to “If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established”. (l192)

Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera

If the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established

(Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera)

Problem Check points

Cannot connect this unit

to the smartphone.

No image on the Sub

Window.

≥Check the Wi-Fi settings of the smartphone to see if the SSID

of this unit is selected so that a Wi-Fi connection will be made

from the smartphone to this unit.

≥

If the smartphone is connected to a wireless access point or another

video camera that supports the Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera function,

after terminating the connection, select the SSID of this unit from the

smartphone’s Wi-Fi setup menu and restart the “Image App”.

≥

If you are unsure about the SSID of this unit, connecting to a

smartphone different from the previously connected smartphone or

changed the [Direct Connection Password] setting after connecting to a

smartphone, follow the steps below to set up the connection again:

(While using the Wireless Twin Camera function)

1Close the “Image App” on the smartphone.

2Press Wi-Fi button on this unit to exit the Wireless Twin

Camera function.

3Press Wi-Fi button again and touch [TWIN CAMERA].

Follow the procedure from Step 2 onwards in “Selecting this unit’s

SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection” in “When

connecting a smartphone to this unit as a Wireless Sub Camera for

the first time (To use the Wireless Twin Camera function)”. (

203)

(While using the Wireless Multi-Camera function)

1Close the “Image App” on the smartphone.

2Press Wi-Fi button on this unit to exit the Wireless Multi-

Camera function.

3Press Wi-Fi button again and touch [Multi Camera].

4Touch [Reset] on the device registration screen.

5Touch [YES].

Follow the procedure from Step 2 onwards in “Selecting this unit’s

SSID on the smartphone to set up a connection” in “When

connecting a smartphone to this unit as a Wireless Sub Camera for

the first time (To use the Wireless Multi-Camera function)”. (

207)

The Sub Window image is

interrupted.

The Sub Window image

disappears.

≥The Sub Window image is interrupted when the Wi-Fi signal

weakens. If the signal weakens further, the Sub Window

image disappears automatically.

≥

Depending on the orientation of this unit and the smartphone and the

distance between them, the image may be interrupted.

If the image reception is poor, close the distance and check

the connection status icon (l212) at the same time. You can

also point the Wi-Fi transmitter (l7) at the smartphone.

- 221 -

HD Writer AE 5.3

You can copy the motion/still picture data to the HDD of PCs or write to media like Blu-ray discs,

DVD discs or SD cards using HD Writer AE 5.3.

≥Refer to the operating instructions of HD Writer AE 5.3 (PDF file) for details on how to use it.

∫Smart Wizard

The Smart Wizard Screen is automatically displayed when you connect this unit to a PC with

HD Writer AE 5.3 installed. (l229)

Copy to PC:

You can copy motion/still picture data to the HDD of PCs.

Copy to disc:

You can copy to disc in high-definition picture quality or conventional standard picture quality

(MPEG2 format).

≥Select the function you wish to use and follow the on-screen instructions for easy copying.

With a PC

What you can do with a PC

Check the website below to download/install the software.

≥The software is available for download until the end of March 2019.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/f_ae53.html

What can be done with the HD Writer AE 5.3 Data type

Copying data to a PC

Motion picture

and still picture

Copying in Blu-ray disc/AVCHD format:

≥The scenes recorded in 1080/60p can be copied as 1080/60p.

(l222: Important Notice)

≥4K MP4 scenes, MP4/iFrame scenes or 24p scenes cannot be copied in

Blu-ray disc or in AVCHD format.

Copying in DVD-Video format:

≥Converted to conventional standard quality (MPEG2 format).

Motion picture

Editing:

Editing motion picture data copied on an HDD of a PC

≥Dividing, Trimming, Still picture, Title, Effect, Transition, BGM, Delete

partially

≥Converting part of motion picture into still picture

- 222 -

≥It is possible to play back still pictures on a PC using a image viewer standard to Windows or

commercially available image browsing software, and copy still pictures to a PC using Windows

Explorer.

≥Please refer to page 233 for details about using a Mac.

≥It is impossible to write data to this unit from a PC.

≥Motion pictures that have been recorded on another device cannot be written to the

HD Writer AE 5.3.

≥When motion picture data is written to and read from the SD card, correct operation of the unit

cannot be guaranteed if software other than HD Writer AE 5.3 is used.

≥Do not start HD Writer AE 5.3 and other software at the same time.

What can be done with the HD Writer AE 5.3 Data type

Online sharing:

You can upload motion pictures on the Internet and share them with your

family and friends.

Motion picture

Playing back on a PC:

Play back the motion picture and still picture data in high-definition picture

quality on a PC.

Motion picture

and still picture

Formatting discs:

Depending on the type of disc that you use, formatting is necessary. Motion picture

Important Notice

≥When using an SDXC Memory Card, check the following support site.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

≥Do not insert a disc recorded in AVCHD format with HD Writer AE 5.3 in a device that

does not support the AVCHD format. In some cases the disc may get stuck in the

device.

≥To play back a Blu-ray disc to which you have copied scenes recorded in 1080/60p,

equipment is required that supports AVCHD Progressive.

≥When inserting a disc containing recorded motion pictures into other devices, a

message prompting you to format the disc may be displayed. Do not format the disc,

since deleted data cannot be restored later.

- 223 -

Before Installing HD Writer AE 5.3

Your installation or use of the Software defined below shall be conclusively deemed to constitute

your acceptance of the terms of this Agreement. If you do not accept the terms of this Agreement,

do not install, nor use the Software.

End User License Agreement

You (“Licensee”) are granted a license for the

Software defined in this End User License

Agreement (“Agreement”) on condition that you

agree to the terms and conditions of this

Agreement.

The following terms contain material

representations regarding the disclaimers of

Panasonic Corporation. Be sure to read

through, understand and confirm the following

terms.

Article 1 License

Licensee is granted the right to use the

Software (the “Software” means the software

and other information such as manuals

downloaded by Licensee through Panasonic

website), but all applicable rights to patents,

copyrights, trademarks and trade secrets in the

Software are not transferred to Licensee.

Article 2 Use by a Third Party

Licensee may not use, copy, modify, transfer,

rent, lease, lend or allow any third party,

whether free of charge or not, to use, copy or

modify the Software, except as expressly

provided for in this Agreement.

Article 3 Restrictions on Copying the Software

Licensee may make a single copy of the

Software in whole or a part solely for back-up

purpose.

Article 4 Computer

Licensee may use the Software only on one

computer, and may not use it on more than one

computer. Further, Licensee may not use the

Software for commercial software hosting

services.

Article 5 Reverse Engineering, Decompiling or

Disassembly

Licensee may not reverse engineer, decompile,

or disassemble the Software, except to the

extent either of them is permitted under law or

regulation of the country where Licensee

resides. Panasonic, or its distributors will not be

responsible for any defects in the Software or

damage to Licensee caused by Licensee’s

reverse engineering, decompiling, or

disassembly of the Software.

Article 6 Indemnification

The Software is provided “AS-IS” without

warranty of any kind, either expressed or

implied, including, but not limited to, warranties

of non-infringement, merchantability and/or

fitness for a particular purpose. Further,

Panasonic does not warrant that the operation

of the Software will be uninterrupted or error

free. Panasonic or any of its distributors will not

be liable for any damage suffered by Licensee

arising from or in connection with Licensee’s

use of the Software.

Article 7 Export Control

Licensee agrees not to export or re-export to

any country the Software in any form without

the appropriate export licenses under

regulations of the country where Licensee

resides, if necessary.

Article 8 Termination of License

The right granted to Licensee hereunder will be

automatically terminated if Licensee

contravenes any of the terms and conditions of

this Agreement. In this event, Licensee must

destroy the Software and related

documentation together with all the copies

thereof at Licensee’s own expense.

- 224 -

Article 9 With regard to MICROSOFT SQL

SERVER COMPACT 3.5 produced by Microsoft

Corporation

(1) Licensee shall use the MICROSOFT SQL

SERVER COMPACT 3.5 only when included in

the Software, and shall not use the

MICROSOFT SQL SERVER COMPACT 3.5 in

any other configuration or method. Licensee

shall not publish the MICROSOFT SQL

SERVER COMPACT 3.5 or work around any

technical limitations in the MICROSOFT SQL

SERVER COMPACT 3.5.

(2) Licensee shall not use, copy, distribute,

regrant for use or otherwise handle the

Software in any way beyond the range of use

granted under Article 9 (1), and shall not

conduct operations such as reverse

engineering, decompilation, disassembling, etc.

of the MICROSOFT SQL SERVER COMPACT

3.5.

(3) All rights, including copyright, patent rights

etc. relating to the MICROSOFT SQL SERVER

COMPACT 3.5 shall belong to Microsoft

Corporation. Licensee shall not claim any rights

related to the MICROSOFT SQL SERVER

COMPACT 3.5 whatsoever.

- 225 -

≥Even if the system requirements mentioned in this owner’s manual is fulfilled, some PCs cannot

be used.

≥Even if the system requirements are fulfilled, it may take some time to edit 4K motion pictures and

it may not be possible to play them back smoothly.

≥A compatible Blu-ray disc/DVD writer drive and media are necessary for writing to a Blu-ray disc/

DVD.

≥Operation is not guaranteed in the following cases.

jWhen 2 or more USB devices are connected to a PC, or when devices are connected through

USB hubs or by using extension cables.

∫Operating environment for HD Writer AE 5.3

With a PC

Operating environment

OS Windows 10 (32 bit/64 bit)

Windows 8/Windows 8.1 (32 bit/64 bit)

Windows 7 (32 bit/64 bit) SP1

≥A 64-bit version of the Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/ Windows 10

OS is required for operations involving 4K motion pictures.

CPU Intel Pentium 4 2.8 GHz or higher (including compatible CPU)

≥Intel Core 2 Duo 2.16 GHz or higher or AMD Athlon 64 X2 Dual-Core

5200+ or higher is recommended when using playback function.

≥Intel Core 2 Quad 2.6 GHz or higher is recommended when using

editing function.

≥Intel Core i7 2.8 GHz or higher is recommended when using playback or

editing function for 1080/60p.

≥Intel Core i7 3.5 GHz or higher is recommended when using playback or

editing function for 4K motion pictures.

RAM Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10:

2 GB or more (64 bit)/1 GB or more (32 bit)

≥8 GB or more is recommended when using playback or editing function

for 4K motion pictures.

- 226 -

≥HD Writer AE 5.3 is for Windows only.

≥Input is not supported in languages other than English, German, French, Simplified Chinese and

Russian.

≥Operation cannot be guaranteed on all Blu-ray disc/DVD drives.

≥Operation is not guaranteed on Windows 7 Enterprise, Windows 8 Enterprise, Windows 8.1

Enterprise, Windows 10 Enterprise or Windows RT.

≥For Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10, this software is available only as a desktop

application.

≥This software is not compatible with a multi-boot environment.

≥This software is not compatible with a multi-monitor environment.

≥If using Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10, administrative account and standard

account users only can use this software. (An administrative account user should install and

uninstall this software.)

Display High Color (16 bit) or more (32 bit or more recommended)

Desktop resolution of 1024k768 pixels or more (1920k1080 pixels or

more recommended)

DirectX 9.0c compatible video card (DirectX 10 recommended)

Compatible with DirectDraw overlay

PCI Express™k16 compatible recommended

Video memory of 256 MB or more recommended

≥A video card compatible with hardware decoding of 4K motion pictures

is required when using playback function for 4K motion pictures.

(For example)

Intel HD Graphics 4000 or higher

NVIDIA GeForce 600 series or higher

≥A video memory of 2 GB or more is required when using playback or

editing function for 4K motion pictures.

≥A 4K-compatible monitor and video card is required for 4K resolution

playback.

Free hard disk drive

space

Ultra DMA — 100 or more

450 MB or more (for installing the software)

≥If the compression setting is enabled, errors will occur during recording.

Clear the check box for [Compress this drive to save disk space] in

[Properties] for the hard disk drive.

Sound DirectSound Support

Interface USB port

Other requirements Mouse or equivalent pointing device

Internet connection

- 227 -

∫To use the HD Writer AE 5.3

You will need a high performance PC depending on the functions to be used. It may not properly

play back or properly operate depending on the environment of the PC used. Refer to the operating

environment and notes.

≥Operation during the playback may become slow if the CPU or memory is not fulfilling the

requirements of the operating environment.

≥Always use the most current driver for the video card.

≥Always make sure there is enough capacity on the HDD in the PC. It may become inoperable or

the operation may stop suddenly if the capacity gets low.

∫Operating environment for the card reader function (mass storage)

≥The USB equipment operates with the driver installed as standard in the OS.

OS Windows 10 (32 bit/64 bit)

Windows 8/Windows 8.1 (32 bit/64 bit)

Windows 7 (32 bit/64 bit) SP1

CPU 1 GHz or higher

32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor

RAM Windows 7/Windows 8/Windows 8.1/Windows 10: 2 GB or more (64 bit)/

1 GB or more (32 bit)

Interface USB port

Other requirements Mouse or equivalent pointing device

- 228 -

When installing the software, log on to your computer as the Administrator or with a user name with

equivalent authorization. (If you do not have authorization to do this, consult your manager.)

≥Before starting the installation, close all applications that are running.

≥Do not perform any other operations on your PC while the software is being installed.

≥Explanation of operations is based on Windows 7.

∫Installing HD Writer AE 5.3

∫Uninstalling HD Writer AE 5.3

Follow the steps below to uninstall any software applications that you no longer require.

1Select [Start] # [Control Panel] # [Uninstall a Program].

2Select [HD Writer AE 5.3], then click [Uninstall].

≥Proceed with the uninstallation by following the on-screen instructions.

≥After uninstalling the software, be sure to reboot the PC.

With a PC

Installation

Check the website below to download/install the software.

≥The software is available for download until the end of March 2019.

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/soft/download/f_ae53.html

- 229 -

≥Connect this unit to the PC after the software applications are installed.

AUSB cable (supplied)

BTurn the side with the symbol up to connect the micro B end of the USB Cable to the USB

terminal of this unit.

≥Insert the plugs as far as they will go.

1Connect this unit to the AC adaptor.

≥Use the AC adaptor to free you from worrying about the battery running down.

2Turn on the unit.

3Connect this unit to a PC.

≥The USB function selection screen will appear.

4Touch [PC] on the screen of this unit.

≥The Smart Wizard Screen is automatically displayed when HD Writer AE 5.3 is installed.

≥This unit is automatically recognized as an external drive of the PC. (l231)

≥When you select an option other than [PC], reconnect the USB cable.

≥When using the battery, the LCD monitor turns off after about 5 seconds. Touch the screen to turn

the LCD monitor on.

≥Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any

other USB cables.)

≥When this unit is connected to a PC using a USB cable while the unit is turned on, power is also

supplied from the PC to this unit.

≥When performing reading/writing between a PC and an SD card, be aware that some SD card

slots built into PCs and some SD card readers are not compatible with the SDHC Memory Card or

SDXC Memory Card.

≥When using an SDXC Memory Card, check the following support site.

http://panasonic.net/avc/sdcard/information/SDXC.html

With a PC

Connecting to a PC



- 230 -

∫To disconnect USB cable safely

Select the icon in task tray displayed on the PC, and then select the model number of

this unit to disconnect the USB cable.

≥Depending on your PC’s settings, this icon may not be displayed.

∫Charging the battery by connecting it to different devices

When using the battery, if you turn off the unit and connect it to a PC, Panasonic Blu-ray disc

recorder or Panasonic DVD recorder, the battery will charge.

≥When connecting this unit to a PC for the first time, make sure to connect this unit to the

PC with this unit turned on.

≥Insert the USB cable securely all the way. It will not operate properly if it is not inserted all the

way.

≥Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any

other USB cables.)

≥You cannot charge the battery by connecting the supplied DC cable.

≥Be sure to connect the unit directly to the PC, Blu-ray disc recorder or DVD recorder.

≥During charging, the status indicator flashes.

≥You cannot charge when the status indicator flashes rapidly, or when it does not light at all.

Charge using the AC adaptor. (l12)

≥It will take 2 or 3 times longer to charge compared to when using the AC adaptor.

≥If the status indicator flashes at a particularly fast or slow rate, refer to page 247.

About the screen indication of the unit

≥Do not disconnect the USB cable, battery, or AC adaptor while the access lamp is on or card

access icon ( ) appears on the unit screen.

≥If the screen does not change when the unit is operated while connected to a PC, disconnect

the battery and/or AC adaptor, wait approximately 1 minute, reconnect the battery and/or AC

adaptor, wait approximately 1 minute again, and then turn the unit back on. (Data may be

destroyed when above operation is performed while accessing the SD card.)

- 231 -

About the PC display

When the unit is connected to a PC, it is recognized as an external drive.

≥Removable disk (Example: ) is displayed in [Computer].

Example folder structure of an SD card:

The following data will be recorded.

1Up to 999 still pictures in JPEG format

([S1000001.JPG] etc.)

2MP4 format motion picture files

([S1000001.MP4] etc.)

≥

The fourth to seventh characters of each folder

name are determined by the recording format.

100RCPHH:MP4 (2160/30p)

100RFPHH:MP4 (2160/24p)

100YAPHH:MP4 (1080/60p)

100YCPHH:MP4 (1080/30p)

100YFPHH:MP4 (1080/24p)

100XCPHH:MP4 (720/30p)

100TCPBH:MP4 (360/30p)

3iFrame format motion picture files

([S1000001.MP4] etc.)

4JPEG format still pictures created from

the motion picture

5JPEG format still pictures recorded in

Stop Motion Animation Assist Mode

6The motion picture thumbnails

7AVCHD format motion picture files

([00000.MTS] etc.)

8For management

∫Copying your still pictures to

your PC

Card reader function (mass storage)

Still pictures recorded with this unit can be copied to

the PC with Explorer or other programs.

1Double-click the folder that contains the

still pictures. ([DCIM]

[100CDPFQ] etc.)

2Drag and drop the still pictures onto the

destination folder (on the PC’s HDD).

≥Do not delete the SD card’s folders. Doing so

may make the SD card unusable in this unit.

≥Do not delete or edit files on the SD card or

USB HDD on the PC. If you do so, this unit

may not be able to read these files or its

functions may not operate correctly.

≥When data not supported by this unit has

been recorded on a PC, it will not be

recognized by this unit.

≥Always use this unit to format SD cards.

We recommend using HD Writer AE 5.3 to

copy motion picture data.

Using Windows Explorer or other programs

on the PC to copy, move or rename files and

folders recorded with this unit will result in

them being unusable with HD Writer AE 5.3.

It is impossible to write data to SD card on

this unit from a PC.

DCIM

CAM_SD

100CDPFQ 

101RCPHH 

AVCHDTN

BDMV

AVCHD

PRIVATE

104CDPFT

103CDPFS 

102UCPBH







PANA_EXT 



- 232 -

≥To use the software, log on as an Administrator or as user name for standard user account.

The software cannot be used with the user name for a guest account.

(On the PC)

Select [Start] # [All Programs] # [Panasonic] # [HD Writer AE 5.3] # [HD Writer

AE 5.3].

≥For details on how to use the software applications, read the PDF operating instructions of the

software.

Reading the operating instructions of the software

applications

≥You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0 or later or Adobe Reader 7.0 or later to read the PDF

operating instructions.

Select [Start] # [All Programs] # [Panasonic] # [HD Writer AE 5.3] # [Operating

Instructions].

With a PC

Starting HD Writer AE 5.3

- 233 -

≥HD Writer AE 5.3 is not compatible with Mac.

≥iMovie and Final Cut Pro X supported. For details about iMovie and Final Cut Pro X, please

contact Apple Inc.

∫Operating environment

≥Even if the system requirements mentioned in this owner’s manual is fulfilled, some computers

cannot be used.

≥The USB equipment operates with the driver installed as standard in the OS.

∫Copying still pictures on a Mac

1Connect this unit to a Mac via the supplied USB cable.

≥The USB function selection screen will appear.

2Touch [PC] on the screen of this unit.

≥This unit is automatically recognized as an external drive of Mac.

≥When you select an option other than [PC], reconnect the USB cable.

≥When using the battery, the LCD monitor turns off after about 5 seconds. Touch the screen to turn

the LCD monitor on.

3Double-click [CAM_SD] displayed on the desktop.

≥Files are stored in [100CDPFQ] or [102CDPFT] folder etc. in the [DCIM] folder.

4Using a drag-and-drop operation, move the pictures you want to acquire or

the folder storing those pictures to any different folder on the Mac.

∫To disconnect USB cable safely

Drag [CAM_SD] disk icon to the [Trash], and then disconnect the USB cable.

With a PC

If using Mac (mass storage)

PC Mac

OS OS X v10.11

CPU Intel Core 2 Duo or better

RAM 2GB or more

Interface USB port

Other requirements Mouse or equivalent pointing device

- 234 -

∫Recording indications

Others

Indications

*1 For only *2 For only

Motion Picture Recording Mode Still Picture Recording Mode

WXF991 VX981

R 3000

100

OPEN

0dB

MEGA

PRE-REC







0h00m00s

1h30m

R 1h20m

1h30m

25.9M

///////

Intelligent Auto Mode (l60)

///////

Intelligent Auto Plus Mode (l62)

///

Creative Control Mode (l62)

HDR Movie Mode (l50, 65)

/////////

Scene Mode (l66)

Manual Mode (l73)

///

Cinema Like Effect Mode*1

FULL HD Slow Motion Video

Mode (l71)*2

4K Photo Mode (l71)

Stop Motion Animation Assist

Mode (l72)

¥/; (Red) Recording

; (Green) Recording pause

0h00m00s Elapsed recording time (l28)

(“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “m” for minute

and “s” for second.)

MINI

8mm

SILN

INTV

MNL

/ / Eye-Fi transfer (l154)

Remaining battery power

(l16)

1h30m Remaining battery time (l16)

(White) Card recording possible status

(Green) Recognizing the card

/////

Motion Picture Recording Mode (l91)

Backup for Twin Camera

(l57)

R1h20m Remaining time for motion

picture recording (l28)

(White) Still picture recording icon

(Red) Recording still picture

R3000 Remaining number of still

pictures (l31)

ヮヱフ

ビヒプパ

ヮヱフ

ヒパベパ

ブパヮ

ヮヱフ

ヒパベパ

ビベヮ

ヮヱフ

ヘビパ

ヮヱフ

ㄊョㄓ㄂ㄎㄆ

ビヒプパバビフㄑ

ヒパベパバビフㄑ

- 235 -

/////// /

Number of recording pixels for still pictures

(l31, 101, 104)

In Playback Mode, the picture size is not

displayed for still pictures recorded with other

products that have different picture sizes from

the sizes shown above.

Ø10/Ø2Self-timer Recording (l85)

MEGA OIS (l30)

PRE-REC (l84)

Time Lapse Recording (

64)

/Wind Noise Canceler (l95)

Lowcut (l95)

Zoom Microphone (l98)

Focus Microphone (l98)

Stereo Microphone (l98)

/Power LCD (l43)

// / //

Image Stabilizer (l80)/

Optical Image Stabilizer Lock (l82)

Sound Scene Select (l96)

Picture Adjustment (l100)

Digital Cinema Color (l94)

Brightness Adjustment

(Miniature Effect/8mm movie/

Silent movie) (l63, 64)

Vividness Adjustment

(Miniature Effect) (l63)

Color balance Adjustment

(8mm movie) (l64)

/HDR Effect (l50, 87)

AF/AE tracking (l81)

/Level Shot Function (l87)

Touch Shutter (l82)

MF Manual Focus (l76)

25.9M

14 M

2.1M

20.4M

10.9M

0.3M

20M

10. 6

MEGA

PRE-REC

LOW

CUT

/// /

White Balance (l74)

1/100 Shutter Speed (l75)

OPEN/F2.0 Iris value (l75)

0dB Gain value (l75)

± (White)/

¥ (Green)

Focus indication (l30)

AF assist lamp (l102)

Display Touch Menu (l24)

Backlight Compensation (

85)

Intelligent Contrast Control

(l84)

/Microphone Level (l99)

Sound recording disabled

(l68, 69, 70)

/Fade (White), Fade (Black)

(l84)

Night Mode (l86)

Infrared light (l86)

Video Light (l86)

Intelligent Exposure (l85)

Wide Conversion Lens setting

(l95)

Favorite scene icon (l32)

R9 Remaining number of favorite

scenes (l32)

World Time setting (l38)

Sub Window icon (

51, 53, 214)

Sub Camera setting icon

(l55, 215)

Narration Mode is enabled

(l56)*1

Auto Focus Single (l55)*1

/Recording mode switching icon

(l21)

NOV 15 2016 Date indication (l25)

12:34PM Time indication (l25)

- 236 -

∫Playback indications

∫Indication of connection to

Wi-Fi

∫Indication of connection to

USB HDD

∫Indication of connection to

other devices

1/;/5//6//7/8/9/:/

D/E/;1/2;

Display during playback (l34, 103)

0h00m00s Playback Time (l34)

No.10 Scene Number

Repeat Playback (l105)

Resume Playback (l105)

100-0001 Still picture folder/file name

Transfer/Protected motion

pictures/still pictures (l133,

153)

// (Red)/ (Red)/

(Red)/ (Red)/ / /

/ / (Red)/ (Red)/

Play mode selection display (l33)

(Blue)/ MP4 [1080/60p (50M)] scene

(l34)

MP4 [1080/60p (28M)] scene/

MP4 [1080/30p] scene (l34)

MP4 [720/30p] scene (l34)

MP4 [360/30p] scene (l34)

iFrame scene (l34)

AVCHD [1080/60p] scene

(l34)

AVCHD [PH] scene (l34)

AVCHD [HA] scene (l34)

AVCHD [HG] scene (l34)

AVCHD [HE] scene (l34)

Scenes recorded with Slow &

Quick Video Mode (l67)*1

Scenes recorded with FULL

HD Slow Motion Video Mode

(l68, 71)

Scenes recorded with Slow

Zoom Mode (l69)*1

Scenes recorded with Dolly

Zoom Mode (l70)*1

Scene(s) recorded with 4K

Photo mode (l71)

Miniature-recorded scene

(l63)

Time lapse-recorded scene

(l64)

Scenes saved with Highlight

Playback (l117)

// Eye-Fi transfer status (l152)

Changes the cropping frame

size (when [Zooming Crop] is

selected for the 4K Cropping

function) (l109)

Sets the start point (when

[Zooming Crop] is selected for

the 4K Cropping function)

(l109)

Starts a preview (when

[Zooming Crop] is selected for

the 4K Cropping function)

(l109)

Starts a preview (when

[Tracking Crop]/[Stabilizing

Crop] is selected for the 4K

Cropping function) (l110)

/Wi-Fi connection status (wireless

access point) (l184)

/Wi-Fi connection status (Direct

connection) (l184)

USB HDD Playback (l146)

Accessing the card (l150, 230)

MINI

- 237 -

∫Confirmatory indications

∫Indication of Wireless Twin/

Multi-Camera

∫Indication of Sub Window

*3 The number for the icon varies depending

on the selected Wireless Sub Camera. (1–3)

–– (Time

display)

The built-in battery is low. (l25)

Warning for recording of yourself

(l26)

SD card is not inserted or is

incompatible.

Startup icon for Wireless Twin

Camera/disconnect icon for

Wireless Twin/Multi-Camera

(l203)

/ Wi-Fi connection status (Wireless

Twin Camera) (l212)

Wi-Fi connection status (Wireless

Multi-Camera) (l212)

/For changing the Sub Window

size (l54)*1

/For zooming in/out the Sub

Window (l54)*1

/Wi-Fi connection warnings for the

Wireless Sub Camera function

(Wireless Twin Camera) (l213)

/*3 Wi-Fi connection warnings for the

Wireless Sub Camera function

(Wireless Multi-Camera) (l213)

- 238 -

Major confirmation/error messages to be indicated on the screen in text.

Others

Messages

CHECK CARD.

This card is not compatible or it cannot be recognized by the unit.

If this message appears even though motion pictures and still pictures are recorded on an SD

card, the card may be unstable. Reinsert the SD card, then turn the unit off and then on again.

THIS BATTERY CANNOT BE USED.

≥Use a battery that is compatible with this unit. (l11)

If using a Panasonic battery compatible with this unit, remove the battery and then insert it

again. If the message appears even after repeating this several times, this unit needs repair.

Detach the power and consult the dealer who you purchased this unit from. Do not attempt to

repair it by yourself.

≥You are attempting to connect an AC adaptor not compatible with this unit. Use the supplied

AC adaptor. (l12)

THIS EXTERNAL DRIVE CANNOT BE USED./

PLEASE CHECK THE EXTERNAL DRIVE.

The external drive that this unit cannot recognize is connected. Check if the USB HDD can be

connected and used with this unit and try to reconnect. (l142)

Failed to connect wireless access point/

No wireless access point found

≥Check the Wi-Fi set up of your wireless access point and smartphone.

≥[WPS Connection] can establish a connection only between two devices: this unit and a

device that will connect to this unit. Check if multiple devices are trying to establish a

connection in the WPS waiting state simultaneously.

≥Read page 192 if the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.

Connection failed. Please check network settings of connected device.

≥It may be impossible to connect from some Web services such as “LUMIX CLUB” and

USTREAM. Try to reconnect after waiting a short while.

≥Read page 192 if the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.

Network disconnected.

≥When using [DLNA Play], if you do not operate the DLNA-compatible device you are

connected to for a while, it will be displayed. Check the status of the DLNA device you are

connected to.

- 239 -

About recovery

If faulty management information is found, the messages may appear and a repair is performed.

(Repairing may take time depending on the error.)

≥ is displayed when abnormal management information is detected when the scenes are

displayed in thumbnail.

≥Use a sufficiently charged battery or the AC adaptor.

≥Depending on the condition of the data, it may not be possible to completely repair the data.

≥If recovery fails, it will not be possible to play back scenes recorded before the unit turned off.

≥When data recorded on another device is recovered, it may not be possible to play back the data

on this unit or the other device.

≥If recovery fails, turn the unit off and on again after waiting a while. If recovery fails repeatedly,

format a media on the unit. Please be aware that if a media is formatted, then all the data

recorded on the media will be erased.

≥If the thumbnail information is recovered, displaying the thumbnails may become slower.

≥You cannot recover scenes recorded as Backup for Twin Camera and information on Highlight

Playback scenes in MP4 format.

- 240 -

∫It is not a malfunction in following cases

Others

Troubleshooting

A clicking sound is heard

when the unit is shaken.

≥This is the sound of the lens moving and is not a defect.

This sound will no longer be heard when the unit is turned on

and set this unit to the Motion Picture Recording Mode or Still

Picture Recording Mode.

Object seems to be

warped.

≥Object seems to be warped slightly when the object moves

across the image very fast, but this is because the unit is

using MOS for the image sensor. This is not a malfunction.

The lens, the viewfinder or

LCD monitor fog up.

≥This is due to condensation. It is not a malfunction. Please

refer to page 2.

Power

Problem Check points

This unit cannot be turned

on.

This unit does not stay on

long enough.

Battery runs down quickly.

≥Charge the battery again to ensure it is sufficiently charged.

(l12)

≥In cold places, the battery using time becomes shorter.

≥The battery has a limited life. If the operating time is still too

short even after the battery is fully charged, the battery has

worn out and needs to be replaced.

This unit is turned off

automatically.

≥If the unit turns off when you turn off the power to the TV

using the TV remote control, the VIERA Link is at work. If you

are not using the VIERA Link, set [VIERA Link] to [OFF].

(l140)

This unit cannot be

operated though it is

turned on.

This unit does not operate

normally.

≥Remove the battery or AC adaptor, wait about 1 minute and

then reconnect the battery or AC adaptor. Then about

1 minute later, turn on the unit again. (Conducting the above

operation while the media is being accessed may damage the

data on the media.)

≥If normal operation is still not restored, detach the power

connected, and consult the dealer who you purchased this

unit from.

“ERROR OCCURRED.

PLEASE TURN UNIT OFF,

THEN TURN ON AGAIN.”

is displayed.

≥The unit has automatically detected an error. Restart the unit

by turning the unit off and on.

≥The unit will be turned off in about 1 minute if the unit is not

turned off and on.

≥Repair is needed if it is repeatedly displayed even if it is

restarted. Detach the power connected, and consult the

dealer who you purchased this unit from. Do not attempt to

repair the unit by yourself.

- 241 -

Indication

Problem Check points

Remaining battery

indication is not displayed

properly.

≥The remaining battery capacity indication is an

approximation.

If the remaining battery capacity indication is not displayed

correctly, fully charge the battery, discharge it and then

charge it again.

Recording

Problem Check points

The unit arbitrarily stops

recording.

≥Use an SD card that can be used for motion picture recording.

(l16)

≥The recordable time may have shortened due to the

deterioration of the data writing speed or repeated recording

and deletion. Using the unit, format the SD card. (l45)

≥If [AGS] is [ON], record in the normal horizontal position or set

[AGS] to [OFF]. (l93)

Auto Focus function does

not work.

≥Switch to Intelligent Auto Mode or Intelligent Auto Plus Mode.

≥If you are trying to record a scene which is hard to bring into

focus in Auto Focus Mode, use the Manual Focus Mode to

adjust the focus. (l61, 76)

Color balance of images is

strange when recording in

a place such as a

gymnasium.

≥In a place with multiple light sources, such as a gymnasium or

a hall, set the White Balance setting to (Indoor mode 2).

If you cannot record clearly with the (Indoor mode 2), set

it to (Manual adjustment mode). (l74)

Color or brightness of the

image changes, or you

may see horizontal bars in

the image.

The LCD monitor flickers

indoors.

≥Color or brightness of the image may change, or you may see

horizontal bars in the image when the object is recorded

under fluorescent light, mercury light or sodium light, etc., but

this is not a malfunction.

≥In Motion Picture Recording Mode, record in Intelligent Auto

Mode/Intelligent Auto Plus Mode or set the shutter speed as

follows:

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to [24p]:

Set to 1/50 seconds in areas where the power supply

frequency is 50 Hz, or 1/60 seconds in areas where the

frequency is 60 Hz.

jWhen [REC FORMAT] is set to a setting other than [24p]:

Set to 1/100 seconds in areas where the power supply

frequency is 50 Hz, or 1/60 seconds in areas where the

frequency is 60 Hz.

≥In Still Picture Recording Mode, this will not affect the

recorded image.

≥In the following cases, setting the shutter speed to

1/120 seconds reduces the intensity of the problem:

jIn FULL HD Slow Motion Mode

j(For the )

Slow & Quick Video Mode

WXF991

- 242 -

Playback

Problem Check points

Scenes/still pictures

cannot be played back.

≥Any scenes/still pictures where the thumbnails are displayed

as cannot be played back.

Scenes cannot be deleted. ≥Release the protect setting. (l133)

≥Any scenes/still pictures where the thumbnails are displayed

as cannot be deleted. If the scenes/still pictures are

unnecessary, format the media to erase the data. (l45)

Please be aware that if a media is formatted then all the data

recorded on the media is erased and cannot be recovered.

Back up important data on a PC, disc etc.

With other products

Problem Check points

Even when this unit is

correctly connected to a

TV, images or sounds are

not output.

The images are squeezed

horizontally.

≥Please read the operating instructions of your TV and select

the channel that matches the input used for the connection.

≥Change the [TV ASPECT] setting to match the aspect ratio of

the TV. (l138)

≥The audio during playback mode is not output from this unit

when connected to a TV. Sound levels cannot be adjusted

using this unit, so adjust the sound on the TV.

Even when this unit is

connected to the TV by the

HDMI micro cable, images

or sounds are not output.

≥Check if the HDMI micro cable is connected correctly.

≥Insert the HDMI micro cable all the way in.

If the SD card is inserted in

another device, it is not

recognized.

≥Check that the device is compatible with the capacity or type

of SD card (SD Memory Card/SDHC Memory Card/SDXC

Memory Card) that you inserted. Refer to the operating

instructions of the device for details.

When connected by the

USB cable, this unit is not

detected by the other

devices.

≥When connected to other devices using only the battery,

reconnect using the AC adaptor.

VIERA Link does not work. (Setting on this unit)

≥Connect with an HDMI micro cable (supplied). (l137)

≥Touch , then touch [SETUP] # [VIERA Link] # [ON].

(l140)

≥Turn the unit off and then back on again.

(Setting on other devices)

≥If the TV input does not switch automatically, switch the input

using the TV remote control.

≥Check the VIERA Link setting on the connected device.

≥Please refer to the operating instructions of the connected

device.

- 243 -

Cannot copy scenes on

the SD card by connecting

to other equipment with

the USB cable.

≥Other equipment might have not recognized the SD card.

Unplug the USB cable once, and reconnect it.

With a PC

Problem Check points

When connected by the

USB cable, this unit is not

detected by the PC.

≥After re-inserting the SD card into the unit, reconnect the

supplied USB cable.

≥Select another USB terminal on the PC.

≥Check the operating environment. (l225, 233)

≥Connect the supplied USB cable again after restarting the PC

and turning on this unit again.

When the USB cable is

disconnected, an error

message will appear on

the PC.

≥To disconnect the USB cable safely, select the icon in

task tray displayed on the PC, and then select the model

number of this unit to disconnect the USB cable.

Cannot see the PDF

operating instructions for

HD Writer AE 5.3.

≥You will need Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.0 or later or Adobe

Reader 7.0 or later to read the PDF operating instructions for

HD Writer AE 5.3.

About the Wi-Fi function

Problem Check points

Cannot connect to

wireless access point or

smartphone.

≥Read page 192 if the Wi-Fi connection cannot be established.

Cannot operate from

smartphone using [Link to

Cell].

≥Install the smartphone app “Image App” on your smartphone.

(l183)

When I look at the

recording screen with the

smartphone, mosaic-like

noise appears on the

screen and the image

movement does not look

smooth.

≥When this unit is set to any of the following recording formats

or recording modes, mosaic-like noise may appear on the

screen and the image movement may not look smooth.

(Recorded images will not be affected.)

jRecording format [4K MP4]

jRecording mode [1080/50M] or [1080/28M] for the

recording format [MP4/iFrame]

jRecording mode [1080/60p] for the recording format

[AVCHD]

jRecording format [24p]

With other products

Problem Check points

- 244 -

Cannot use [DLNA Play]. ≥Make sure the television is compatible with DLNA. Read the

instructions for the television you are using.

≥Make sure the wireless access point and this device are

properly connected.

≥Approach the wireless access point and reconnect.

≥If a connection cannot be made between this device and a

DLNA-compatible device, try to reconnect and make sure

they connect properly.

The live broadcast screen

will not be displayed.

≥Make sure the “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and Password have

been input correctly.

≥Use a PC or smartphone to make sure the USTREAM

account registration is complete.

≥Use a PC or smartphone to register and set up USTREAM

from a “LUMIX CLUB” linked service. (l178)

≥“LUMIX CLUB” or USTREAM lines may be congested. Retry

the live broadcast after waiting a short while.

[Home Cam] cannot be

used.

≥Make sure the wireless access point is connected to the

Internet.

≥Make sure the wireless access point and this unit are properly

connected. (l186)

I have forgotten the

password for the Wi-Fi.

≥Perform [Reset Wi-Fi Settings] from the Setup menu (l44).

This will set the Wi-Fi setting to the condition at the time of

purchase, and you will be able to use the Wi-Fi setting menu.

When performing [Reset Wi-Fi Settings], all Wi-Fi settings

including the “LUMIX CLUB” Login ID and registered wireless

access points will be deleted.

I have forgotten the Login

ID or Password for the

“LUMIX CLUB”.

≥Check the information in the login screen of “LUMIX CLUB”.

http://lumixclub.panasonic.net/eng/c/

Others

Problem Check points

If the SD card is inserted in

this unit, it is not

recognized.

≥If the SD card is formatted on a PC, it may not be recognized

by this unit. Use this unit to format SD cards. (l45)

About the Wi-Fi function

Problem Check points

- 245 -

∫If AVCHD scenes do not change smoothly when played back on

another device

The images may be still for several seconds at the joins between the scenes if the following

operations are performed when multiple scenes have been continuously played back using another

unit.

≥Just how smoothly the scenes will be played back depends on the playback unit. Depending on

the unit used, the images may stop moving and become still for a moment even when none of the

following conditions are applicable.

≥A continuous recording of motion picture data that exceeds 4 GB may momentarily stop at every

4 GB of data when played back with another device.

≥It may not play back smoothly when the editing of scenes was done with the HD Writer AE 5.3,

but it will play back smoothly if you set the seamless settings in the HD Writer AE 5.3. Refer to the

operating instructions for the HD Writer AE 5.3.

Principal reasons for not playing back smoothly

≥When the scenes were recorded on different dates

≥When scenes lasting under 3 seconds have been recorded

≥When PRE-REC was used for recording

≥When the Miniature Effect recording is used

≥When the Time Lapse Recording is used

≥When deleting scenes

≥When scenes recorded more than 99 scenes on the same date

- 246 -

Keep this unit as far away as possible from

electromagnetic equipment (such as

microwave ovens, TVs, video games etc.).

≥If you use this unit on top of or near a TV, the

pictures and/or sound on this unit may be

disrupted by electromagnetic wave radiation.

≥Do not use this unit near cell phones because

doing so may result in noise adversely

affecting the pictures and/or sound.

≥Recorded data may be damaged, or pictures

may be distorted, by strong magnetic fields

created by speakers or large motors.

≥Electromagnetic wave radiation generated by

microprocessors may adversely affect this

unit, disturbing the pictures and/or sound.

≥If this unit is adversely affected by

electromagnetic equipment and stops

functioning properly, turn this unit off and

remove the battery or disconnect AC adaptor.

Then reinsert the battery or reconnect AC

adaptor and turn this unit on.

Do not use this unit near radio transmitters

or high-voltage lines.

≥If you record near radio transmitters or

high-voltage lines, the recorded pictures and/

or sound may be adversely affected.

Make sure to use the supplied cords and

cables. If you use optional accessories, use

the cords and the cables supplied with

them.

Do not extend the cords and the cables.

Do not spray insecticides or volatile

chemicals onto the unit.

≥If the unit is sprayed with such chemicals, its

body may be marred and the surface finish

may peel off.

≥Do not leave rubber or plastic products in

contact with the unit for a long time.

When you use the unit in a sandy or dusty

place such as a beach, do not let sand or

fine dust get into the body and terminals of

the unit.

Also, keep the unit away from sea water.

≥Sand or dust may damage the unit. (Care

should be taken when inserting and removing

a card.)

≥If sea water splashes onto the unit, wipe off

the water with a well wrung cloth. Then wipe

the unit again with a dry cloth.

When carrying the unit, do not drop or bump

it.

≥A strong impact can break the unit’s casing,

causing it to malfunction.

Cleaning

≥Before cleaning, detach the battery or pull the

AC adaptor from the AC outlet, and then wipe

the unit with a soft, dry cloth.

≥If the unit is very dirty, dip a cloth in water and

squeeze firmly, and then wipe the unit with

the damp cloth. Next, dry the unit with a dry

cloth.

≥Use of benzine, paint thinner, alcohol, or

dishwashing liquid may alter the camera body

or peel the surface finish. Do not use these

solvents.

≥When using a chemical dust cloth, follow the

instructions that came with the cloth.

Do not use the unit for surveillance

purposes or other business uses.

≥This unit was designed for consumer

intermittent use. It was not intended for

continuous use, or for any industrial or

commercial application resulting in prolonged

use.

≥In certain situations, continuous use could

cause the unit to overheat and cause a

malfunction. Such use is strongly

discouraged.

Others

Cautions for use

About this unit

The unit and the SD card become warm

during use. This is not a malfunction.

- 247 -

When you are not going to use the unit for

an extended time

≥When storing the unit in a cupboard or

cabinet, it is recommended that you place a

desiccant (silica gel) in with it.

The battery used in this unit is a rechargeable

lithium-ion battery. It is susceptible to humidity

and temperature and the effect increases the

more the temperature rises or falls. In cold

areas, the full charge indication may not appear

or the low battery indication may appear about

5 minutes after starting use. At high

temperatures, the protection function may be

triggered, making it impossible to use the unit.

Be sure to detach the battery after use.

≥If the battery is left attached, a minute amount

of current continues to flow even if the unit is

off. Keeping the unit in this state may result in

over discharge of the battery. This may result

in you not being able to use the battery even

after it is charged.

≥The battery should be stored in the vinyl bag

so metal does not come into contact with the

terminals.

≥The battery should be stored in a cool place

free from humidity, with as constant

temperature as possible. (Recommended

temperature: 15 oC to 25 oC (59 oF to 77 oF),

Recommended humidity: 40%RH to 60%RH)

≥Extremely high temperatures or low

temperatures will shorten the life of the

battery.

≥If the battery is kept in high-temperature,

high-humidity, or oily-smoky places, the

terminals may rust and cause malfunctions.

≥To store the battery for a long period of time,

we recommend you charge it once every year

and store it again after you have completely

used up the charged capacity.

≥Dust and other matter attached to the battery

terminals should be removed.

Prepare spare batteries when going out for

recording.

≥Prepare batteries enough to last for 3 to 4

times the period you are planning to record

for. Cold places such as a ski resort can

shorten recording time.

If you drop the battery accidentally, check to

see if the terminals are damaged.

≥Inserting a battery with damaged terminals

can damage the unit.

Do not throw an old battery into fire.

≥Heating a battery or throwing it into a fire may

result in an explosion.

If the operating time is very short even after

the battery has been recharged, the battery

has worn out. Please purchase a new

battery.

≥If the temperature of the battery is extremely

high or extremely low, charging may take time

or the battery may not be charged.

≥If you use the AC adaptor near a radio, radio

reception may be disturbed. Keep the AC

adaptor 1 m (3.3 feet) or more away from the

radio.

≥When using the AC adaptor, it may generate

whirring sounds. However, this is normal.

≥After use, be sure to disconnect the AC

adaptor. (If it is left connected, a minute

amount of current is consumed.)

≥Always keep the electrodes of the AC

adaptor and battery clean.

When the status indicator is flashing at a

particularly fast or slow rate, the following

should be considered.

Flashing with approx. 4 second period (off

for approx. 2 seconds, on for approx.

2 seconds):

≥When the battery is over discharged or the

temperature of the battery is too high or low.

It can be charged, but it may take a few hours

to complete the charging normally.

≥It will flash in approx. 2 second intervals

when normal charging resumes. Even in such

cases, it may start flashing in approx.

4 second intervals until charging is completed

depending on the conditions of use.

About the battery

About the AC adaptor

About status indicator during

charging

- 248 -

Flashing with approx. 0.5 second period (off

for approx. 0.25 second, on for approx.

0.25 second):

≥The battery is not charged. Remove the

battery from the unit, and try charging again.

≥Check that the terminals of the unit or battery

are not dirty or covered with a foreign object,

and connect the battery correctly once again.

If a foreign object or dirt is present, turn off

the unit before removing.

≥The battery or environment is at an extremely

high or low temperature. Wait until the

temperature has returned to an appropriate

level and try charging again. If you are still

unable to charge, there may be a fault in the

unit, battery or AC adaptor.

Off:

≥Charging has finished.

≥If the status indicator stays off despite the

charging being unfinished, there may be a

fault in the unit, battery or AC adaptor. Refer

to page 247 for details on the battery.

When disposing of or giving away the SD

card, note that:

≥Formatting and deletion of data on this unit or

computer only changes the file management

information and does not completely delete

the data in the SD card.

≥It is recommended that the SD card is

physically destroyed or the SD card is

physically formatted using this unit when

disposing of or giving away the SD card.

To physically format the SD card, connect the

unit via the AC adaptor, select [SETUP] #

[FORMAT MEDIA] # [YES] from the menu,

and then press and hold the recording start/

stop button on the screen below for about

3 seconds. When the SD card data deletion

screen appears, select [YES], and then follow

the on-screen instructions.

≥The customer is responsible for the

management of the data in the SD card.

≥When the LCD screen is dirty or

condensation has occurred, please wipe it

using a soft cloth such as eyeglass cleaner.

≥Do not touch the LCD monitor with your

fingernails, or rub or press with strong force.

≥It may become hard to see or hard to

recognize the touch when the LCD protection

sheet is affixed.

≥When the unit has become very cold, for

example due to storage in a cold area, its

LCD monitor will be slightly darker than usual

immediately after the unit is turned on. The

normal brightness will be restored when the

unit’s internal temperature rises.

About the SD card

LCD monitor/viewfinder

Extremely high precision technology is

employed to produce the LCD Monitor

screen. The result is more than 99.99%

effective dots with a mere 0.01% of the dots

inactive or always lit. However, this is not a

malfunction and does not affect the recorded

picture.

Extremely high precision technology is

employed to produce the viewfinder screen.

The result is more than 99.99% effective

dots with a mere 0.01% of the dots inactive

or always lit. However, this is not a

malfunction and does not affect the recorded

picture.

- 249 -

When a name or birthday is set by Baby

Calendar, personal information will be included

in this unit.

When the Wi-Fi function is used, the SSID,

Password, and other personal information will

be included in this unit.

Setting a Wi-Fi password is recommended to

protect personal information. (l196)

Disclaimer

≥Information including personal information

may be altered or vanish due to erroneous

operation, effect of static electricity, accident,

malfunction, repair, or other handlings.

Please note in advance that Panasonic is not

liable in any way for any direct or indirect

damage from the alteration or vanishing of

information or personal information.

When requesting a repair, transferring to

another party, or disposing.

≥After making a copy of personal information,

always delete information such as personal

information and wireless LAN connection

settings that you have saved within this unit

with [Reset Wi-Fi Settings]/[Delete account].

(l44, 199)

≥To protect personal information, delete the

registered details of Baby Calendar unless

they are necessary for the repair. (l123)

≥Remove the Memory Card from this unit

when requesting a repair.

≥Settings may return to factory default when

this unit is repaired.

≥Please contact the dealer where you

purchased this unit or Panasonic if above

operations are not possible due to

malfunction.

When transferring to another party, or

disposing of the Memory Card, please refer

to “When disposing of or giving away the

SD card, note that:”. (l248)

When uploading images on web services

≥Images may contain information that can be

used for identifying individuals such as titles

and recording dates. When uploading images

on web services, check carefully, and then

upload.

About personal information

- 250 -

∫Carefully observe copyright

laws

Whatever you have recorded and created

can be used for your personal entertainment

only. Under copyright laws, other materials

cannot be used without obtaining

permission from the holders of the

copyrights.

∫Licenses

≥SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

≥“AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the

“AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of

Panasonic Corporation and Sony

Corporation.

≥Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

≥The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition

Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are

trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing, LLC in the United States and other

countries.

≥VIERA Link™ is a trademark of Panasonic

Corporation.

≥EZ Sync™ is a trademark of Panasonic

Corporation.

≥HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic

Corporation.

≥x.v.Color™ is a trademark.

≥LEICA is a registered trademark of Leica

Microsystems IR GmbH and DICOMAR is a

registered trademark of Leica Camera AG.

≥Microsoft® and Windows® are either

registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the United States

and/or other countries.

≥Microsoft product screen shot(s) reprinted

with permission from Microsoft Corporation.

≥Intel®, Pentium® and Intel®Core™ are

trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S.

and/or other countries.

≥AMD Athlon™ is a trademark of Advanced

Micro Devices, Inc.

≥iMovie, Final Cut Pro, Mac and OS X are

trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the

U.S. and other countries.

≥iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries.

≥App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

≥Android and Google Play are trademarks or

registered trademarks of Google Inc.

≥The Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ Logo is a

certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

≥The Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ Identifier mark

is a certification mark of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

≥“Wi-Fi®” is a registered trademark of Wi-Fi

Alliance®.

≥“Wi-Fi Protected Setup™”, “WPA™”, and

“WPA2™” are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance®.

≥DLNA, the DLNA Logo and DLNA

CERTIFIED are trademarks, service marks,

or certification marks of the Digital Living

Network Alliance.

≥QR Code is a registered trademark of

DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.

≥“Eye-Fi” is a trademark of Eye-Fi, Inc.

≥Other names of systems and products

mentioned in these instructions are usually

the registered trademarks or trademarks of

the manufacturers who developed the system

or product concerned.

This product is licensed under the AVC Patent

Portfolio License for the personal use of a

consumer or other uses in which it does not

receive remuneration to (i) encode video in

compliance with the AVC Standard (“AVC

Video”) and/or (ii) decode AVC Video that was

encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal

activity and/or was obtained from a video

provider licensed to provide AVC Video. No

license is granted or shall be implied for any

other use. Additional information may be

obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C.

See http://www.mpegla.com

Others

About copyright

- 251 -

≥The stated times are the approximate recordable times for continuous recording.

AFavors image quality

BFavors Recording time

≥“h” is an abbreviation for hour, “min” for minute and “s” for second.

≥

If recording for long periods, prepare batteries for 3 or 4 times the period you wish to record for. (

13)

≥The default setting for [REC FORMAT] is [4K MP4].

≥Maximum continuously recordable time for one scene: 6 hours

≥The recording is paused once the recording time for one scene exceeds 6 hours, and the

recording will automatically resume after a few seconds.

≥The recordable time may be reduced when lot of action scenes are recorded or recording of short

scene is repeated.

Others

Recording modes/approximate

recordable time

Recording format [AVCHD]

Recording mode [1080/60p] [1080/60i]

[PH] [HA] [HG] [HE]

Picture size/Frame rate

1920

1080/

60p

1920

1080/

60i

1920

1080/

60i

1920

1080/

60i

1920

1080/

60i

SD card

4GB 19 min 21 min 30 min 40 min 1 h 30 min

16 GB 1h20min 1h30min 2h 2h40min 6h40min

64 GB 5h20min 6h 8h30min 11h 27h30min

Recording format [4K MP4] [MP4/iFrame]

Recording mode [2160] [1080/50M] [1080/28M] [720] [iFrame]

Picture size/Frame rate

3840

2160/

30p

1920

1080/

60p

1920

1080/

60p

1280

720/

30p

960

540/

30p

SD card

4GB 7 min 11 min 19 min 1 h 19 min

16 GB 28min 45min 1h20min 4h10min 1h20min

64 GB 1h50min 3h 5h20min 16h50min 5h20min

Recording format [24p]

Recording mode [2160/24p] [1080/24p]

Picture size/Frame rate

3840

2160/

24p

1920

1080/

24p

SD card

4GB 7min 11min

16 GB 28 min 45 min

64 GB 1h50min 3h



- 252 -

≥Use time in the row of 4 GB in above table as a guideline for the time that can be copied onto one

DVD disc (4.7 GB).

≥Recordable times will be approximately half the times in the above table when Backup for Twin

Camera is in operation.

≥The maximum remaining recordable time that can be displayed for motion picture recording is

99 hours and 59 minutes. Any remaining recordable time exceeding 99 hours and 59 minutes will

be displayed as “R99h59m+”. This display remains unchanged until the remaining recordable

time drops to 99 hours and 59 minutes or less.

≥The stated number is the approximate number of recordable pictures.

(Still picture recording mode)

Others

Approximate number of recordable

pictures

Picture size 6784k3816 4992k2808 1920k1080

Aspect ratio [16:9]

SD card

4GB 250 450 3200

16 GB 1000 1900 12500

64 GB 4300 7500 52000

Picture size 5216k3912 3808k2856 640k480

Aspect ratio [4:3]

SD card

4GB 300 550 14000

16 GB 1300 2400 58000

64 GB 5000 9500 237000

Picture size 5472k3648 3984k2656 1728k1152

Aspect ratio [3:2]

SD card

4GB 300 600 2200

16 GB 1300 2400 8500

64 GB 5500 10000 36000

25.9M

14 M

2.1M

20.4M

10.9M

0.3M

20M

10. 6

- 253 -

(Motion picture recording mode)

≥The number of recordable pictures depends on the subject being recorded.

≥Maximum number of recordable pictures that can be displayed is 9999. If the number of

recordable pictures exceeds 9999, R 9999+ is displayed. The number will not change when the

picture is taken until the number of recordable pictures is 9999 or less.

≥The memory capacity indicated on the label of an SD card is the total of the capacity for copyright

protection and management and the capacity which can be used on the unit, a PC etc.

Recording format [4K MP4] [MP4/iFrame], [AVCHD]

Picture size 6016k3384 3840k2160 4992k2808 1920k1080

Aspect ratio [16:9]

SD card

4GB 300 750 450 3200

16 GB 1300 3000 1900 12500

64 GB 5000 12000 7500 52000

Recording format [24p]

Recording mode [2160/24p] [1080/24p]

Picture size 6016k3384 3840k2160 4992k2808 1920k1080

Aspect ratio [16:9]

SD card

4GB 300 750 450 3200

16 GB 1300 3000 1900 12500

64 GB 5000 12000 7500 52000

20.4M

8.3M

14 M

2.1M

20.4M

8.3M

14 M

2.1M

- 254 -

Some optional accessories may not be available in some countries.

Attach the Wide Conversion Lens

(VW-W4907H: optional) ND filter or MC

protector of the Filter Kit (VW-LF49N: optional)

in front of the lens.

≥You will not be able to use the video light. Set

the [VIDEO LIGHT] setting and the [AF

ASSIST LAMP] setting to [OFF]. (l86, 102)

≥When using a Wide Conversion Lens

(optional), set [WIDE CONV. LENS SET] to

[ON]. (l95)

You can attach a variety of optional

accessories to the shoe adaptor. For

information on how to attach and use those

accessories, refer to their manuals.

∫When attaching the shoe adaptor

Insert the shoe adaptor into the shoe adaptor

mounting part.

∫When removing the shoe adaptor

When removing the shoe adaptor, slide the

SHOE ADAPTOR RELEASE lever, and remove

the shoe adaptor while sliding the lever.

Others

Optional accessories

Attaching the Conversion Lens/

Filter Kit

Be careful about the following.

When 2 lens accessories, such as the ND

filter and Wide Conversion Lens, are fitted

and the zoom lever is pressed toward the W

side, the 4 corners of an image will be

darkened. (Vignetting)

Attaching the lens cap of the

Filter Kit (VW-LF49N: optional)

≥When the Filter Kit (VW-LF49N: optional)

is used, protect the lens surface while the

unit is not used with the lens cap supplied

with the Filter Kit.

Attaching the supplied shoe

adaptor [VX981]

SHOE

ADAPTOR

RELEASE

- 255 -

About the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle

If you connect this unit to the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle VW-CTR1 (optional) by USB cable, this unit

can automatically track the movement of the subject being recorded. This unit zooms in/out the

image automatically, and the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle pans and tilts this unit.

1Attach this unit to the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.

≥For details on attachment method, refer to the operating instructions of Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.

2Connect the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit using the USB cable

(supplied with this unit).

ATurn the side with the symbol up to connect the micro B end of the USB Cable to the USB

terminal of this unit.

3Press the power button of the Remote Pan Tilt

Cradle to turn it on.

≥The status indicator B lights on.

4Turn on this unit.

Using Wi-Fi functions in combination with the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle

The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle can also be used by the following Wi-Fi functions. Make the Wi-Fi

connection after connecting the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit.

j[Link to Cell] (l157)

j[Baby Monitor] (l163)

j[Home Cam] (l166)

≥When [Party Scene]/[Moving Object] is in operation, moving object detection with [Home Cam]

will not work. (l169, 257)

≥When [Baby Monitor] is being used, [Party Scene] and [Moving Object] cannot be used.

(l257)

≥Refer to [Help] in the “Image App” menu about operation methods on smartphones.

Connecting the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit





Power button

- 256 -

5Touch [Remote Pan Tilt Cradle].

≥The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode selection screen is displayed.

≥If you have touched an item other than [Remote Pan Tilt Cradle] or if the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle

is not recognized correctly, reconnect the USB cable.

≥If you turn off and on this unit with the USB cable connected, this unit may operate in the previous

Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode.

6Install the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle so that its home

position will face the front of the subject.

≥The home position runs through the center of the power button.

≥Do not use any other USB cables except the supplied one. (Operation is not guaranteed with any

other USB cables.)

≥As shown in the illustration, connect the USB cable or DC cable so that it

will not be caught in objects such as the moving part of the Remote Pan

Tilt Cradle and other cables. If the cable is caught in the moving part of

the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, it may cause the recording position to

change or cause a malfunction.

≥Install the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle in a location that meets the following

requirements:

jA location out of the reach of children and pets

jA level location with no obstacles

jA location approximately 2 to 3 m (6.6 feet to 9.8 feet) away from subjects

≥Do not use the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle when a Wide Conversion Lens (VW-W4907H: optional) is

attached to this unit.

≥Before mounting this unit on the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, insert the SD card and the battery.

≥When this unit is mounted on the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, make sure to hold the Remote Pan Tilt

Cradle to carry them. Carrying them by holding this unit may cause malfunction.

≥Do not use the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle for surveillance purposes.

≥Do not force the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to stop moving during panning/tilting operation.

≥The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is not capable of supplying power to this unit.

≥When the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle detects a problem, its status indicator flashes, and both this

unit and the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle turn off.

≥In the following cases, this unit will be set to Intelligent Auto Mode when connected to the Remote

Pan Tilt Cradle:

jWhen using [Interval] in FULL HD Slow Motion Video Mode

jIn HDR Movie Mode

j(For the )

In Cinema Like Effect Mode (except for when [Always] is selected for FULL HD Slow Motion

Video Mode)

≥The following restrictions apply when this unit is connected to the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle:

jOnly [Always] is available for [SLOW MOTION SETUP].

jHDR Movie Mode is not available.

jYou cannot use the Expanded Focus Assist function by touching and holding the LCD monitor

when the recording screen is displayed. (l77)

Home position

WXF991

- 257 -

≥Connecting the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit. (l255)

≥Set [Panning Angle]/[Tilt Angle]/[Tilt Speed] in advance. (l260)

1Touch the desired Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode.

≥If you touch [Preset Positions], the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will rotate and return to its home

position.

≥If you touch [SETUP], the Setup menu will be displayed. (l260)

2(When [Manual] is selected)

Touch , and operate the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle with / / / .

≥When you finish the operation, touch [ENTER].

(When [Preset Positions] is selected)

Touch the position button.

≥The position buttons will disappear when no touch operation is performed for a specific period of

time. To display them again, touch the screen.

≥When is not highlighted in yellow, even if you touch the screen, the position buttons will not

be displayed. To display them, touch , and touch the screen while is highlighted in

yellow.

≥If you have not registered positions to the position buttons yet, touch to register them.

(l258)

Using the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle

Mode Operation of the

Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Description

[Party Scene]

The operation is

automatic.

≥The Remote Pan Tilt

Cradle works within the

recording range set in

[Panning Angle]/[Tilt

Angle].

At an event such as a party, recording will be

performed while the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle

automatically controls the recording direction

within the recording range.

≥When a person or a moving object is

detected, recording of the person or the

object takes priority for a specific period of

time.

[Moving Object]

When a moving object is detected within the

recording range, the object will be tracked and

recorded automatically.

[Manual] The operation is manual. This mode lets you manually operate the

Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.

[Preset Positions]

The operation is

automatic.

≥The Remote Pan Tilt

Cradle moves to

recording angles

registered to the

position buttons.

This mode lets you perform recording from

preset recording angles. You can switch

between different angles with the touch of a

button.

You can also set the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to

automatically cycle through recording angles

registered to the position buttons.

≥For information on how to register them or

use this mode, refer to page 258.

POS

- 258 -

3Press the recording start/stop button.

(When [Party Scene]/[Moving Object] is selected)

≥Before recording starts, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle rotates and returns to its home position. It

takes time until recording starts.

≥The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle operates within the range set in advance.

(When [Manual]/[Preset Positions] is selected)

≥Performing the operation of Step 2 during recording may cause the recording screen to shake or

the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to move from its original location.

To switch the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode

Tou ch .

≥The selection screen of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode is displayed. Touch the desired mode.

To exit the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle

Tou ch [E X I T].

≥The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle rotates and returns to its home position.

≥After the operation, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle turns off. Before removing this unit, disconnect

the USB cable.

∫Registering positions to the position buttons

1Touch .

2Touch the position button to which you want to register a position.

≥You can register positions to [POS1]/[POS2]/[POS3]/[POS4]/[POS5]

≥The position buttons without a registered position are indicated as [Not set].

3Determine a position with / / /

≥You can also operate the zoom with the zoom lever.

4Touch [ENTER].

≥To register positions to other position buttons, repeat Steps 2–4.

≥To adjust a position that has already been registered to a position button, touch the position

button to which the position you want to adjust is registered, and follow Steps 3–4.

∫Moving the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to a registered position

1Touch .

≥Check that is highlighted in yellow.

≥The position buttons ([POS1]/[POS2]/[POS3]/[POS4]/[POS5]/[HOME]) will be displayed.

These buttons will disappear when no touch operation is performed for approximately 5 seconds.

To display them again, touch the screen.

2Touch the desired position button.

≥The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will move to the registered position of the selected position button.

≥You cannot select position buttons without a registered position.

≥If you touch [CANCEL], the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will stop in a midway position.

≥To return to the home position, touch [HOME].

∫Using Cycle Mode

In this mode, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle cycles through positions registered to the position buttons

in the desired sequence.

The default sequence is as follows: [HOME] # [POS1] # [POS2] # [POS3] # [POS4] # [POS5]

Setting up [Preset Positions]

POS

- 259 -

Touch .

≥The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle moves to the next position at approximately 5 second intervals.

≥If you touch [Stop] while the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is moving, it will stop midway. Cyclic Mode

will be deactivated.

≥If you touch [Pause] and touch another position button, Cyclic Mode will be deactivated. The

Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will move to the position of the position button you have touched.

≥In Cyclic Mode, turns of the position buttons without a registered position will be skipped. The

Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will move to the position of the next position button.

Rearranging the Cycle Mode sequence

1Touch .

2Touch .

3Touch the desired turn.

≥If you touch [Reset], the sequence will return to the default setting.

4Touch the desired position button.

≥If you touch [SKIP], the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will skip to the position of the next turn in Cyclic

Mode.

5Touch [ENTER].

∫Deleting positions registered to the position buttons

1Touch .

2Touch .

3Touch the position button you want to delete.

≥To delete all positions registered to the position buttons, touch [Delete all].

4Touch [YES].

≥When this unit is connected to the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, this unit is set to Motion Picture

Recording Mode. You cannot switch this unit to Still Picture Recording Mode.

≥We recommend that you make a test recording in advance to check if the image and sound are

recorded correctly.

≥The sound of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle in operation will be recorded.

≥If you start recording after making changes to the setup of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, such as

switching the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode or changing the location of the Remote Pan Tilt

Cradle, it may rotate and return to its home position.

≥Once the operation starts, do not disconnect the USB cable or move the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle

and this unit until the operation is finished. This may cause a malfunction or the motion picture not

to be recorded correctly.

≥When you press the power button or when [ECONOMY (BATT)] (l41) or [ECONOMY (AC)]

(l41) works, this unit and the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will turn off after the Remote Pan Tilt

Cradle rotates and returns to its home position.

≥When the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is in operation, neither [ECONOMY (BATT)] nor [ECONOMY

(AC)] will work.

≥The following functions will be set to [OFF]:

jLevel Shot Function

jOptical Image Stabilizer

j[SHOOTING GUIDE]

≥If you experience fatigue, a feeling of discomfort or other symptoms when playing back a scene

recorded with the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle, stop the playback.

- 260 -

(About [Party Scene]/[Moving Object])

≥Still pictures cannot be recorded during Motion picture recording.

≥Depending on recording conditions, the color tone of the image being recorded may change or

subjects may not be recorded automatically in cases such as the following:

jThe subject is too large or too small

jThe background and the subject are similar in color

jThe recording location is dark

jBright light is detected (sky, TV, lamp, etc.)

jThe subject is moving too fast, or not moving

jThe area being recorded is close to a window

≥Depending on recording conditions, scenes may not be recorded as intended. In such cases, we

recommend setting the mode to [Manual].

(About [Party Scene])

≥[Sound Scene Select] is set to [Auto].

(About [Moving Object])

≥

When recording starts, a moving subject will be detected. Before recording, point the camera at the subject.

≥This unit cannot track more than one subject simultaneously.

≥Certain types of subjects, such as a fast moving subject, may not be tracked.

(About [Preset Positions])

≥Some screen indications disappear when the position buttons are displayed or the Remote Pan

Tilt Cradle is moving to a position.

When the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is connected to this unit, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle setup menu can be set.

≥Connecting the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle to this unit (l255)

1Touch [SETUP] in the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle Mode screen.

2Touch desired menu item.

Set the left/right pan range of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle for [Party Scene]/[Moving Object].

Set the up/down tilt range of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle for [Party Scene]/[Moving Object].

Remote Pan Tilt Cradle settings

[Panning Angle] [±180°]/[±90°]/[±45°]/[Stationary]

[±180°]: Pans to the left/right up to approx. 180 o.

[±90°]: Pans to the left/right up to approx. 90 o.

[±45°]: Pans to the left/right up to approx. 45 o.

[Stationary]: Panning to the left/right is off.

[Tilt Angle] [±15°]/[Stationary]

[±15°]: Tilts up/down up to approx. 15 o.

[Stationary]: Tilting up/down is off.

- 261 -

Set the up/down operation speed of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.

You can confirm the operating range of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle set for [Party Scene]/[Moving

Object].

≥The Remote Pan Tilt Cradle moves in the ranges set at [Panning Angle] and [Tilt Angle].

≥When the confirmation operation is finished, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle returns to its home

position.

The firmware version of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle is displayed.

You can update the firmware version of the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.

≥Before updating this unit, update the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle.

If you update this unit first, the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle may become unusable.

You can watch the demonstration of how the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will operate when [Party

Scene] is set.

≥Touch [Party Scene Demo], the demonstration automatically starts.

When you touch [EXIT], the demonstration will be canceled.

You can watch the demonstration of how the Remote Pan Tilt Cradle will operate when [Moving

Object] is set.

≥Touch [Moving Object Demo], the demonstration automatically starts.

When you touch [EXIT], the demonstration will be canceled.

[Tilt Speed] [High]/[Normal]

[Pan/Tilt Check]

[Firmware Version Info]

[Firmware Upgrade]

For the latest update information, check the support website below. (As of November

2015)

http://panasonic.jp/support/global/cs/e_cam

(This Site is English only)

[Party Scene Demo]

[Moving Object Demo]

Panasonic Corporation

Web site: http://www.panasonic.com

Panasonic HC WXF991/HC VX981 WX991 Owner’s Manual Adv En Om

HC-VX981 - Owner’s Manual hc-vx981_hc-wxf991_adv_en_om Free User Guide for Panasonic Camcorder, Manual - page1

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation